02 EVRC2A-NT-610 Manual Control Ver1.10 20190117 [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

Release Date: Oct. 2018 / Manual Revision:1.10

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT USER’S MANUAL

ENTEC

ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD

Copyright © 2018 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved.

Forerunner Distribution & Automation

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Release Note:

[Oct. 2018] Ver1.00

New user manual for EVRC2A-NT-610

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

i

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1 1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.2. Summary of Features........................................................................................................... 2

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 7 2.1. Inputs and Outputs............................................................................................................... 7 2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 9 2.3. Metering Accuracy ............................................................................................................ 11 2.4. Recloser Mode Functions .................................................................................................. 12 2.5. Sectionalizer Mode Functions ........................................................................................... 22 2.6. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 23 2.7. Loop Control ..................................................................................................................... 28 2.8. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 29 2.9. Communications ................................................................................................................ 35

3. APPLICATION ............................................................................................................. 36 4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 37 5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 38 5.1. Communication Port.......................................................................................................... 39 5.2. NTC Connector ................................................................................................................. 41 5.3. Current Input Connector .................................................................................................... 41 5.4. Voltage Input Connector .................................................................................................... 42 5.5. SCADA Connector - Option............................................................................................. 42 5.6. Monitor Connector ............................................................................................................ 43 5.7. Status Inputs Connector..................................................................................................... 43 5.8. Trip/Close Connector ........................................................................................................ 44 5.9. Outputs Connector............................................................................................................. 44 5.10. Power Input / Battery Input Connector ........................................................................... 45 5.11. Power Output Connector ................................................................................................. 45

6. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 46 6.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 47 6.1.1. Operation Section ................................................................................................... 47

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

ii

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.2. Local Control Section............................................................................................. 48 6.1.3. Menu Control Section ............................................................................................ 53 6.1.4. Fault Indication Section ......................................................................................... 55 6.1.5. Voltage Element Section......................................................................................... 55 6.1.6. Reclosing Sequence Status Section ........................................................................ 56 6.1.7. System Diagnostic Section ..................................................................................... 56 6.1.8. Battery Status Section ............................................................................................ 56 6.1.9. User LED Section................................................................................................... 57 6.1.10. Set Group Status Section ...................................................................................... 58 6.1.11. Other Status Section ............................................................................................. 58 6.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 59 6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree ............................................................................................... 59 6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting ................................................................................................... 62 6.2.3. GROUP Setting ...................................................................................................... 63 6.2.4. Event ...................................................................................................................... 64 6.2.5. Maintenance ........................................................................................................... 64 6.2.6. Time........................................................................................................................ 64 6.2.7. Status ...................................................................................................................... 64 6.2.8. Metering ................................................................................................................. 64 6.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 65 6.3.1. Initial Screen .......................................................................................................... 65 6.3.2. Main Menu ............................................................................................................. 70 6.3.3. Setting Example ..................................................................................................... 70 6.3.4. Setting Save ............................................................................................................ 71

7. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 72 7.1. General Setting .................................................................................................................. 72 7.1.1. System .................................................................................................................... 73 7.1.1.1. Power Line ........................................................................................................ 73 7.1.1.2. Current Sensing ................................................................................................. 76 7.1.1.3. Voltage Sensing ................................................................................................. 77 7.1.1.4. Event Recorder .................................................................................................. 80 7.1.2. Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 83 7.1.2.1. Live Line ........................................................................................................... 83 7.1.2.2. Operation Count ................................................................................................ 84 7.1.2.3. Contact Wear ..................................................................................................... 85 7.1.2.4. Auto Battery Load Test...................................................................................... 88

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

iii

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.2.5. Battery Management.......................................................................................... 88 7.1.2.6. Power Quality Monitoring ................................................................................. 90 7.1.2.7. System Power .................................................................................................... 98 7.1.3. Loop Control ........................................................................................................ 100 7.1.3.1. Setting .............................................................................................................. 103 7.1.3.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram ...........................................................................111 7.1.3.3. Loop Control Application ................................................................................ 114 7.1.4. Passcode ............................................................................................................... 121 7.1.5. PLC....................................................................................................................... 121 7.1.5.1. LOGIC TIMER................................................................................................ 121 7.1.5.2. PULSE TIMER................................................................................................ 122 7.1.5.3. PULSE COUNTER ......................................................................................... 123 7.1.5.4. INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS ............................................................................... 124 7.1.5.5. Latch Logic ...................................................................................................... 126 7.1.5.6. Oneshot Logic ................................................................................................. 127 7.1.5.7. PLC Setting Example ...................................................................................... 128 7.1.6. Device................................................................................................................... 131 7.1.6.1. Control Type .................................................................................................... 131 7.1.6.2. CB Operation Time.......................................................................................... 132 7.1.6.3. H/W Option ..................................................................................................... 133 7.1.6.4. GAS Sensor Type ............................................................................................ 134 7.1.6.5. Manual Close ................................................................................................... 135 7.1.6.6. LCD Display.................................................................................................... 135 7.1.6.7. Panel Sleep Time ............................................................................................. 138 7.1.6.8. Time Zone........................................................................................................ 139 7.1.6.9. Others .............................................................................................................. 140 7.1.6.10.

Factory Debug.......................................................................................... 141

7.1.7. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 141 7.2. Communication ............................................................................................................... 142 7.2.1. Protocol Setup ...................................................................................................... 142 7.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup ...................................................................................... 143 7.2.1.2. IEC60870-5 Protocol Setup ............................................................................. 151 7.2.1.3. MODBUS Protocol Setup ............................................................................... 164 7.2.1.4. IEC61850 Protocol Setup ................................................................................ 166 7.2.1.5. SNTP Protocol Setup ....................................................................................... 166 7.2.1.6. SNMP Protocol Setup ...................................................................................... 167

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

iv

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.7. ETIMS Protocol Setup .................................................................................... 168 7.2.1.8. Multi-Bit Protocol .......................................................................................... 169 7.2.2. Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 176 7.2.2.1. RS232-1 and RS232-2 Ports Setup.................................................................. 176 7.2.2.2. RS485 Port Setup ............................................................................................ 179 7.2.2.3. EHTERNET Ports Setup ................................................................................. 181 7.2.3. RTU Communication (Dialup Modem) Setup ..................................................... 183 7.2.3.1. Configure modem with AT commands ............................................................ 183 7.2.3.2. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem ........................................... 184 7.2.3.3. Dialup Modem Setup....................................................................................... 185 7.2.4. FTP-SSL ............................................................................................................... 188 7.2.5. Wifi ....................................................................................................................... 189 7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup ................................................................................................ 190 7.2.7. Save Setting .......................................................................................................... 194

8. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 195 8.1. Recloser ........................................................................................................................... 196 8.1.1. Auto Reclosing (79) ............................................................................................. 200 8.1.1.1. Auto Reclosing Setup ...................................................................................... 203 8.1.2. Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51P) ........................................................... 210 8.1.3. Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51G) ....................................................... 215 8.1.4. Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51Q(46)) .............................. 219 8.1.5. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P1) ............................................................. 223 8.1.6. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G1) .......................................................... 225 8.1.7. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SG)................................................................................ 227 8.1.8. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q1(46)) ................................. 229 8.1.9. Phase Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50P2) ............................................... 231 8.1.10. Ground Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50G2).......................................... 233 8.1.11. Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50Q2(46))................................. 235 8.1.12. Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................. 237 8.1.12.1.

Inrush Restraint Setup.............................................................................. 238

8.1.13. Cold Load Pickup ............................................................................................... 246 8.1.13.1.

Cold Load Pickup Setup .......................................................................... 247

8.1.14. Harmonic Block (2HB and 5HB) ....................................................................... 249 8.1.15. Directional Controls (67).................................................................................... 251 8.1.15.1.

Phase Directional Controls (67P) ............................................................ 251

8.1.15.2.

Ground Directional Controls (67G) ......................................................... 254

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

v

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.15.3.

SEF Directional Controls (67SEF) .......................................................... 256

8.1.15.4.

Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46)) ................................... 256

8.1.16. Broken Conductor (64BC) ................................................................................. 259 8.1.17. Voltage (27/59/64N) ........................................................................................... 261 8.1.17.1.

Undervoltage (27) .................................................................................... 261

8.1.17.2.

Overvoltage (59) and Neutral Overvoltage (64N) ................................... 265

8.1.18. Frequency (81) ................................................................................................... 269 8.1.18.1.

Underfrequency (81U) ............................................................................. 269

8.1.18.2.

Overfrequency (81O) ............................................................................... 271

8.1.18.3.

Frequency Decay (81D) ........................................................................... 273

8.1.18.4.

Frequency Auto Restoration (81R) .......................................................... 275

8.1.19. Power (32) .......................................................................................................... 277 8.1.19.1.

Common Setting for Power elements ...................................................... 277

8.1.19.2.

Forward Power(32FP).............................................................................. 278

8.1.19.3.

Directional Power(32P) ........................................................................... 279

8.1.20. Demand (49) ....................................................................................................... 281 8.1.20.1.

Phase Demand Current (49P)................................................................... 281

8.1.20.2.

Ground Demand Current (49G) ............................................................... 282

8.1.20.3.

Negative Sequence Demand Current (49Q) ............................................ 282

8.1.20.4.

ACTIVE POWER Setup .......................................................................... 283

8.1.20.5.

REACTIVE POWER Setup..................................................................... 283

8.1.21. Z0 Admittance (21YN) ....................................................................................... 284 8.1.22. Hotline Tag ......................................................................................................... 290 8.1.22.1.

PHASE ..................................................................................................... 290

8.1.22.2.

GROUND ................................................................................................ 291

8.1.22.3.

SEF .......................................................................................................... 292

8.1.22.4.

NEG SEQ’ ............................................................................................... 292

8.1.23. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves.............................................................. 293 8.1.23.1.

User-Defined Curves ............................................................................... 294

8.1.23.2.

Standard Curves Coefficients .................................................................. 296

8.1.23.3.

Non Standard Curves ............................................................................... 297

8.1.23.4.

Fuse Curves.............................................................................................. 298

8.1.23.5.

Curves ...................................................................................................... 300

8.1.24. Others ................................................................................................................. 328 8.1.24.1.

Sequence Coordination ............................................................................ 328

8.1.24.2.

Other settings ........................................................................................... 329

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

vi

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2. Sectionalizer .................................................................................................................... 330 8.2.1. FI Pickup Current ................................................................................................. 330 8.2.2. Inrush Time .......................................................................................................... 331 8.2.3. Auto Setction ........................................................................................................ 332 8.2.3.1. Auto Sectionalizer Setup ................................................................................. 333 8.2.3.2. Auto Section Application ................................................................................ 338 8.3. Monitoring....................................................................................................................... 347 8.3.1. Phase Difference................................................................................................... 347 8.3.2. Synchro’ Check (25)............................................................................................. 349 8.3.3. Open Phase ........................................................................................................... 353 8.3.4. Live Line Block.................................................................................................... 354 8.3.5. Fault Locator ........................................................................................................ 355 8.3.6. Load Current Alarm ............................................................................................. 358 8.3.7. Power Factor (55) ................................................................................................. 360 8.4. Save Setting ..................................................................................................................... 361

9. EVENT RECORDER.................................................................................................. 362 9.1. Operation Event............................................................................................................... 362 9.2. Fault Event ...................................................................................................................... 364 9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary ................................................................................................... 366 9.4. System Event ................................................................................................................... 367 9.5. Set Change Event ............................................................................................................ 368 9.6. Load & Energy Event ...................................................................................................... 369 9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event .................................................................................. 369 9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event ................................................................................. 371 9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day ............................................................................................. 372 9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration..................................................................... 374 9.7. Diagnostic Event ............................................................................................................. 375 9.8. PQM Event ...................................................................................................................... 376 9.9. Load Current Alarm Event .............................................................................................. 378 9.10. Clear Saved Data ........................................................................................................... 379

10. MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................... 380 10.1. Count ............................................................................................................................. 380 10.1.1. EVRC2A-NT Count .......................................................................................... 380 10.1.2. Fault Count ......................................................................................................... 381 10.1.3. PQM Count ........................................................................................................ 383

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

vii

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3.1.

Interrupt ................................................................................................... 383

10.1.3.2.

Sag ........................................................................................................... 383

10.1.3.3.

Swell ........................................................................................................ 384

10.1.3.4.

Harmonics ................................................................................................ 384

10.1.3.5.

Current Unbalance ................................................................................... 384

10.1.3.6.

Voltage Unbalance ................................................................................... 385

10.1.3.7.

Under Voltage .......................................................................................... 385

10.1.3.8.

Over Voltage ............................................................................................ 386

10.1.3.9.

Under Frequency...................................................................................... 386

10.1.4. Communication Count ....................................................................................... 387 10.1.5. User Count .......................................................................................................... 389 10.2. Interrupt Time ................................................................................................................ 390 10.3. Contact Wear ................................................................................................................. 391 10.4. Data Reset...................................................................................................................... 391 10.5. Controller Information .................................................................................................. 392 10.6. Mechanism Scale ........................................................................................................... 392

11. TIME........................................................................................................................... 393 12. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 394 12.1. Recloser ......................................................................................................................... 394 12.2. Input Ports ..................................................................................................................... 396 12.3. Output Ports................................................................................................................... 396 12.4. GOOSE Single Input ..................................................................................................... 397 12.5. GOOSE Double Input ................................................................................................... 397 12.6. GOOSE Output.............................................................................................................. 398 12.7. Latch Logic.................................................................................................................... 398 12.8. Fault ............................................................................................................................... 399 12.9. Diagonosic ..................................................................................................................... 400

13. METERING............................................................................................................... 401 13.1. Current ........................................................................................................................... 401 13.2. Voltage ........................................................................................................................... 402 13.3. Frequency ...................................................................................................................... 403 13.4. Power............................................................................................................................. 404 13.5. Energy ........................................................................................................................... 405 13.6. Demand Current and Power .......................................................................................... 406 13.7. Unbalance ...................................................................................................................... 408

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

viii

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.8. Harmonics ..................................................................................................................... 409 13.9. True R.M.S .................................................................................................................... 409 13.10. Controller Reference ................................................................................................... 410

14. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 411 14.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ..........................................................................411 14.2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 412 14.3. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 414 14.4. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 415 14.5. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 416 14.6. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 416 14.7. EVRC2A-NT Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................... 417 14.8. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram..................................................................................... 418 14.9. VD Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................................... 419 14.10. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 420 14.11. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 421 14.12. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling ............................................................... 422 14.13. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 423 14.14. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 423 14.15. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 423 14.16. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 424 14.17. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 425 14.18. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 425 14.19. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 426 14.20. Hardware Block Diagram............................................................................................ 427 14.21. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 428 14.22. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 430 14.23. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram.................................................................................... 431 14.24. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 432 14.25. CT Protection Circuit .................................................................................................. 432 14.26. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) ................................................................................... 433 14.27. Voltage Transducer ...................................................................................................... 434 14.28. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 435 14.29. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 436 14.30. Recloser Trip and Close Coil ...................................................................................... 436 14.31. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 437

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

ix

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

15. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 438 15.1. Warning Events.............................................................................................................. 438

16. PLC FUNCTION....................................................................................................... 441 17. FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL ............................................................................. 442 17.1. Patching firmware to upgrade ....................................................................................... 442 17.2. COMTRADE................................................................................................................. 443 17.2.1. File format and Name ......................................................................................... 443 17.2.2. Releated Setting Items ........................................................................................ 443

18. WIRELESS CONNECTION ................................................................................... 444 18.1. Connection using WIFI (PC) ......................................................................................... 444 18.2. Connection using Smart ETIMS ................................................................................... 445 18.3. Security.......................................................................................................................... 446 18.3.1. SSL / TLS ........................................................................................................... 446 18.3.2. AES..................................................................................................................... 446

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

x

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1. INTRODUCTION 1.1. Description EVRC2A-NT with microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for continuous best quality of electric service. Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option) which fundamentally installed. EVRC2A-NT provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote. It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters. Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy metering is also performed. Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control EVRC2A-NT with key buttons on the user interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled, Control Locked, Remote enabled, GROUP settings, Loop control Enabled, Loop control auto restore, Hot line tag and so on. Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of settings, acquisition of event data, and management of operation history. To provide fully protective coordination for the continuous best quality of electric distribution, EVRC2A-NT contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3, McGraw Edison, and KEPCO and so on. Users can select any time of current curve simply by programming and modifying.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

1

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1.2. Summary of Features PROTECTION ( RECLOSER MODE) 

Automatic Reclosing(Up To 5 Shots)



Two Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements



Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements



Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element



Two Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements



Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements



Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element



Sensitive Earth Fault Element



Two Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements



Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements



Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout Element



Inrush Restraint and Cold Load Pickup



2nd and 5th Harmonic Block Elements



Phase Directional Control



Ground Directional Control



Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control



Negative Sequence Directional Control



Sequence Coordination Control



Broken Conduct Element



Two Under Voltage Elements



Two Over Voltage Elements



Neutral Over Voltage Elements



Voltage Auto Restoration



Two Under Frequency Elements



Two Over Frequency Elements



Frequency Decay Element



Frequency Auto Restoration



Two Forward Power Elements



Two Directional Power Elements



Phase Current, Ground Current, Negative Sequence Current, Active Power and Reactive Power Demand Elements



Z0 Admittance Element



Hotline Tag Element

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

2

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

FAULT INDICATION (SECTIONALIZER MODE) 

Phase Fault Indication



Ground Fault Indication



Sensitive Earth Fault Indication



Negative Sequence Fault Indication



Inrush Restraint



Auto Sectionalizer

MONITORING (COMMON) 

Phase Difference



Synchro’ Check



Open Phase



Live Line Block



Fault Locator (applies to Recloser mode only)



Load Current Alarm



Power Factor (Lead and Lag)



Live Line



Operation Count



Contact Wear per Phase



Battery Automatic Load Test & Battery Management



Power Quality -

Interrupt

-

Sag

-

Swell

-

Harmonics

-

Current Unbalance

-

Voltage Unbalance

-

Under Voltage

-

Over Voltage

-

Under Frequency



Transducer(TD) Monitor



Recloser Trip/Close Coil



Breaker Failure with Current Supervision



System Power



Recloser Gas Over/Under Pressure NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

3

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

EVENT RECORDER 

S/W Operation Recorder - last 5,000 events



Fault Event Recorder - last 1,500 events



Fault Waveform(60 cycles× 64 samples) - last 32 events



System Event Recorder - last 5,000 events



Setting Change Event Recorder - last 2,000 events



Load&Energy Recorder -

Average Load & Energy – last 8,640 events (Max 360 days)

-

Peak Load & Energy in every hour – last 8,640 events

-

Peak Load & Energy in every day – last 8,640 events



Diagnostic Event Recorder - last 2,000 events



PQM Detection Event Recorder - last 1,500 events



Load Current Alarm Event Recorder - last 1,500 events NOTE : 1. The maximum number of all events except fault waveform to be stored can be increased according to user requests. 2. According to setting, waveform can support COTRADE format.

MAINTENANCE 

Restart, Diagnostic and Operation counters



Fault Trip and Fault counters



PQM counters



Communication counters



User counters



Interrupt Time



Contact Wear per Phase

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

4

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

METERING 

Each Phase Current and Angle : Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef



Each Phase Pick Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq



Each Phase and Line to Line Voltage and Angle : Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vrs, Vst, Vtr



Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component : I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0



Source and Load side Frequency, Frequency Change Rate, Slip Frequency and Slip Angle



Single Phase and Three Phase Power : Active Power(kW), Reactive Power(kVar), Apparent Power(kVA), Power Factor(%)



Positive and Negative Energy : Active Energy(kWh), Reactive Energy(kVarh)



Present and Positive/Negative Maximum Demand -

Demand Current : Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq

-

Single Phase and Three Phase Active Power(kW) and Reactive Poer(kVar)



Source/Load side Voltage and Current Unbalance



Voltage and Current Harmonics (THD, 2nd ~ 31th order)



Voltage and Current True R.M.S



Z0 Impedance, Y0 Admitance



EVRC2A-NT Condition Reference -

Battery Voltage, Charger Voltage and Charger Current

-

Battery Capacity

-

EVRC2A-NT Internal Temperature

-

EVRC2A-NT External Temperature - Option

-

Gas Pressure – Option

-

System Power : +12V, -12V, Reference Voltage

COMMUNICATIONS 

Side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and MultiBit Protocol, EVRC2A-NT Interface Software



Side panel RS485 Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol



Side panel Eth1 and Eth2 Ethernet Port or Fiber Optic(Option) Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC61850, IEC60870-5-104 and Multi-Bit Protocol, EVRC2A-NT Interface Software



Front Panel USB-B Type Port : EVRC2A-NT Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

5

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

USER INTERFACE 

Fault Indicators



Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage



Dual Functional Keypads



20×8 Character LCD Display



59 LED indicators - Fault indications, Sequence status, Battery status, etc.



Setting Range Help Messages



Access Security (3 Passwords with Different Authorities)

OTHERS 

Loop Control (applies to Recloser mode only)



Programmable Logic Control(PLC)



Time Synchronism Device (IRIG) – Option



Wifi – Option



GPS - Option

AUXILIARY INPUTS 

12 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs – Option

AUXILIARY OUTPUTS 

8 Dry Contact Programmable Outputs – Option

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

6

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.1. Inputs and Outputs SYSTEMS 

3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum

FREQUENCY 

50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation

CONTROL VOLTAGE INPUT 

AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (±20%)



Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc

USER AVAILABLE DC POWER OUTPUT - Option 

DC Power Voltage : 24Vdc or (12Vdc, 15Vdc option)



DC Power Continuous : 40W(60W/1 min)

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS (VT) - Standard 

Voltage Inputs Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt



Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous 0.03)



Active Power : ±0.7 % PF=1, ±1% PF>0.87(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)



Reactive Power : ±0.7 % PF=0, ±1% PF80%, Rated Current >0.03)

FREQUENCY METERING 

Source/Load Voltage Frequency : ±0.01 Hz

HARMONIC METERING : ±5%

Z0 Impedance 

Z0 Impedance, Y0 Admitance : ±0.7 % (Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)

The above measurement accuracy is applied only for EVRC2A-NT controller. The measurement accuracy of voltage and current including recloser is about ±1 %.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

11

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.4. Recloser Mode Functions Auto Reclosing Function..................................................................... ENABLE/DISABLE Operations to Lockout – Phase .................................. 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - Ground ............................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - SEF ..................................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq’ ..................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - phase ..... NO/YES Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - ground... NO/YES Active Fast Curve Operation of Shot 1~5 - NEQ...... NO/YES Reclose interval 1 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 0.10 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s Reclose interval 2 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 1.00 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s Reclose interval 3 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 1.00 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s Reclose interval 4 – Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ ... 1.00 to 1,800.00s in steps of 0.01s Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle............................ 0.10 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Reset time from lockout ............................................ 0.10 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Reclose Wait Time ..................................................... 1.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Overcurrent Protection (+/-) Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A *. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary according to H/W option. Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup Curve Type ................................................................ Total 62 Curves 

ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely



IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse



EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse



Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s



Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4



User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4



McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32

 Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR) Time Dial ................................................................... 0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

12

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Minimum Response Time ......................................... 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s Reset Type ................................................................. INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR Low Set Definite Time .............................................. OFF, 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-) Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. 10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Active Sequence ........................................................ 1~5shot in steps of 1shot Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Sensitive Earth Fault Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection(+/-) Function..................................................................... DISALBE/TRIP/TRIP&ALARM/ALARM Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.0 in steps of 0.01s Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Inst’ Overcurrent Lockout Protection(+/-) Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ...................... 10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Active Sequence ........................................................ 1~5shot in steps of 1shot Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

13

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Inrush Restraint Phase/Ground/SEF/Neg Seq’ Function….………..DISABLE/ ENABLE Fault Pickup Level at Inrush Restraint Duration 

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ……….10 to 20,000A in steps of 1A



SEF Pickup Level…………………….……….0.1 to 2,000.0A in steps of 0.1A

 Dropout Level…………………………………5% Restore Minimum Time 

Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ Function…………..DISABLE/ ENABLE

 Restore Minimum Time……………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Inrush Restraint Reset 

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Rest Current…….…..10 ~ 1600A in steps of 1A



SEF Rest Current…….………………………..0.1 ~ 160.0A in steps of 0.1A

 Reset Time…………………………………….0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Curves 

Curve Type…………………………………….Total 62 Curves -

ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely

-

IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse

-

EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse

-

Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s

-

Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4

-

User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4

-

McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32

-

Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR)



Time Dial……………………………………..0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01



Time Adder……………………………………0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Minimum Response Time…………………….0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s



Reset Type…………………………………….INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR

Outage Time .............................................................. 0.01 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Outage Current .......................................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

14

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Cold Load Pickup Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES Multiple of Cold Load….………………………….1.0 to 5.0 xMTC in steps of 0.1 xMTC Cold Load Interval Time ........................................... 1 to 720 min in steps 1 min Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

2nd and 5th Harmonic Blocking Function..................................................................... DISALBE/ENABLE Pickup Level.............................................................. OFF, 5 to 100% in steps of 1% Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Reset Time ................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Minimum Current...................................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

Phase Directional Control Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1 Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

Ground/Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Control Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage (–3V0) For voltage element polarizing the source VTs must be connected in Wye Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

15

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Negative Directional Control Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage(-V2) Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359 Lag in steps of 1 Lag Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

Broken Conduct Protection Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Pickup Level(I2/I1) ................................................... 1 to 100% in steps of 1% Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Minimum Normal Current......................................... OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A Maximum Normal Current ........................................ OFF, 10 to 630A in steps of 1A Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max) 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Voltage Protection Under Voltage 1,2 

Function………………………………………..DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM



Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Minimum Normal Voltage……………………..0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P) Under Voltage Auto Restoration 

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE



Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Reset Time……………………………………..1 to 100 min. in steps of 1 min.



Restoration Source Side………………………...VS/VL/VS&VL



Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

16

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Over Voltage 1,2 

Function………………………………………..DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM



Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

 Active Voltage Type…………………………… Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P) Neutral Over Voltage 1,2 

Function………………………………………..DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM



Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Over Voltage Auto Restoration 

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE



Pickup Level …………………………………...0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Reset Time……………………………………..1 to 100 min. in steps of 1 min.



Restoration Source Side………………………...VS/VL/VS&VL



Active Voltage Type……………………………Any One(1P)/Any Two(2P)/All Three(3P)

Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5% Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup when Over Voltage 102 to 105% of Pickup when Under Voltage Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

Frequency Protection Under Frequency 1,2 

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE



Pickup Level …………………………………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Minimum Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A Over Frequency 1,2 

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE



Pickup Level …………………………………... 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT



Minimum Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

17

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Frequency Decay 

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE



Pickup Level(Hz/sec) ………………………… 0.01 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01㎐/sec



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Minimum Normal Frequency…..……………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐



Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT



Minimum Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A

 Active Type………….…………………………INCREASE/DECREASE/ABSOLUTE Frequency Auto Restoration 

Function……………………………………….. DISABLE/ENABLE



Pickup Level …………………………………... 45.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01㎐



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Reset Time………………………….…………. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s



Minimum Normal Voltage……………………...0.00 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Minimum Normal Current………………………OFF, 1 to 630A in steps of 1A Level Accuracy.......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐ Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup + 0.02㎐ when Under Frequency at CVD Pickup+0.05㎐ when Under Frequency at VT Pickup - 0.02㎐ when Over Frequency at CVD Pickup -0.05㎐ when Over Frequency Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

18

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Power Protection Function..................................................................... DISABLE/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM Function Bloke Time After Close ............................. 0.02 to 300.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec Forward Power 1,2 

Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.00 to 300.00MW in steps of 0.01MW



Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec



Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power

Directional Power 1,2 

Active Minimum Power Level..………………. OFF, -300.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01MW



Angle………………………………………….0.00 to 359.99° in steps 0.01°



Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec



Polarizing Power………………………………3-Phase Active Power and Reactive Power

Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Phase, Ground, Negative Sequence Demand Protection Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Pickup Level 

Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’………………………10A to 1600A in steps of 1A



Active Power………………………………….0.01 to 300.00 MW in step of 0.01 MW

 Reactive Power………………………………..0.01 to 300.00 Mvar in step of 0.01 Mvar Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Demand Type ............................................................ THERMAL/BLOCK Thermal Interval Time .............................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min Block Interval Time .................................................. 5/10/15/20/30/60 min Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

19

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Z0 Admittance Protection Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Protection Type.......................................................... G&B/G/B Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Minimun S.E.F Current ............................................. 0.1 to 160.0 A in steps of 0.1A Minimum 3V0 Voltage .............................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Reset Time ................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Right Conductance (G) ............................................. 0.02 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS Left Conductance (G) ............................................... 0.02 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS Up Susceptance (B) .................................................. 0.02 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS Down Susceptance (B) ............................................. 0.02 to 500.00 mS in steps of 0.01 mS Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Hot Line Tag Curve Type ................................................................ Total 62 Curves 

ANSI/IEEE : Normally, Very, Extremely



IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely, Long Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse



EB : Normally, Very, Long Time Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse



Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s



Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4



User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4



McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32

 Fuse Non-standard Curve : 3 (RI, HR, FR) Time Dial ................................................................... 0.01 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01 Time Adder ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Minimum Response Time ......................................... 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s Reset Type ................................................................. INSTANTANEOUS/LINEAR Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ trip time delay 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

20

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Sequence Coordination Control Sequence Coordination ............................................. ON/ OFF

Lockout Priority Lockout Priority ........................................................ PHASE/ GROUND

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

21

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.5. Sectionalizer Mode Functions Fault Indication Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Pickup Level ...... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A Sensitive Earth Fault Pickup Level ........................... 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A *. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary according to H/W option. Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

Inrush Duration Time Phase/Ground/S.E.F/Neg Seq’ .................................. 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

Auto Section Type Select ................................................................ OFF/AUTO SETCTION/TIE POINT Auto Sectionalizer Control 

Auto Sectionalizer Operate Count ...…………..1 to 5 Count in steps of 1 Count



Auto Sectionalizer Operate Time Delay…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec



Auto Sectionalizer Reset Time Delay……….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec



Time Delay……………………………………..0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s

Tie Point Switch Control 

Tie Point Switch Operate Count ......…………..1 to 5 Count in steps of 1 Count



Tie Point Switch Close Time Delay…..…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec



Tie Point Switch Open Time Delay.…..…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec



Tie Point Switch Reset Time Delay…...…….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec



Dead Line Time Delay at Source Side…...….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec

 Dead Line Time Delay at Load Side..…...….....0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01 sec Timing Accuracy ....................................................... Max. 50㎳ at 0㎳ open/close time delay 5% of setting time or ± 20㎳

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

22

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.6. Monitoring Phase Difference Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Dead Voltage Maximum Level.................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Maximum Angle Difference...................................... 1° to 100° in steps of 1° Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.01 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz Difference Check Phase ............................................ ALL/A/B/C Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec Voltage Level Accuracy ............................................ 5% Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2° Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐ Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Synchro’ Check Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Dead Voltage Maximum Level.................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Live Voltage Minimum Level ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Maximum Angle Difference...................................... OFF, 20.0° to 80.0° in steps of 0.1° Maximum Frequency Difference(Slip Freq.) ............ 0.5 to 5.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz Synchro’ Check Phase............................................... A/B/C/AB/BC/CA Compensation Angle ................................................. 0° to 330° in steps of 30° Load Side Voltage Compensation Factor .................. 0.50 to 2.00 in steps of 0.01 Recloser Closing Time .............................................. 0.00 to 600.0msec in steps 0.1msec Closing Wait Time ..................................................... 1 to 600sec in steps 1sec Voltage Level Accuracy ............................................ 5% Angle Level Accuracy ............................................... ± 2° Frequency Level Accuracy ........................................ at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐ Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

23

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Open Phase Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE On Level .................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Off Level ................................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Live Line Block Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Live Line Block......................................................... RECLOSE/CLOSE/BOTH BLOCK Live Level ................................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Live Line Check Source ............................................ VS/VL/VS&VL Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01s Level Accuracy.......................................................... 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Fault Locator Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.01 to 99.99 of 0.01ohms

Load Current Alarm Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Pickup Level ...................... OFF, 10 to 1600A in steps of 1A Phase/Ground/Neg Seq’ Time Delay ........................ 0.00 to 600.00s in steps 0.01s Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

24

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Power Factor 1,2 Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Pickup Level for Lag................................................. OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01 Pickup Level for Lead ............................................... OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01 Time Delay ................................................................ 1.00 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec Function Block Time After Close.............................. 0.05 to 600.00sec in steps 0.01sec Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Live Line Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.1sec Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

Operation Counter Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Alarm Count .............................................................. 1 to 20000 in steps of 1 Reset Count ............................................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1

Recloser Contact Wear Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Alarm Pickup Level .................................................. 0.0 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1% Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00s in steps 0.01s Interruption Current at Point 1(Max. Operation) ...... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA Number of Operation at Point 1(Max. Operation) .... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1 Interruption Current at Point 2(Min. Operation) ....... 1.00 to 600.00kA in steps of 0.01kA Number of Operation at Point 2(Min. Operation) ..... 1 to 60000 in steps of 1 Set Phase A Wear ....................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01% Set Phase B Wear ...................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01% Set Phase C Wear ...................................................... 0.00 to 100.00 % in steps of 0.01%

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

25

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Battery Automatic Load Test Test Period ................................................................. OFF, 1 to 720 hours in steps of 1hour

Battery Management Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Charge Time .............................................................. 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min. Discharge Time.......................................................... 60 to 6,000 min. in steps of 1 min. Alarm Pickup Level................................................... 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01% Reset Battery Capacity .............................................. 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01%

Power Quality Monitoring(PQM) Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Interrupt 

Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 0.10 to 0.49xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Sag 

Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 0.50 to 0.99xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Swell 

Pickup Level …………………………………. OFF, 1.01 to 1.50xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Harmonics 

Voltage Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%



Voltage Total Harmonics Time Delay………..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec



Current Total Harmonics Pickup Level………OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%

 Current Total Harmonics Delay Time…….…..0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Current Unbalance 

Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%

 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Voltage Unbalance 

Pickup Level ………………………………….OFF, 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1%

 Time Delay……………………………………0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Under Voltage 

Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT



Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

26

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Over Voltage 

Pickup Level ………………………………….0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT

 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Under Frequency 

Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz

 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.1sec Over Frequency 

Pickup Level …………………………………..OFF, 45.00 to 65.00Hz in steps of 0.01Hz

 Time Delay……………………………………0.00 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Current ......... 0 to 630A in steps of 1A Level Accuracy.......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at CVD ± 0.05㎐ or ± 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

System Power Function..................................................................... OFF/ON +12V Pickup.............................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V Time Delay ................................................................ 0.01 to 10.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec -12V Pickup............................................................... OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V Time Delay ................................................................ 0.01 to 10.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Ref. V Pickup ............................................................ OFF, 0.1 to 10.0 V in steps of 0.1V Time Delay ................................................................ 0.01 to 10.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

27

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.7. Loop Control Loop Control Function..................................................................... DISABLE/ENABLE Type Select ................................................................ NONE/SEC/MID/TIE Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID ....................... VS/VL/VS&VL Voltage Response Side to TIE ................................... VS/VL/VS&VL VS Wiring Type ......................................................... 3PN/3PP/1PN(A)/1PN(B)/1PN(C)/1PP(AB)/ 1PP(BC)/1PP(CA) VL Wiring Type ......................................................... 3PN/3PP/1PN(A)/1PN(B)/1PN(C)/1PP(AB)/ 1PP(BC)/1PP(CA) Primary Setting Group............................................... GROUP1/2/3/4/5/6 Alternate Setting Group............................................. GROUP1/2/3/4/5/6 Change Alternate Setting at MID .............................. OFF/ON Change Alternate Setting at TIE ................................ OFF/ON Loop Control Auto Enable after Manual Close ......... DISABLE/ENABLE Loop Control Auto Enable after Manual Open ......... DISABLE/ENABLE Open Time on Both Dead Line at TIE....................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Auto Restoration Time at SEC/MID ......................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Dead Line Level ........................................................ 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Live Line Level ......................................................... 0.10 to 1.40xVT in steps of 0.01xVT Dead Line Time Delay .............................................. 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Live Line Time Delay................................................ 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Dead Line Reset Time ............................................... 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Reclosing Block Time after LC Operation ................ 0.01 to 600.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of setting time or ± 20msec

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

28

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2.8. Recorder OPERATION EVENT RECORDER 



Trigger Source 

Recloser Closed(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control CLOSE)



Recloser Opened(Manual/Remote/Auto/External/Panel Control OPEN)

Storage Capacity : Total 5,000 Events

FAULT EVENT RECORDER 



Trigger Source 

Fault Pickup



Fault Timeout Elements

Data Channels 

Analoge 21 Channels (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef, I1, I2, 3I0, Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Fault Location, Fault Reactance, Y0real, Y0imag, Y0rms)



Storage capacity : 1,500 events

FAULT WAVEFORM CAPTURE 



Trigger Source 

Fault Pickup



Fault Timeout Elements

Data Channels 

Current 5 Channels(Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef)



Voltage 6 Channels(Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt)



Admitance 3 Channels (Y0real, Y0imag, Y0rms)



Digital Input Port Status 8 or 20 Channels (IN101~112, IN201~208)



Digial Output Relay 8 or 3 Channels (OUT101~108 ,OUT205~207)



Digital Logic Channels



Sample Rate : 16/32/64 sampling per cycle



Trigger Position : 1 to 60cycles(64 sampling base and depending on the sample rate, it changes)



Storage capacity : 32 events with max 240cycles(Cycle is dependent on Sample Rate)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

29

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER 

Trigger Source 

Protection Elements



52A Contact



Sequence status



Front panel control



AC supply



External control



Fail operation



External input status



System alarm, etc.



Trigger Time : every 5 msec



Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout



Storage Capacity : Last 5,000 Events

SET CHANGE EVENT RECORDER 



Trigger Source 

Global Setting Change



Group Setting Change – Group 1/2/3/4/5/6

Storage Capacity : Total 2,000 Events

LOAD & ENERGY 1) Average Load/ Minute 

Trigger Source 

Demand Current – A, B, C, N



Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T



Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф, Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф



Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф, Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф



Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф), Negative Varhour(3ф)



Trigger Time : every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 minutes



Storage Capacity : Total 8,640 Events

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

30

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Peak Load/ Hour 

Trigger Source 

Demand Current – A, B, C, N



Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T



Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф, Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф



Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф, Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф



Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф), Negative Varhour(3ф)



Trigger Time : every 1 hour



Storage Capacity : Total 8,640 events, 360 days

3) Peak Load/ Day 

Trigger Source 

Demand Current – A, B, C, N



Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T



Demand Real Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф, Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф



Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф, Positive A, Positive B, Positive C, Positive 3ф, Negative A, Negative B, Negative C, Negative 3ф



Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф), Negative Watthour(3ф), Negative Varhour(3ф)



Trigger Time : every 1 day



Storage Capacity : Total 8,640 Events, 27500 days

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

31

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER 

Trigger Source 

System Power(AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V)



A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)



Power Down Mode



Gas Status



DSP Fail



RTC Fail



Memory Fail



Flash-Rom Fail



Circuit Voltage Fail



Event Fail



Count Fail



DO Fail



Close Fail



Open Fail, etc.



Trigger Time : every 5 msec



Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout



Storage Capacity : Last 2,000 Events

PQM EVENT RECORDER 

Trigger Source 

Interrupt Detect



Voltage Sag Detect



Voltage Swell Detect



Voltage/Current Harmonics Detect



Voltage/Current Unbalance Detect



Under/Over Voltage Detect



Under/Over Frequency Detect



Trigger type : Pick up



Storage Capacity : Last 1,500 Events

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

32

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

LOAD CURRENT ALARM EVENT RECORDER 

Trigger Source 

Phase A, B, C Load Current Alarm



S.E.F Load Current Alarm



Negative Sequence Load Current Alarm



Trigger type : Pick up



Storage Capacity : Last 1,500 Events

NOTE : The maximum number of all events except fault waveform to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

COUNTER 

System Restart Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534



Diagnostic Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534



Operation Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534



Fault Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534



PQM Counters : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534



Communication Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534



User Counter : 0 to 1,000,000 or 0 to 65,534 NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each counter is applied differently. 

When the setting is OFF, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 1,000,000



When the setting is ON, each counter is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 65,534

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

33

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

INTERRUPT TIME 

Total, Phase A, B and C Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec



Momentary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec



Temporary Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec



Sustained Interrupt Time : 0 to 1,000,000 sec or 0 to 65,534 sec NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Count Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each interrupt time is applied differently.  When the setting is OFF, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the interrupt time exceeds 1,000,000 sec  When the setting is ON, each interrupt time is rolled over to 0 sec if the interrupt time exceeds 65,534

RECLOSER CONTACT WEAR 

Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%



Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%



Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%

PEAK CURRENT 

Phase A, B, C, N Peak Current and Negative Sequence Peak Current



Trigger Source 

Load Current Alarm Detect

ENERGY 

Positive Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh



Positive Reactive Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh



Negative Active Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kWh or 0 to 999,999,999 kWh



Negative Reactive Power Energy – A, B, C, 3ф : 0 to 60,000 kVarh or 0 to 999,999,999 kvarh NOTE: Depending on the “16bit Ener’ Use” setting in the menu “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OTHERS”, the roll-over limit of each energy value is applied differently. 

When the setting is OFF, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy value exceeds 999,999,999



When the setting is ON, each energy value is rolled over to 0 if the energy value exceeds 60,000

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

34

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

DEMAND 

Demand Current – A, B, C, N, Negative Sequence



Demand Positive Active Power – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Positive Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Negative Active Power – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Negative Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф

2.9. Communications Table 2-2. Communications RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data Side panel RS232-1

bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol, Interface Software RS232,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data

Side panel RS232-2

bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol, Interface Software RS485,1200-115200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data

Side panel RS485

bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC60870-5-101 and Multi-Bit Protocol RJ-45 or Fiber Optic(Option),10BASE-T/100BASE-T

Side panel EN1, EN2

DNP 3.0, Modbus, IEC61850, IEC60870-5-104 and Multi-Bit Protocol, Interface Software

Side panel Wifi - Option Front Panel USB

SMA-Female Type Interface Software USB- B Type Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

35

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

3. APPLICATION EVRC2A-NT has two control types(Recloser type(default) and Sectionalizer type). Control Type setting is available in the menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE”. The control type must be selected according to the installed body. The Recloser function(fault trip) is active on Recloser type, and when the recloser body, Recloser type must be selected. But, The Sectionalizer(fault indication) function is active on Sectionalizer type, and when the switch body or sectionalizer body, Sectionalizer type must be selected. If the selected control type and the body type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs. Depending on the control type, different setting menus are applied. Applied setting menus are shown below according to the control type.

Recloser Function

Recloser function is active. Sectionalizer function is not active.

RECLOSER (SECMODE= 0)

Auto Reclosing (79)

Broken Conduct (46BC)

Phase Overcurrent (51P/50P)

Voltage Protection (27/59/64N)

Ground Overcurrent (51G/50G)

Frequency Protection (81U/81O/81D)

Sensitive Earth Fault (50SG)

Power Protection (32FP/32P)

Negative Seq

Demand Protection (49)

Overcurrent (51Q/50Q)

Inrush Restraint & CLPU

HotLine Tag

2nd/5th Harmonic Block

Loop Control

Direction (67P/67G/67SG/67Q)

Fault Locator

Default Setting Control Type SECTIONALIZER (SECMODE = 1)

Sectionalizer Function Phase Fault Indication (FI)

Negative Seq Fault Indication (FI)

Ground Fault Indication (FI)

FI Inrush Restraint

Sensitive Earth Fault Indication (FI)

Auto Section

Sectionalizer function is active. Recloser function is not active.

: Sub-menu of ＂MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / RECLOSER

menu

: Sub-menu of ＂MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL

menu

: Sub-menu of ＂MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / MONITORING : Sub-menu of ＂MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / SECTIONALIZER

menu menu

*. NOTE ) The remaining functions are applied in common regardless of the Control Type.

Figure 3-1. Control Type Logic Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

36

IN

IA

INPUT

F01

8

VT

7

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4

VB

2

VA

E01

TRIP/CLOSE

VC

3

2

3

COM

J01

950

TRIP

10

PW

PT

VR

5

CLOSE

K01

950

VS

6

4

DC +

3

2

5

DC -

2

OUT IN GND

IB

3

IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

4

VB / VS

L01

IC

5

I01

3

2

D01

2

3

4

OUT206

OUTPUT

104

5

7

6

6

5

4

102

3

H01

P

2

N

3

P

950

C01

OUT101

2

RS232-1

4

N

POWER OUT

103

OUTPUT

8

OUT207

108 107 106 105

4

OUT205

5

27 UV

CT

6

A

MONITOR

7

SEF

SEF

8

B

950

9

RS232-2

G

RS485

C

IRIG-B

P

50 IOCL

10

WIFI

VC / VT N

50 IOC

950

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 1

51 TOC

NTC

VA / VR FG

81 UF/OF/RF

- +

2

59 OV

3

FUN

1

07

TX

05

04

03

02 B01

7

5

2

3

4

BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-

G01

4

3

2

A01

2SPEED

2L/ACT

1SPEED

1L/ACT

106 105 104 103 102 IN101

6

Eth1

POWER IN

INPUT

112 111 110 109 108 IN107

06

Eth2

6

2

4

5

950

ENT

2

3

950

ESC 1 950

9

EVRC2A-NT 950

M10

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT http://www.entecene.co.kr

4. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 4-1. Construction and Dimensions(Standard)

37

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION EVRC2A-NT Side panel construction is as follows.

M10

9

2

1

3

2

1 RS232

1L/ACT

DBG

1SPEED

RX

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

F01

8

7

6

5

VN

VT

VS

VR

4

3

2

E01

VN

VC

VB

VA

RS485

RS232-2

IN

IC

IB

IA

CT

5

4

3

2

D01

8

7

6

5

4

3

TRIP/CLOSE

K01

104

OUTPUT DC -

3

TRIP

2

DC +

950

COM

PW

CLOSE

IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

103

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

C01

07

06

05

04

03

102

OUT101

OUT205

J01

Eth1

02 B01

7

6

112 111 110 109 108 IN107

5

4

3

2

A01

106 105 104 103 102 IN101

INPUT POWER OUT

POWER IN

OUT206 OUT207 P

N

950

2

2

Eth2

OUTPUT

INPUT

OUT IN GND

L01

108 107 106 105

PT

MONITOR

2SPEED

RS232-1

950 SEF

2L/ACT

P

950

IRIG-B

WIFI

N

950

NTC

FG

950

- +

TX

P

N

BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-

950

2

3

4

5

I01

2

3

4

5

6

H01

2

3

4

G01

2

3

4

Figure 5-1. Side Panel(Full Option) Cable standard for connector refers to “Table 5-1. Connector”. Table 5-1. Connector Item

Model No.

Remark

NTC

AKZ 950-2P

sensor

IRIG-B

AKZ 950-2P

Option

RS485

AKZ 950-3P

Communition

RS232

DB9-P

Communition

Eth1, Eth2

RJ45

Fiber optic option

WIFI

SMA

Option

CT

AKZ 950-10P

-

PT

AKZ 950-8P

-

INPUT(A), INPUT(B)

AkZ 950-7P

Option

OUTPUT(C)

AkZ 950-8P

Option

OUTPUT(D)

AkZ 950-5P

Option

MONITOR

AKZ 950-3P

Gas pressure

INPUT(K)

AkZ 950-10P

-

TRIP/CLOSE

AkZ 950-5P

-

OUTPUT(I)

AKZ 950-6P

-

POWER OUT

AKZ 950-4P

Modem power

POWER IN

AKZ 960-4P

AC24V, Battery

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

38

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.1. Communication Port 1) RS232 PORT RS232 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin number 9, RI(Ring Indicator). Table 5-2. RS232-1/RS2332-2 Pin Description Pin

Signal

Description

1

DCD

Data Carrier Detect

2

RXD

Receive Data(IN)

3

TXD

Transmit Data(OUT)

4

DTR

Data Terminal Ready(OUT)

5

GND

Ground

6

DSR

Data Set Ready(IN)

7

RTS

Request To Send(OUT)

8

CTS

Clear To Send(IN)

9

N/C

No Connection

Figure 5-2. RS232

2) RS485 PORT RS485 has 3pins as in ‘Table 5-3. RS485 Pin Description’. Table 5-3.RS485 Pin Description Pin

Description

1

RS485+

2

RS485-

3

SG (Cable Shield)

3

2

1

FG

N

P

Figure 5-3.RS485

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

39

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) ETHERNET PORT Ethernet1 and 2 are RJ-45 that has 8pins as in ‘Table 5-4.Ehternet(TP) Pin Description’. Ethernet port can be selected between TP and FX type. If FX type is used, LC type optical communication will be supported. Table 5-4.Ethernet(TP) Pin Description Pin

Wire Color

10Base-T Signal 100Base-TX Signal

1

White/Green

Transmit+

2

Green

Transmit-

1L/ACT

3

White/Orange

Receive+

2L/ACT

4

Blue

Unused

5

White/Blue

Unused

6

Orange

Receive-

7

White/Brown

Unused

8

Brown

Unused

1SPEED

2SPEED

Eth2

Eth1

Figure 5-4.Ethernet Port

4) IRIG-B Connector - Option It is a IRIG-B connector for time synchronization function using Time Synchronization module. 2

Table 5-5. IRIG-B Pin Description Connector

Pin

Description

IRIG-B

1

POSITIVE

Connector

2

NEGATIVE

1

- + Figure 5-5. IRIG-B

5) Wifi Connector - Option ETMFC610 and ETIMS Interface Software can be connected wirelessly. See “18. WIRELESS CONNECTION” for details on Wifi connections. Table 5-6. WIFI Pin Description Connector SMA Connector

Pin 1

Description

Connecting the SMA

WIFI

antenna cables

Figure 5-6. WIFI

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

40

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.2. NTC Connector A terminal that connects the battery temperature compensation sensor. M10

Table 5-7. NTC Pin Description Connector

Pin

NTC

01

NTC Thermistor

Connector

02

(10 ㏀ B25/85K 3435)

9

Description

NTC

Figure 5-7. NTC Thermistor

5.3. Current Input Connector Current connector starts from pin number 1(A phse), 2(B phase), 3(C phase), 4(N, ground), 5(SEF) in turn and each phase name is indicated at current input Input connector of ETMFC610. Connector type is STLZ950-10. 10

9

8

SEF

7

IN

6

5

IC

4

3

2

IB

F01

IA

Figure 5-8. Current Input Terminal Table 5-8. Current Input Pin Description Pin

IA

IB

IC

IN

SEF

Description

A phase

B phase

C phase

N phase

SEF

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

41

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.4. Voltage Input Connector Voltage connector receives source side 3 phases(A,B,C) voltages and load side 3 phases(R,S,T) voltages. Pin arrangement is as follow table. Connector type is STLZ950-8P. Table 5-9. Voltage Input Pin Description Pin

VA

VB

VC

VR

VS

VT

Default LCD Display

A

B

C

R

S

T

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

E01

VN

VT

VS

VR

VN

VC

VB

VA

Figure 5-9. Voltage Input Terminal

5.5. SCADA Connector - Option 5

4

3

2

D01

108 107 106 105

8

7

104

6

5

103

4

3

102

2

C01

OUT101

07

06

05

04

03

02 B01

7

112 111 110 109 108 IN107

OUTPUT

6

5

4

3

2

A01

106 105 104 103 102 IN101

INPUT

Figure 5-10. SCADA Input, Output Terminal Digital output (DO) part is composed of a total of 8 relay outputs. Connector to output commands from the control part. Digital input (DI) part receives 12 status signals in total by using electrically wet contacts. Connector to as part of the receiving of status inputs from the control element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

42

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.6. Monitor Connector It is input terminal to monitor EVRC2A-NT status and its pin arrangement is as in “Table 5-10. Monitor Pin Description”. Table 5-10. Monitor Pin Description Connector

Pin

Description

OUT

Pressure +12V

IN

Pressure Output

GND

Pressure GND

MONITORS

Figure 5-11. Monitor Terminal

5.7. Status Inputs Connector 8 inputs of status provision. Dry contact input method by internal power method Table 5-11. Status Input Pin Description Connector

Pin

Description

1

Open ST’

2

Close ST’

3

Manual Unlock ST’

Status

4

Spare

Input

5

Door ST’

Connector

6

Close/open power good

7

Spare

8

Spare

9,10

INPUT IN201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 PW

K01

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Figure 5-12. Status Input Terminal

Common

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

43

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.8. Trip/Close Connector Output terminal to control EVRC2A-NT and its arrange is as in ‘Table 5-12. TRIP/CLOSE Pin Description’.

CLOSE(-)

2

TRIP(-)

3

COM COSE/TRIP(+)

4

DC Power Input(+)

5

DC Powre Input(-)

DC -

1

DC +

Connector

Description

COM

TRIP/CLOSE

Pin

TRIP

Connector

CLOSE

Table 5-12. TRIP / CLOSE Pin Description

J01

2

3

4

5

Figure 5-13. TRIP/ CLOSE Terminal

5.9. Outputs Connector Digital Output(DO) terminal has total 3 relay output where sending a control signal, its pin arrangement is as follow. Table 5-13. Output Pin Description Connector

Pin 1,2

Output Connector

3,4 5,6

OUT205 OUT206 OUT207

Description

OUT205 Photo relay output OUT206 Photo relay output

I01

2

3

4

5

6

Figure 5-14. Output Terminal

OUT207 Dry contact output

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

44

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5.10. Power Input / Battery Input Connector Power Input Connector for EVR2A-NT’s AC24V Power Supply. It is a battery input connector to charge the battery using inner charger circuit Table 5-14. Power/Battery Input Pin Description Connector

Pin

Description

Power/Battery

1,2

BATT INPUT

Input Connector

3,4

AC 24V INPUT

BAT+ BAT- AC24+ AC24-

G01

2

3

4

Figure 5-15. Power & Battery Input Thermistor

5.11. Power Output Connector Power output connector for switch operation or modem power supply and so on. It can supply DC +12V or +24V, 40W/continuous , 60W/1min usage. Table 5-15. Power Output Pin Description Connector Power Output Connector

Pin

P

N

P

N

Description

FUSE

H01,H03 +24V or +12V H02,H04 GND H01

2

3

4

Figure 5-16. Power Output Thermistor

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

45

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6. USER INTERFACE PANEL This section describes User Interface Panel based on the front-panel. User Interface Panel has a LCD(20  8), keypads and LEDs to monitor selected functions and to indicate selected function and operation status as below. 

Directly control the recloser



Verify control status



View system status



View metering value



View information stored in EVRC2A-NT unit



View and change EVRC2A-NT settings

ETR300-R

1

2

3

4

5

6

51 TOC 50 IOC 50 IOCL A

ESC

FUN

B C G

ENT

SEF 27 UV 59 OV 81 UF/OF/RF

VA / VR VB / VS VC / VT

Figure 6-1. User Interface Panel

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

46

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1. Construction Panel consists of eight sections as below; 

Operation Section



Local Control Section



Menu Control Section



Other Control Section



Fault Indication Section



Voltage Elements Section



Reclosing Sequence Status Section



System Diagnostic Section



Battery Status Section



User Selected LED Section



Other Status Section

6.1.1. Operation Section OPEN Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser. CLOSE Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser. EVRC2A-NT has a feature of Manual Close Time Delay. The Close Time Delay allows a delay of 0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before closing the recloser. During the manual close delay time, if the CLOSE push-button is pressed, it closes immediately without waiting for the close delay time to be completed. POSITION LED Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.

Figure 6-2. Operation Section

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

47

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.2. Local Control Section All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the control function is enabled and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is DISABLE. The push-button toggles ENABLE/DISABLE.

Figure 6-3. Local Control Section

Protection Enabled When the LED is illuminated, all protection elements(in case of Reclose mode) and fault indication elements(in case of Sectionalizer mode) are enabled. The protection can be disabled by pressing the “PROTECTION ENABLED” push button on the front panel. NOTE : If “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, all protection elements and fault indication are operating, however, Ground fault and Sensitive Earth Fault Elements are individually set for enable or disable on front panel by LED ON/OFF button.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

48

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Ground Enabled GROUND ENABLED LED is ON and OFF by pressing the “GROUND ENABLED” push-button. When the “PROTECTION ENABLED” and “GROUND ENABLED” LEDs are both ON, ground overcurrent protection element(in case of Reclose mode) and ground fault indication element(in case of Sectionalizer mode) operate. However, even if the “GROUND ENABLED” is ON and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, ground fault elements do not operate. If the “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, ground fault elements do not operate. When “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time. Also, when “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON.

SEF Enabled SEF Enabled LED is ON and OFF by pressing “SEF ENABLED” push-button. When the “PROTECTION ENABLED” and “SEF ENABLED” LEDs are both ON. Sensitive earth fault elements operate. However, even if the “SEF ENABLED” is ON and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, sensitive earth fault elements do not operate. If the “SEF ENABLED” is OFF, and the “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, sensitive earth fault elements do not operate. When “SEF ENABLED” is ON, “GROUND ENABLED” becomes ON. Also, when “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, “SEF ENABLED” becomes OFF at the same time.

Reclose Enabled When the “RECLOSE ENABLED” LED is ON, the auto reclosing(79) element(in case of Reclose mode) is enabled. The auto reclosing can be disabled by pressing the “RECLOSE ENABLED” push-button at the front panel.

Control Locked When the “CONTROL LOCKED” LED is on, all the functions in the operation section and Local control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the “CONTROL LOCKED” pushbutton at the front panel. NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Battery Load Test, Trip Test, Lamp Test and menu control section can be normally operated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

49

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Remote Enabled When the “REMOTE ENABLED” LED is ON, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system) are enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the “REMOTE ENABLED” push-button at the front panel. SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and IEC61850, etc. NOTE : When the “REMOTE ENABLED" LED is ON, depending on user’s request and option, Push-Button controls on the front panel can be blocked except for “GROUP SELECT” push-button, LAMP TEST and MENU Control Section.

Group Select This button is used to change the setting group applied to EVRC2A-NT. The procedure of changing the active setting group using the "GROUP SELECT" push-button on the front panel is as follows. 

Use the "GROUP SELECT" push-button to select the setting group you want to apply.

Setting

group

is

cyclically

1

2

3

4

5

6

selected; GROUP1  GROUP2  …  GROUP6  GROUP1. 

While

controlling

the

"GROUP

SELECT" push-button, the LCD display will be like the “Figure 6-4. Group

Figure 6-4. Group Select Mode LCD Display

Select Mode LCD Display” and the selected SET GROUP LED will flash. 

At this time, if you press the [ENT] button, the selected setting group will be applied. The flashing "SET GROUP" LED will light up.



If [ESC] button is pressed or if [ENT] button is not pressed for a long time, the setting group before the "GROUP SELECT" push-button control will be returned. NOTE : If ‘LOOP CONTROL’ function is activated, selected group is not changed to press the [GROUP SELECT] button.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

50

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Loop Control Enabled When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop control function is enabled. LED ON Control is possible only under the conditions as mentioned in “Table 6-2. “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions”. Table 6-1. “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions Loop Control Setting

Recloser Status

Function

Type Select

ENABLE

SEC

CLOSE

ENABLE

MID

CLOSE

ENABLE

TIE

OPEN

Remark

Loop Control Auto Restore When “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED is ON, auto restoration function is enabled. In auto restoration function, “Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values after the loop control operation. LED ON Control of “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” is only possible when the "LOOP CONTROL ENABLED" LED is ON in SEC and MID type.

Hot Line Tag When “HOT LINE TAG” LED is ON, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled. When the "HOT LINE TAG" LED is ON, 1 shot lockout occurs on overcurrent fault even if the auto reclosing function is activated/enabled. For overcurrent trip operation, T-C Curve set in “MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / RECLOSER / HOTLINE TAG” menu is applied and reclosing operation is blocked.

Battery Test When “BATT’ TEST” push-button is pressed, battery load test is run. On Test, Battery is disconnected from the charge circuit and connected the battery with load resistor and check the battery. Load resistor shall be connected with AC supply. LCD displays during Battery Load Testing. 

BATTERY(V)

: Display the battery

Figure 6-5. Battery Test Mode LCD Display

voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

51

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT



CHARGER(V) : Display the voltage of charge circuit.



BAT STATUS : Display battery status.



-

OK : When the battery voltage is between 21V ~ 28V

-

HIGH : When the battery voltage is over 28V

-

LOW : When the battery voltage is between 15V ~ 21V

-

NO BATT : When the battery voltage is below 15V

http://www.entecene.co.kr

CHG STATUS : Display charge circuit status. -

OK : When the charge circuit is between 25V ~29.5V

-

HIGH : When the charge circuit is over 29.5V

-

LOW : When the charge circuit is below 25V

Trip Test By pressing this button, fault simulation is activated like 1500A of fault current flows on phase A, B, C. Protection function is operated according on the setting.

Lamp Test/ FI Reset Reset fault indication and run lamp test. Auxiliary LED 1/2 Depending on user’s request, manufacturer sets a function on the LED. When the LED is on, the function is operated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

52

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.3. Menu Control Section EVRC2A-NT has 20  8 LCD(Liquid Cristal Display) display.

LCD DISPLAY 8x20 Characters display

CONTROL KEYS [▲] [▼] [◀] [▶] Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting value [▲] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode [▼] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode [◀] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode [▶] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode [FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode [ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level [ENT] : To select sub menu or data input NOTE If control panel is awaken from sleep mode using [AWAKE] key, it must be set to “KEY” or “BOTH” in setting menu “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method”.

ESC

1

2

3

4

5

6

FUN

ENT

Figure 6-6. Menu Control Section

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

53

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

[FUN] Key Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key is also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display. [ESC] Key The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu. [ENT] Key ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key. [◀] [▶] Key Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when you change display message. [▲] [▼] Key Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value when you are in the data input mode.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

54

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.4. Fault Indication Section On fault detection, protection elements and phase are displayed which detects more than pickup level.

TRIP TYPE 

51 TOC : Shows Time Overcurrent Trip.



50 IOC : Shows Instantaneous Overcurrent trip



50 IOCL : Shows Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout trip

FAULT INDICATION 

A, B, C : Indicates a phase fault has occurred on one of the phase lines



G (GROUND) : Indicates an ground fault has occurred



SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on

Figure 6-7. Fault Indication Section

the neutral line NOTE : Fault Indication LEDs will remain on after lighting, and will be turned off by "FI RESET" command.

6.1.5. Voltage Element Section Indicates that voltage element is occurred.

27 UV 59 OV



27 UV : Shows Under Voltage elements



59 OV : Shows Over Voltage and Neutral Over Voltage

81 UF/OF/RF

elements 

VA / VR

81 UF/OF/RF : Shows Under Frequency, Over

VB / VS

Frequency and Frequency Decay elements 

under Synchro’ Check element. 

VC / VT

25 SYNCHRONISM : Shows the close waiting status

Figure 6-8. Voltage Elements

VA/VR,VB/VR,VC/VT : Shows Open Phase Status on

Section

each phase. NOTE : 27UV, 59OV and 81UF/OF/RF LEDs will remain on after lighting, and will be turned off by "FI RESET" command.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

55

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.6. Reclosing Sequence Status Section Indicates the auto reclosing sequence procedure. 

79 RESET : Sequence shows resetting



79 CYCLE : Sequence shows running



79 LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout Figure 6-9. Sequence Status Section

6.1.7. System Diagnostic Section Indicates Diagnostic status of EVRC2A-NT. 

RUN : Status of EVRC2A-NT systems shows normal



DIAG/ERROR : Status of EVRC2A-NT systems shows warning



RX : Shows the data receiving status for remote communication.



Figure 6-10. System Diagnostic Section

TX : Shows the data transferring status for remote communication. NOTE : RUN LED is blinking when system functional status is normal

6.1.8. Battery Status Section Indicates the system power status of EVRC2A-NT. AC SUPPLY indicates EVRC2A-NT has external power source. CHARGER LED shows EVRC2A-NT charging status, BATTERY LED shows EVRC2A-NT battery status. Figure 6-11. Battery Status Section 

AC SUPPLY : Status of supplying the external AC power.



CHARGER : If Charger LED is On, charger is normal status.



BATTERY : If Battery LED is On, battery is normal status. NOTE : Battery voltage and charge circuit voltage are always monitored periodically.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

56

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.9. User LED Section Status of PLC logic which is set by a user is displayed. PLC logic is set in “EVRC2A-NT ETIMS Interface Software”. Factory default setting is as follows.

Figure 6-12. User LED Section Table 6-2. Default User LED Function User LED PLC Logic

Name

Description The LED is ON when the negative sequence overcurrent

ULED1

NEQ

ULED2

46 BC

ULED3

32 POWER

ULED4

49 DEMAND

ULED5

MACHANISM LOCK

ULED6

CLOSE BLOCK

ULED7

OPEN BLOCK

ULED8

Not defined

fault is occurred. The LED is ON when the broken conduct fault trip is occurred. The LED is ON when the power fault trip is occurred. The LED is ON when the demand fault trip is occurred. The LED is ON when status of EVRC2A-NT is mechanism lock. The LED is ON when status of EVRC2A-NT is close block. The LED is ON when status of EVRC2A-NT is open block. The LED is not defined.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

57

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.1.10. Set Group Status Section GROUP # It displays the currently applied Set Group to EVRC2ANT. Please refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT”

1

2

3

4

5

6

button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set group locally.

Figure 6-13. Set Group Status Section

6.1.11. Other Status Section REVER POWER When reverse current flows, REVERSE POWER LED becomes On. Reverse power is determined by 3-phase power factor. Figure 6-14. Other Status Section CLPU ON In the Cold Load Duration, CLPU ON LED becomes On.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

58

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.2. LCD Display 20  8 character LCD which has back-light support, is used for a user to operate conveniently and to check operation status clearly.

Figure 6-15. Initial Logo and Main Menu

6.2.1. Menu Structure Tree 

Screen structure consists Initial Logo and Main menu.



Initial screen and all menus are round robin algorithm.



Menu screen is divided in to Setting and Event management menu.



Main menu has 7 sub-menus.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

59

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

ⓐ

＇ ＇

’

*. NOTE ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of EVRC2A-NT.

Figure 6-16. Menu Structure Tree (1/2)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

60

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

*. NOTE ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of EVRC2A-NT.

Figure 6-16. Menu Structure Tree (2/2)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

61

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.2.2. GLOBAL Setting SYSTEM Set items related to power system and main body. Consists of POWER LINE, CURRENT SENSING and VOLTAGE SENSING.

EVENT RECORDER Set items related to the format of event behind recoded and whether event is recorded.

MONITORING Set items related to monitoring for power system and EVRC2A-NT. Consists of LIVE LINE, OPERATION COUNT, CONTACT WEAR, BATTERY LOAD TEST, BATTERY MANAGEMENT, POWER QUALITY,TD MONITOR and SYSTEM POWER.

LOOP CONTROL Set items related to loop control elements. This menu is only applied when “RECLOSER” type is set in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE” menu.

PASSCODE Set items related to passcode security. Consists of PASSCODE1, PASSCODE2 and PASSCODE 3. PASSCODE 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and PASSCODE 2 is applied when communication setting is changed. PASSCODE 3 is applied when clearing or resetting registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc.

PLC Set items related to PLC (Programmable Logic Control) elements. Consists of LOGIC TIMER, PULSE TIMER, PULSE COUNT, INPUT PORTS and OUTPUT PORTS.

DEVICE Set items related to Controller EVRC2A-NT. Consists of CONTROL TYPE, OPERATION TIME, H/W OPTION, GAS SENSOR, MANUAL CLOSE, LCD DISPLAY, PANEL SLEEP, TIME ZONE and OTHERS.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

62

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

COMMUNICATION Set items related to communication elements. Consists of PROTOCOLS, PORTS, DIALUP MODEM, FTP-SSL, WIFI and EVENT&ETC.

SAVE SETTING Save all changed values in the menu.

6.2.3. GROUP Setting This menu is divided into GROUP 1~ 6 for user’s convenient. Selected group circularly changes each time of pressing the [GROUP SELECT] button. Consists of GROUP 1~6 settings, respectively. If ‘GROUP #’ LED is ON, ‘GROUP # SETTINGS’ settings are applied to EVRC2A-NT.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Figure 6-17. GROUP SELCT Button and GROUP Setting The [GROUP SELECT] button is used to select a set group applied to present EVRC2A-NT. Please refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set group locally. NOTE : If ‘LOOP CONTROL’ function is activated, selected group is not changed to press the [GROUP SELEC] button. All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into RECLOSER, SECTIONALIZER and MONITORING sub menus. When set to "RECLOSER" type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE”, only "RECLOSER" and "MONITORING" menus are operated ("SECTIONALIZER" menu is not operated). When set to "SECTIONALIZER" type, only "SECTIONALIZER" and "MONITORING" menus are operated ("RECLOSER" menu is not operated).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

63

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.2.4. Event ERT300-R event information is shown in this menu. Consists

of

OPERATION,

FAULT,

FAULT

CYCLE,

SYSTEM,

SET

CHANGE,

LOAD&ENERGY/MIN, LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR, LOAD&ENERGY/DAY, DIAGNOSTIC, PQM, LOAD CURRENT ALARM and CLEAR SAVED DATA.

6.2.5. Maintenance Shows about Event Maintenance items. 

COUNT : Shows counters related with system restart and diagnostic.



INTERRUPT TIME : Cumulated time of Interruption occurred is displayed.



CONTACT WEAR : Shows damaged status of Interrupter.



DATA RESET : Maintenance related data is Reset.



CONTROLLER INFO : Present EVRC2A-NT information is displayed.



MECHNISM SCALE : Correction scale factor for main body sensor is displayed.

For more detail information, please refer to “10. MAINTENANCE” .

6.2.6. Time Present time can be set and checked. If “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type” is “GMT” and “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use” is “ON”, do not set current time manually.

6.2.7. Status Present status of recloser, fault, diagnostic and Input/Output are displayed.

6.2.8. Metering Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see “13. METERING”)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

64

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.3. Using the LCD Menu 6.3.1. Initial Screen Important information is displayed in the initial screen for user convenience in EVRC2A-NT. ① To move to other initial screen, press [ENT] button. ② Press [FUN] button in initial screen to move to Main menu. ③ “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY” Through “Init Main Screen” in the MENU, main initial screen can be selected. After initial booting or clearing SLEEP MODE, this initial Screen can be displayed. Table 6-3. Initial Screen (1/5) INITIAL SCREEN RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT SELF CHECK [ NORMAL] ACTIVE SET [ GROUP1] 52 CONTACT [ CLOSE] ENTEC E&E CO., LTD.

Initial Screen 1 This screen displays status information of EVRC2A-NT

SELF CHECK: It displays self-diagnostic information of EVRC2A-NT.  NORMAL: It displays normal status of EVRC2A-NT  ALARM: It displays self-diagnostic alarm of EVRC2A-NT.  ERROR: It displays self-diagnostic error of EVRC2A-NT. In this status, EVRC2A-NT is in significantly abnormal status so, EVRC2A-NT blocks to Open/Close recloser.

NOTE : If “ALARM” and “ERROR” in the self-check, EVRC2A-NT is in abnormal condition. Immediately stop operation and contact Manufacturer.

ACTIVE SET: It displays the currently applied SET GROUP in EVRC2A-NT.

52 CONTACT: It displays the status of recloser’s main contact  CLOSE: Displays main contact is closed.  OPEN: Displays main contact is opened.  TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable connection is not completed.

Table 6-3. Initial Screen (2/5)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

65

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

INITIAL SCREEN CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV) IA: 00000 IB: IC: 00000 IN: SEF: VA: 00.00 VR: VB: 00.00 VS: VC: 00.00 VT:

00000 00000 00.00 00.00 00.00 00.00

CURRENT(A)/VOLT(kV) IA: 00000 IB: IC: 00000 IN: SEF: AB: 00.00 RS: BC: 00.00 ST: CA: 00.00 TR:

00000 00000 00.00 00.00 00.00 00.00

GPS/IRIG MODULE STATUS[ NOT INSTALL] G01/01/2017 00:00:00 L01/01/2017 00:00:00

Initial Screen 2 This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.

 Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].

 Each phase voltage value is displayed (A,B,C,R,S,T) [kV]. Initial Screen 3 This screen displays current/voltage information on the line.

 Each phase current value is displayed (A,B,C,N,SEF) [A].

 Each phase-to-phase voltage value is displayed (AB,BC,CA,RS,ST,TR) [kV]. Initial Screen 4 This screen displays IRIG/GPS related with time synchronization.

STATUS: This screen displays time synchronization information.  LINK SUCCESS: Time synchronization device is well installed.

GPS/IRIG MODULE STATUS[ NOT INSTALL] G01/01/2017 00:00:00 L01/01/2017 00:00:00 ⓐ < > < > ⓑ

 LINK FAIL: The connection of time synchronization is not normal.  NOT INSTALL: Time synchronization device is not installed.

G: This screen displays UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time. L: This screen displays Local Time.

ⓐ This screen displays latitude received from time synchronization device. (N: North, S: South). ⓑ This screen displays longitude received from time synchronization device. (E: East, W: West). *. NOTE) If time synchronization device is not installed or at link fail, local Information (latitude, longitude) is not displayed. CONTROLLER INFO MPU: DSP: CPU: HMI: XML: OS :

V1.0.0.0 V1.0.0.0 V1.0.0.0 V1.0.0.0 ST00-1.00 #001 2017-01-01

Initial Screen 5 This screen displays the version of EVRC2A-NT.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

66

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 6-3. Initial Screen (3/5) INITIAL SCREEN RECLOSER STATUS RECLOSE FUN[ ENABLE] SEQUENCE NO[ 0] SEQUENCE ST[ RESET] RECLOSER ST[ CLOSE] CYCLE RESET[ ] AT REST’ CL[ ]

Initial Screen 6 This screen displays auto reclosing function. It can only display when control type setting is “RECLOSER”.

RECLOSE FUN : It display auto reclosing function status. 

ENABLE : When function is enabled.



DISABLE : f When function is disabled.



- : Since control type is selected as sectionalizer, auto reclosing function is not activated.

SEQUNCE NO: Number of reclosing operation (0~4) is displayed. SEQUNCE ST: It is showing reclosing sequence process status. 

RESET : It displays 79 Reset.



CYCLE : It displays 79 Cycle. It means reclosing running state.



LOCKOUT : It displays 79 Lockout.

RECLOSER ST: Circuit Breaker Open/Close Status is displayed. 

CLOSE: Displays recloser is closed.



OPEN: Displays recloser is opened.



TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect or cable connection is not completed.

CYCLE RESET: When fault is clear during 79 Cycle, it is under auto reset status. 

RUNNING: After clearing fault current, reset timer is running to make auto reset.

AT RESET CL: After fault caused by Voltage and frequency auto restoration function, AT RESET CL indicates status for auto closing. 

RUNNING: After fault, when line returns to normal status, restoration timer is running to make auto closing.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

67

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 6-3. Initial Screen (4/5) INITIAL SCREEN LOOP CONTROL VS STATUS [LIVELINE] VL STATUS [LIVELINE] VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ] VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ] AUTO RESTORE [ - ] S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[P-1]

Initial Screen 7 This screen displays loop control function. It can be only available when control type is as “RECLOSER”.

ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.

LOOP CONTROL



SEC : Sectionalizing Recloser

VS STATUS [LIVELINE] VL STATUS [LIVELINE] VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ] VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ] AUTO RESTORE [ - ] S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[ⓑ-ⓒ]



MID : Midpoint Recloser



TIE : Tiepoint Recloser



NON : None Selected



- : Since control type is selected as sectionalizer, auto loop control function is not activated.

VS STATUS: Displays the status of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE) VL STATUS: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE) VS LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to the dead line of source side 

RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.

VL LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to the dead line of load side. 

RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.

AUTO RESTORE : Displays auto restoring status after loop control operation. It is only available when SEC and MID status. 

RUNNING : After returning to live line, timer is running for automatic reset.

S-CNG : When loop control is operating, it can display the possibility of auto set group change. It is only available when MID and TIE status. S-GR : It indicates the currently applied set group. ⓑ It indicates that when currently applied set group as primary(P) or alternate(A) setting. ⓒ It indicates the currently applied set group.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

68

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 6-3. Initial Screen (5/5) INITIAL SCREEN AUTO SECTIONALIZER SECTION FUN[ SEC] OPERATE ST [ RESET] SOURCE VOLT[ LIVE-L] LOAD VOLT[ LIVE-L] O-COUNT SET[ 4] O-COUNT NO.[ 0]

Initial Screen 8 This screen displays auto section function. It can be only available when control type is as “SECTIONALIZER”.

SECTION FUN : It indicates auto section function as below. 

DISABLE : Auto section function does not operate.



SEC : It operates as Auto Sectionalizer.



TIE : It operates as Tiepoint Switch.

OPERATE ST: Displays the present operating status. 

RESET : Reset status



RUNNING : Operation counter is increasing.



LOCKOUT : When at “SEC”, it displays. When operation counter is up to maximum setting, recloser will be at open operating.



CLOSING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for close operation order.



OPENING : When at “TIE”, it is standby status for opening operation order

SOURCE VOLT: Displays the status of of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE) LOAD VOLT: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE) O-COUNT SET : Displays the set operate count

O-COUNT NO. : Displays the present operate count

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

69

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.3.2. Main Menu In the initial screen, press [FUN] button, it is moved into Main menu. If press [FUN] or [ESC] button in main menu, it is moved to the initial menu. Main menu has sub-menu as below. MAIN MENU [MAIN MENU] >1.GLOBAL SETTING 2.GROUP SETTING 3.EVENT 4.MAINTENANCE 5.TIME 6.STATUS 7.METERING

Main Menu consists of 7 sub-menus. You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key. Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.

As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.

6.3.3. Setting Example Step to change Phase Pickup current of Recloser menu in Group1~6 setting. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ TIME OC-PHA/ (+)PHASE FAST/ PICKUP”. A following screen is displayed. MAIN MENU/ GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ TIME OC-PHA/ (+)PHASE FAST/ PICKUP [(+)PHASE FAST] Function: TRIP >Pickup: 500 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [10~1600:1A]

Range

10 ~ 1600A

Default 500A

Step

1A

Phase pickup current. This value is primary current. Primary and secondary current is related CT ratio. (Primary current) = (Secondary current) × (CT ratio)

As above example screen, to move to Phase, use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into value column. Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value. Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value. NOTE : You must save all changed values at ”Setting Save” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

70

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6.3.4. Setting Save To save all changed values, steps are as follows; Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP #/ *. SAVE SETTING” and follow each step as below(“Global Setting / General”, “Global Setting / Communication” and “Group Setting” menu have “*.Setting Save” menu). MAIN MENU / GROUP SETTING / SAVE SETTING ① SETTING CHANGED PRESS TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)

① To save a changed set value, press [ENT] button. ② Enter Passcode and press [ENT] button. If Passcode is correct, ③ screen appears; otherwise ② screen appears again.

②

Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and ENTER PASSCODE 1 0000

Group Settings, and Passcode 2 is applied when communication setting is changed.

③ ③ If the changed value is set successfully, ③ screen is displayed for [SAVE SETTING]

short period.

* SUCCESS *

④ * NOTHING CHANGED *

If there is no change value and select “*. SAVE SETTING”, then, screen ④ is displayed. If you do not want to save changed setting value, please go to ① screen

⑤ SETTING CHANGED PRESS TO SAVE (UP/DOWN)

through [▲] [▼] button and to ⑤ screen [ENT] button. NOTE : Changed set value is applied if the changed set value is saved. If changed set value saving is cancelled, previous value is remained.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

71

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7. GLOBAL SETTING Place the curser in “GLOBAL SETTING”, press [ENT] button, it is moved to GLOBAL SETTING. This menu consists of “GENERAL” menu and “COMMUNICATION” menu.

[GLOBAL SETTING] >1.GENERAL 2.COMMUNICATION

7.1. General Setting This menu is to set general setting required to operate recloser’s controller EVRC2A-NT, and Submenu consists of below picture.

[GENERAL] >1.SYSTEM 2.EVENT RECODER 3.MONITERING 4.LOOP CONTROL 5.PASSCODE 6.PLC 7.DEVICE *.SAVE SETTING

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value saved message’.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

72

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.1. System Place the curser on “SYSTEM” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has sub-menu as below. [SYSTEM] >1.POWER LINE 2.CURRENT SENSING 3.VOLTAGE SENSING

CAUTION : This setting change may influence metering and whole system, precaution is requested.

7.1.1.1. Power Line Place a cursor on “POWER LINE” in SYSTEM menu, and press [ENT] button, it is moved in this menu. Set the power system information where this control is installed. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / System Frequency [POWER LINE] >System Frequency:60 Phase Rotation: ABC Phase Combina’: abc

Range

50, 60 ㎐

Default 60

~

Step

Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.

[50~60Hz:10Hz]

It is set before product delivery in accordance with spec. NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Rotation [POWER LINE] System Frequency:60 >Phase Rotation: ABC Phase Combina’: abc [ABC/ACB]

Range

ABC, ACB

Default ABC

Step

~

Select the phase rotation of the power system.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

73

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Combina’ [POWER LINE] System Frequency:60 Phase Rotation: ABC >Phase Combina’: abc [Combination of ABC]

Range

abc, cab, bca, acb, bac, cba

Default abc

Step

~

Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a control device. As example, if setting value is cab, it means that bushing A is connected with phase C, bushing B is connected with phase A and bushing C is connected with phase B.

NOTE: In order to get the details relevant to the connection for EVRC2A-NT-600, refer the following figure and table.

Figure 7-1. Phase Connection

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

74

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 7-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation Line feeding

Recommend Setting

Bushing Terminal

Phase

Case 1 :

abc

Phase Mapping Result Source Side

Combination abc

1V

ABC Case 2 :

cab

cab

ABC Case 3 :

bca

bca

ABC Case 4 :

acb

acb

ABC Case 5 :

bac

bac

ABC Case 6 :

cba

cba

ABC Case 7 :

abc

abc

RST Case 8 :

cab

cab

RST Case 9 :

bca

bca

RST Case 10 :

acb

acb

RST Case 11 :

bac

bac

RST Case 12 :

cba RST

cba

2V

LCD/INDEX Display :

Bushing/Controller

Source V(Load V) / Current

Terminal

Va(Vr)/Ia

A(R)/IA

Vb(Vs)/Ib

B(S)/IB

Vc(Vt)/Ic

C(T)/IC

Va(Vr)/Ia

B(S)/IB

Vb(Vs)/Ib

C(T)/IC

Vc(Vt)/Ic

A(R)/IA

Va(Vr)/Ia

C(T)/IC

Vb(Vs)/Ib

A(R)/IA

Vc(Vt)/Ic

B(S)/IB

Va(Vr)/Ia

A(R)/IA

Vb(Vs)/Ib

C(T)/IC

Vc(Vt)/Ic

B(S)/IB

Va(Vr)/Ia

B(S)/IB

Vb(Vs)/Ib

A(R)/IA

Vc(Vt)/Ic

C(T)/IC

Va(Vr)/Ia

C(T)/IC

Vb(Vs)/Ib

B(S)/IB

Vc(Vt)/Ic

A(R)/IA

Va(Vr)/Ia

R(A)/IA

Vb(Vs)/Ib

S(B)/IB

Vc(Vt)/Ic

T(C)/IC

Va(Vr)/Ia

S(B)/IB

Vb(Vs)/Ib

T(C)/IC

Vc(Vt)/Ic

R(A)/IA

Va(Vr)/Ia

T(C)/IC

Vb(Vs)/Ib

R(A)/IA

Vc(Vt)/Ic

S(B)/IB

Va(Vr)/Ia

R(A)/IA

Vb(Vs)/Ib

T(C)/IC

Vc(Vt)/Ic

S(B)/IB

Va(Vr)/Ia

S(B)/IB

Vb(Vs)/Ib

R(A)/IA

Vc(Vt)/Ic

T(C)/IC

Va(Vr)/Ia

T(C)/IC

Vb(Vs)/Ib

S(B)/IB

Vc(Vt)/Ic

R(A)/IA

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

75

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

*. NOTE ) Setting value for ‘Source Side’ is available from “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING” in the menu..

7.1.1.2. Current Sensing Place a cursor in “CURRENT SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection and fault indication features that have settings specified in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for protection of the neutral over-current. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see “14.8. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram”). GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 >GND CT Ratio: 1000 >SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 >PHA CT Pol’: FOR GND CT Pol’: FOR

Range

1 ~ 2000

Default 1000

Step

1

Set phase CT ratio.

[1~2000:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 >GND CT Ratio: 1000 >SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 >PHA CT Pol’: FOR GND CT Pol’: FOR

Range

1 ~ 2000

Default 1000

Step

1

Set ground CT ratio.

[1~2000:1]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] PHA CT Ratio: 1000 GND CT Ratio: 1000 >SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 >PHA CT Pol’: FOR GND CT Pol’ FOR

Range

0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 1000.0

Default 1000.0

Step

0.1

Set sensitive earth CT ratio.

[0(OFF),0.1~1000.0]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

76

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Polarity [CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 >GND CT Ratio: 1000 >SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 >PHA CT Polar’: FOR >GND CT Polar’: FOR

Range

Forward, Reverse

Default Forward

Step

~

Set phase CT pole direction.

[FOR/REV]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Polarity [CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 >GND CT Ratio: 1000 >SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 >PHA CT Pol’: FOR >GND CT Pol’: FOR

Range

Forward, Reverse

Default Forward

Step

~

Set Ground CT pole direction.

[FOR/REV]

GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Polarity [CURRENT SENSING] >GND CT Ratio: 1000 >SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 >PHA CT Pol’: FOR >GND CT Pol’: FOR >SEF CT Pol’: FOR

Range

Forward, Reverse

Default Forward

Step

~

Set sensitive earth CT pole direction.

[FOR/REV]

7.1.1.3. Voltage Sensing Place a curser in “VOLTAGE SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. EVRC2A-NT has two voltage connectors. Voltage connectors are receiving Source side and Load side line voltages. With Line VTs installed, EVRC2A-NT can be used to perform voltage measurements, power calculations, and directional control of over-current elements and so on. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Connect Type [VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V CON-Type: WYE 1V Rated(P-P):22.86 1V Ratio: 3300.0 2V CON-Type: WYE 2V Rated(P-N):22.86 [NONE/WYE/DELTA]

Range

NONE, WYE, DELTA

Default WYE

Step

~

Select the voltage type of system that input to Source Voltage Connector(1V) .  NONE : VT non installed. Select NON  WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.  DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

77

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Rated(P-P) [VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V CON-Type: WYE >1V Rated(P-P):22.86 1V Ratio: 3300.0 2V CON-Type: WYE 2V Rated(P-P):22.86 [3.00~38.00:0.01kV]

3.00~38.00kV

Range

Default 22.86

Step

0.01kV

Enter the primary rated voltage(kV) of potential transformer for Source Voltage Connector(1V). This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage(phaseto-phase).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Ratio [VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V CON-Type: WYE >1V Rated(P-P):22.86 >1V Ratio: 3300.0 2V CON-Type: WYE 2V Rated(P-P):22.86 [10.0~6500.0:0.01]

10.0~6500.0

Range

Default 3300.0

Step

0.01

Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Source Voltage Connector(1V).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Connect Type [VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V CON-Type: WYE >1V Rated(P-P):22.86 >1V Ratio: 3300.0 2V CON-Type: WYE >2V Rated(P-P):22.86 [NONE/WYE/DELTA]

NONE, WYE, DELTA

Range

Default WYE

Step

~

Select the voltage type of system that input to Load Voltage Connector(2V) .  NONE : VT non installed. Select NON  WYE : If Voltage Connect Type is Y-Type, Select WYE.  DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Rated(P-P) [VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V CON-Type: WYE >1V Rated(P-P):22.86 >1V Ratio: 3300.0 >2V CON-Type: WYE >2V Rated(P-P):22.86 [10.0~6500.0:0.01]

3.00~38.00kV

Range

Default 22.86

Step

0.01kV

Enter the primary rated voltage(kV) of potential transformer for Load Voltage Connector(2V). This setting refers to primary rated voltage in the line voltage(phaseto-phase).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

78

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Ratio [VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V Rated(P-P):22.86 >1V Ratio: 3300.0 >2V CON-Type: WYE >2V Rated(P-P):22.86 >2V Ratio: 3300.0 [10.0~6500.0:0.01]

Range

10.0~6500.0

Default 3300.0

Step

0.01

Enter the rated rate of potential transformer for Load Voltage Connector(2V).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Installation Type [VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V CON-Type: WYE >2V Rated(P-P):22.86 >2V Ratio: 3300.0 >2V Instal Type: 3P Source Side: 1V [3P/1P-R/1P-S/1P-T]

Range

3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T

Default 3P

Step

~

Insert the type of load side sensing voltage for the recloser body unit. 3P : The voltage sensor is installed in each of the three phases 1P-R : The voltage sensor is installed only in the R phase of the recloser body unit. 1P-S : The voltage sensor is installed only in the S phase of the recloser body unit. 1P-T : The voltage sensor is installed only in the T phase of the recloser body unit. NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to only one phase or none of the phase, following functions performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if this setting is changed. 

Phase Difference



Interrupt, Sag and Swell Detection – PQM



Voltage Unbalance Detection – PQM



Under and Over Voltage Detection – PQM



Loop Control



Directional Control



Under and Over Voltage Protection



Live Line Detection



Phase Open/Loss Detection



Open Phase



Live Load Blocking

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

79

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / Source Side [VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V CON-Type: WYE >2V Rated(P-P):22.86 >2V Ratio: 3300.0 >2V Instal Type: 3P >Source Side: 1V [1V/2V]

Range

1V, 2V

Default 1V

Step

~

Select the Source side of System. 1V : It is selected when Source Voltage Connector(1V) is connected with the Source side of System.. 2V : It is selected when Load Voltage Connector(2V) is connected with the opposite Source side of System. According to the selected value, the indication of “MAIN MENU/ METERING/ VOLTAGE” change. In the VOLTAGE screen, ABC indicates the Source Side, and RST indicates the Load Side.

7.1.1.4. Event Recorder Place the curser on “EVENT RECORDER” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Waveform, Event Recorder and its related elements are set in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Recorder ON, OFF

[EVENT RECORDER] >Wave Recorder: ON >Wave S/R: 64 Wave Pre-Cycle: 5 Wave P/S: P(1ST) L&E Record: ON

Range

[OFF/ON]

When this setting is OFF, fault cycle will not register any information.

Default ON

Step

~

Set whether to use wave recorder function.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave S/R [EVENT RECORDER] >Wave Recorder: OFF >Wave S/R: 64 Wave Pre-Cycle: 5 Wave P/S: P(1ST) L&E Record: ON [16/32/64]

Range

16, 32, 64sample

Default 64 sample

Step

~

Select a number of sampling for wave capture. Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection. For example, Captured wave cycle is 60 cycles if 64 sampling is applied.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

80

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Pre-Cycle [EVENT RECORDER] >Wave Recorder: OFF >Wave S/R: 64 >Wave Pre-Cycle: 5 Wave P/S: P(1ST) L&E Record: ON [1~20:1cycle]

Range

1 ~ 20 cycle

Default 5

Step

1 cycle

Pre-cycle is to record(capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger occurring. Pre-cycle changes depending on sampling ratio. For instance, if pre-cycle is set for 5 cycle, when sampling number is 64, 5 cycle is applied, the sampling number is 32, pre-cycle is 10, 16 case, 20 pre-cycle is applied.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / Wave P/S [EVENT RECORDER] >Wave Recorder: OFF >Wave S/R: 64 >Wave Pre-Cycle: 5 >Wave P/S: P(1ST) L&E Record: ON [P(1ST)/S(2ND)]

Range

P(1ST), S(2ND)

Default P(1ST)

Step

~

Select if analog data value is primary data or secondary data recorded on Wave cycle. Record the current and voltage data applied to setting value EVRC2A-NT on secondary side (the CT ratio and VT ratio divided by the primary side data).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Record [EVENT RECORDER] >L&E Record: OFF L&E Interval: 15 COMTRADE Record:OFF COMTRADE Rev.: 1999 >COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)

Range

OFF, ON

Default OFF

Step

~

Set whether Load&Energy event is recorded or not.

[OFF/ON]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Interval [EVENT RECORDER] >L&E Record: OFF >L&E Interval: 15 COMTRADE Record:OFF COMTRADE Rev.: 1999 >COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)

Range

5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60

Default 15

Step

~

Set the interval to record Load&Energy events.

[5/10/15/20/30/60]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

81

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Record [EVENT RECORDER] >L&E Record: OFF >L&E Interval: 15 >COMTRADE Record:OFF COMTRADE Rev.: 1999 >COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST) [OFF/ON]

Range

OFF, ON

Default OFF

Step

~

In case of occurring a fault, set COMTRADE (Common Format for Transient Data Exchange) format file in EVRC2A-NT. The COMTRADE file recorded in EVRC2A-NT can be downloaded by the file transfer protocol function. For details, refer to “17.2. COMTRADE”.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rev. [EVENT RECORDER] >L&E Record: OFF >L&E Interval: 15 >COMTRADE Record:OFF >COMTRADE Rev.: 1999 >COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST)

Range

1999, 2013

Default 1999

Step

~

Select version of COMTRADE file.

[1999/2013]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE P/S [EVENT RECORDER] >L&E Interval: 15 >COMTRADE Record:OFF >COMTRADE Rev.: 1999 >COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST) >COMTRADE Rate: 1 [P(1ST)/S(2ND)]

Range

P(1ST), S(2ND)

Default P(1ST)

Step

~

Select whether the analog data value recorded in the COMTRADE file is primary or secondary data.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / EVENT RECORDER / COMTRADE Rate [EVENT RECORDER] >L&E Interval: 15 >COMTRADE Record:OFF >COMTRADE Rev.: 1999 >COMTRADE P/S:P(1ST) >COMTRADE Rate: 1 [1~10:1]

Range

1 ~ 10

Default 1

Step

1

Sets the rate of the analog data value recorded to the COMTRADE file. Record the value divided by the analog data into the COMTRADE file.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

82

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.2. Monitoring Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. [MONITERING] >1.LIVE LINE 2.OPERATION COUNT 3.CONTACT WEAR 4.BATT LOAD TEST 5.BATT MANAGEMENT 6.POWER QUALITY 7.SYSTEM POWER

7.1.2.1. Live Line Place the curser on “LIVE LINE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. EVRC2A-NT has Line detect element. If one phase voltage among three phase maintains over live detect level during a constant time, live line is detected. Live line detection setting item is same as below. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv [LIVE LINE] >Live Line Lv: 0.30 Live Line Tm: 4.00

Range

0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT

Default 0.30

Step

0.01 xVT

Set the live line level and this is set in multiple of previous rating. [0.10~1.40:0.01xVT]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Tm [LIVE LINE] >Live Line Lv: 0.30 >Live Line Tm: 4.00

Range

0.00~600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the delay time of live detect element. [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

83

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.2.2. Operation Count Place the curser on “OPERATION COUN” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Recloser operation counter and monitoring elements are set in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Function [OPERATION COUNT] >Function: DISABLE Alarm Count: 10000 Reset Count: 0

[DISABLE, ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default

DISABLE

~

Step

Select whether to use Recloser operation count monitoring. If function is activated and operation counter is over “Alarm Count”, Logic bit DIGOPRC(Diagnostic Operation Count) is set. Logic bit can be used for Output or Alarm through Interface software.

Figure 7-2. DIGOPRC Diagram GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Alarm Count [OPERATION COUNT] >Function: DISABLE >Alarm Count: 10000 Reset Count: 0

Range

1 ~ 20000

Default 10000

Step

1

Set a number to alarm when Recloser operation number meets this set. [1~20000:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

84

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Reset Count [OPERATION COUNT] >Function: DISABLE >Alarm Count: 10000 >Reset Count: 0

[0~10000:1]

Range

0 ~ 10000

Default 0

Step

1

It is to set the same operation number of circuit breaker. Set value is available after operation count is reset. Count reset refers to “MAIN MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET/ OPERATION COUNT or COUNT ALL” menu. NOTE : 1. When entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET” menu to reset operation count, password 3 authentication is required 2. The current operation count can be checked in the “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ COUNT/ EVRC2A-NT” menu.

7.1.2.3. Contact Wear Place the curser on “CONTACT WEAR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Recloser contact wear and monitoring elements are set in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Function [CONTACT WEAR] >Function: DISABLE Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Time Delay: 0.01 Interrupt I1: 1.00 Interrpt Ct1: 10000

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Select whether to use Recloser contact wear monitoring.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Pickup(%) [CONTACT WEAR] >Function: DISABLE >Alarm Pickup: 20.0 Time Delay: 0.01 Interrupt I1: 1.00 Interrpt Ct1: 10000

Range

[0.0~50.0:0.1%]

value.

0.0 ~ 50.0 %

Default 20.0

Step

0.1 %

Set a pickup value to alarm when recloser contact wear reaches set

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

85

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Time Delay [CONTACT WEAR] >Function: DISABLE >Alarm Pickup: 20.0 >Time Delay: 0.01 Interrupt I1: 1.00 Interrpt Ct1: 10000

Range

0.00 ~ 1.00 sec

Default 1.0

Step

0.1 sec

Set time delay when recloser contact wear reaches set value.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I1 1.00~600.00 kA

[CONTACT WEAR] >Function: DISABLE >Alarm Pickup: 20.0 >Time Delay: 0.01 >Interrupt I1: 1.00 Interrpt Ct1: 10000

Range

[1.00~600.00:0.01kA]

operation number at the point 1(maximum operation number).

Default 1

Step

0.01 kA

To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt Ct1 1~60000

[CONTACT WEAR] >Function: DISABLE >Alarm Pickup: 20.0 >Time Delay: 0.01 >Interrupt I1: 1.00 >Interrpt Ct1: 10000

Range

[1~60000:1]

operation number at the point 2(maximum operation number).

Default 10000

Step

0.01kA

To set interruption current of the curve for interruption current to

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt I2 1.00~600.00 kA

[CONTACT WEAR] >Interrupt I2: 20.0 >Interrpt Ct2: 16 >A Wear Set: 100.00 >B Wear Set: 100.00 >C Wear Set: 100.00

Range

[1.00~600.00:0.01kA]

operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).

Default 20.00

Step

0.01kA

To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt Ct 2 1~60000

[CONTACT WEAR] >Interrupt I2: 20.0 >Interrpt Ct2: 16 A Wear Set: 100.00 B Wear Set: 100.00 C Wear Set: 100.00

Range

[1~20000:1]

operation number at the point 2(minimum operation number).

Default 16

Step

1

To set operation number of the curve for interruption current to

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

86

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / A Wear Set [CONTACT WEAR] >Interrupt I2: 20.0 >Interrpt Ct2: 16 >A Wear Set: 100.00 >B Wear Set: 100.00 >C Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]

0.00 ~ 100.00 %

Range

Default 100.00

Step

0.01%

It is to set Circuit breaker phase A contact wear value in EVRC2A-NT. Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset refers

to

“MAIN

MENU/

MAINENANCE/

DATA RESET/

CONTACT WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / B Wear Set [CONTACT WEAR] >Interrupt I2: 20.0 >Interrpt Ct2: 16 >A Wear Set: 100.00 >B Wear Set: 100.00 C Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]

0.00 ~ 100.00 %

Range

Default 100.00

Step

0.01%

It is to set Circuit breaker phase B contact wear value in EVRC2A-NT. Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset refers

to

“MAIN

MENU/

MAINENANCE/

DATA RESET/

CONTACT WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / C Wear Set [CONTACT WEAR] >Interrupt I2: 20.0 >Interrpt Ct2: 16 >A Wear Set: 100.00 >B Wear Set: 100.00 >C Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]

0.00 ~ 100.00 %

Range

Default 100.00

Step

0.01%

It is to set Circuit breaker phase C contact wear value in EVRC2A-NT. Set value is available after Contact Wear Reset. Contact wear reset refers

to

“MAIN

MENU/

MAINENANCE/

DATA RESET/

CONTACT WEAR or COUNT ALL” menu. NOTE : 1.

2.

Password 3 authentication is required when entering “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET” menu to reset “Phase A Contact Wear”, “Phase B Contact Wear” and “Phase C Contact Wear”. Current contact wear of each phase can be checked in “MENU/ MAINENANCE/ CONTACT WEAR” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

87

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.2.4. Auto Battery Load Test Place the curser on “BATT LOAD TEST” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT LOAD TEST / Period [BATT LOAD TEST] >Period: 24

0(OFF), 1 ~ 720 hour

Range

Default 24

Step

1 hour

Set a time period for automatic battery load test. [0(OFF),1~720:1hr]

7.1.2.5. Battery Management Place the curser on “BATT MANAGEMENT” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. The EVRC2A-NT has a battery management function that calculates and manages the battery capacity using the charge time and discharge time of the set battery. However, for correct battery capacity calculation, charge time and discharge time should be set for the installed battery. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Function [BATT MANAGEMENT] >Function: DISABLE Charge Time: 780 Discharge Time:1440 Alarm Level: 50.00 Capacity Rst:100.00 [0(OFF),1~720:1hr]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether to monitor battery capacity. If set to ENABLE, if the battery capacity is less than the "Alarm Level" setting value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)" event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Charge Time [BATT MANAGEMENT] >Function: DISABLE >Charge Time: 780 Discharge Time:1440 Alarm Level: 50.00 Capacity Rst:100.00

Range

[60~6000:1 m]

charged.

60 ~ 6000 min.

Default 780

Step

1 min.

Sets the time at which the fully discharged battery (0%) will be fully

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

88

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Discharge Time [BATT MANAGEMENT] >Function: DISABLE >Charge Time: 780 >Discharge Time:1440 Alarm Level: 50.00 Capacity Rst:100.00

Range

60 ~ 6000 min.

Default 1440

Step

1 min.

Sets the time when the fully charged battery (100%) is fully discharged.

[60~6000:1 m]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level [BATT MANAGEMENT] >Function: DISABLE >Charge Time: 780 Discharge Time:1440 >Alarm Level: 50.00 Capacity Rst:100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]

Range

0.00 ~ 100.00 %

Default 50

Step

0.01 %

Set the battery monitoring level. If battery capacity is less than this set value, "BATBAD (Battery Bad)" event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / BATT MANAGEMENT / Alarm Level 0.00 ~ 100.00 %

[BATT MANAGEMENT] >Function: DISABLE >Charge Time: 780 Discharge Time:1440 >Alarm Level: 50.00 >Capacity Rst:100.00

Range

[0.00~100.00:0.01%]

After this setting, it can reset battery capacity using “MAIN MENU /

Default 100

Step

0.01 %

Set the battery capacity reset value. MAINENANCE / DATA RESET / BATT. CAPACITY or COUNT ALL”. When the battery is replaced, it should be reset to the capacity for the replaced battery according to the above procedure. NOTE : 1. Password 3 authentication is required when entering “MENU / MAINENANCE / DATA RESET” menu to reset the battery capacity. 2. Current battery capacity can be checked in “MENU / METERING / CONTROLLERL REF” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

89

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.2.6. Power Quality Monitoring Place the curser on “PQM” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Power Quality Monitoring elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.

[PQM] >1.PQM FUNCTION 2.INTERRUPT 3.SAG 4.SWELL 5.HARMONICS 6.CURR UNBALANCE 7.VOLT UNBALANCE 8.UNDER VOLTAGE 9.OVER VOLTAGE 10.UNDER FREQUENCY 11.OVER FREQUENCY 12.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT

The EVRC2A-NT provides voltage and current measurement signals at a rate of 64 samples / cycle per cycle, providing instantaneous voltage drop (Sag), instantaneous voltage swell, interrupt, under voltage, overvoltage, And power quality monitoring functions such as voltage / current imbalance. The power quality for power grid is classified into several categories according to the voltage magnitude and duration according to the international standard IEEE 1159 "Recommended Practice on Monitoring Electric Power Quality". The power quality categories are listed in “Figure 7-3. Power Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)” and “Table 7-3. Power Quality Category according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)”. When the power quality monitoring element occurs, record the PQM event, PQM waveform and PQM counter. In addition, when the related communication point is used, the occurrence event can be transmitted to the master station through the remote communication.

Figure 7-3. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

90

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 7-2. Power Quality categories according to IEEE 1159 (Interrupt, Sag, Swell) Category

Time

Voltage Value

Sag

0.5 ~ 30 Cycle

0.1~0.9 xVT of rating

Swell

0.5 ~ 30 Cycle

1.1~1.8 xVT of rating

Interruption

0.5 Cycle ~ 3 sec

Rated below 0.1 xVT

Sag

30 Cycle ~ 3 sec

Rated below 0.1~0.9 xVT

Swell

30 Cycle ~ 3 sec

Rated below 1.1~1.8 xVT

Interruption

3 sec ~ 1 min

Rated below 0.1 xVT

Sag

3 sec ~ 1 min

0.1~0.9 xVT of rating

Swell

3 sec ~ 1 min

1.1~1.8 xVT of rating

1 min above

Rated below 0.1 xVT

Short-term fluctuation Instantaneous

Momentary

Temporary

Long-term fluctuation Sustained Interruption

1)

PQM Function

Place the curser on “PQM FUNCTION” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / PQM FUNCTION / Function [PQM FUNCTION] >Function: DISABLE

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Select whether to use PQM function. [DISABLE/ENABLE]

If the function is disabled, all PQM monitor function is disabled.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

91

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

2)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Interrupt

Place the curser on “INTERRUPT” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Level [INTERRUPT] >Level: OFF >Time: 2.0

Range

0(OFF), 0.10~ 0.49 xVT

Default OFF

Step

0.01 xVT

It is to set Interrupt detect level for Power Quality. 0(OFF),0.10~0.49xVT

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Time [INTERRUPT] >Level: OFF >Time: 2.0

Range

0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle

Default 2.0

Step

0.5 cycle

Set a interrupt detecting time. [0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

3)

Sag

Place the curser on “ SAG” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Level Range

[SAG] >Level: >Time:

OFF 2.0

0(OFF), 0.50~ 0.99 xVT

Default OFF

Step

0.01 xVT

Set a voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality. 0(OFF),0.50~0.99xVT

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Time >Level: >Time:

[SAG]

Range OFF 2.0

0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle

Default 2.0

Step

0.5 cycle

Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low). [0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

92

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

4)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Swell

Place the curser on “SWELL” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Level [SWELL] >Level: >Time:

Range OFF 2.0

0(OFF), 1.01~ 1.50 xVT

Default 0

Step

0.01 xVT

Set a detect level of Voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality. 0(OFF),1.01~1.50xVT

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Time [SWELL] >Level: >Time:

Range OFF 2.0

0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle

Default 2.0

Step

0.5 cycle

Set a time to detect voltage swell. [0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

5)

Harmonics

Place the curser on “HARMONIC” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Pickup [HARMONICS] >VTHD Pickup: OFF >VTHD Delay: 1.00 >ITHD Pickup: OFF >ITHD Delay: 1.00

Range

0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

Default OFF

Step

0.1%

Set a detect level of voltage total harmonic distortion. [0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Delay [HARMONICS] >VTHD Pickup: OFF >VTHD Delay: 1.00 >ITHD Pickup: OFF >ITHD Delay: 1.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set a detect time to detect voltage total harmonic distortion. [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

93

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Pickup [HARMONICS] >VTHD Pickup: OFF >VTHD Delay: 1.00 >ITHD Pickup: OFF >ITHD Delay: 1.00

Range

0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

Default OFF

Step

0.1%

Set a detect level of current total harmonic distortion. [0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Delay [HARMONICS] >VTHD Pickup: OFF >VTHD Delay: 1.00 >ITHD Pickup: OFF >ITHD Delay: 1.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set a detect time to detect current total harmonic distortion. [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

6)

Current Unbalance

Place the curser on “CURR UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Pickup [CURR UNBALANCE] >Pickup: 30.0 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

Default 30.0

Step

0.1 %

Set a detect level of Current Unbalance for Power Quality. [0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

Unbalance current is calculated by following formula.

UIrate 

I2 100 I1

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Time delay [CURR UNBALANCE] >Pickup: 30.0 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the time delay of current unbalance. [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

94

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

7)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Voltage Unbalance

Place the curser on “VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Pickup [VOLT UNBALANCE] >Pickup: 30.0 >Time Delay: 4.00

0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

Range

Default 30

Step

0.1 %

Set a detect level of Voltage Unbalance for Power Quality. [0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

Unbalance voltage is calculated by following formula.

UVrate 

V2  100 V1

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Time delay [VOLT UNBALANCE] >Pickup: 30.0 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the time delay of voltage unbalance. [0.00~600.0:0.01s]

8)

Under Voltage

Place the curser on “UNDER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Pickup [UNDER VOLTAGE] >Pickup: 0.80 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT

Default 0.80

Step

0.01 xVT

Set pickup voltage level to detect for under voltage element of power 0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT

quality.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Time [UNDER VOLTAGE] >Pickup: 0.00 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0.00 ~600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set detecting time for under voltage element of power quality. [0.0~600.0:0.1s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

95

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

9)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Over Voltage

Place the curser on “OVER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Pickup [OVER VOLTAGE] >Pickup: 1.20 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0(OFF), 0.10~ 1.40 xVT

Default 1.20

Step

0.01 xVT

Set pickup voltage level to detect for over voltage element of power 0(OFF),0.10~1.40xVT

quality.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Time [OVER VOLTAGE] >Pickup: 1.20 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0.00 ~600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set detecting time for over voltage element of power quality. [0.0~600.0:0.1s]

10) Under Frequency Place the curser on “UNDER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Pickup [UNDER FREQUENCY] >Pickup: 1.20 Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

Default 59.50

Step

0.01 Hz

Set an under frequency detect level for power quality. 0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

96

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Time Delay [UNDER FREQUENCY] Pickup: 1.20 >Time Delay: 4.00

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set an under frequency detecting time.

11) Over Frequency Place the curser on “OVER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER FREQUENCY / Level [OVER FREQUENCY] >Pickup: 60.50 Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0(OFF), 45.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

Default 60.50

Step

0.01 Hz

Set an under frequency detect level for power quality. 0(OFF),45.00~65.00Hz

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / OVER FREQUENCY / Time Delay [UNDER FREQUENCY] Pickup: 60.50 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set an under frequency detecting time. [0.03~10.00:0.01s]

12) Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Place the cursor on “ITHD/UBI I LIMIT” menu, press [ENT] key and move to this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / PQM / ITHD/UBI I LIMIT / Limit Current [ITHD/UBI I LIMIT] >Limit Current: 60

Range

0 ~ 630 A

Default 60

Step

1A

Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element [0~630:1A]

and current harmonic distortion element. If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance and current THD status point does not make.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

97

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.2.7. System Power Place the curser on “SYSTEM POWER” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. System power monitoring elements are set in this menu. If there is a problem with system power, it does not perform the correct measurement and functions. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Function [SYSTEM POWER] >Function: ON +12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 -12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 Ref. V Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00

Range

OFF, ON

Default ON

Step

~

Select whether to use System Power monitoring.

[OFF/ON]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / +12V Pickup 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V

[SYSTEM POWER] Function: ON >+12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 -12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 Ref. V Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00

Range

[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V]

this setting, an alarm is generated.

Default 1.0 V

Step

0.1 V

Set a pickup value for +12V system power alarm. If the error of the system power measurement value deviates more than

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Time Delay [SYSTEM POWER] Function: ON +12V Pickup: 1.0 >Time Delay: 1.00 -12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 Ref. V Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00

Range

0.01 ~ 10.00 sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set delay time of +12V system power alarm.

[ 0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / -12V Pickup 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V

[SYSTEM POWER] Function: ON +12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 >-12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 Ref. V Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00

Range

[0(OFF),0.1~10.0V]

this setting, an alarm is generated.

Default 1.0 V

Step

0.1 V

Set a pickup value for -12V system power alarm. If the error of the system power measurement value deviates more than

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

98

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Time Delay [SYSTEM POWER] Function: ON +12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 -12V Pickup: 1.0 >Time Delay: 1.00 Ref. V Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00

Range

0.01 ~ 10.00 sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set delay time of -12V system power alarm.

[0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Ref. V Pickup [SYSTEM POWER] Function: ON +12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 -12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 >Ref. V Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00 [0(OFF),0.1~10.0V]

Range

0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 10.0 V

Default OFF

Step

0.01 V

Set a pickup value for reference voltage alarm. If the error of the reference voltage measurement value deviates more than this setting, an alarm is generated.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / MONITORING / SYSTEM POWER / Time Delay [SYSTEM POWER] Function: ON +12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 -12V Pickup: 1.0 Time Delay: 1.00 Ref. V Pickup: OFF >Time Delay: 1.00

Range

0.01 ~ 10.00 sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set delay time of reference voltage alarm.

[0.01~10.00:0.01 s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

99

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3. Loop Control The EVRC2A-NT supports the LOOP CONTROL function when the controller type is set to “RECLOSER”. The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal operation area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs. Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID point Recloser, TIE point Recloser. Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage). Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC) When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B operates, the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence, Sectionalizing Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing Recloser can keep the live line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR Function is operated and the load side is disconnected. MIDpoint Recloser(MID) When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or Sectionalizing Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault, then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to Alternate setting, when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During TIEpoint Recloser closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After recovering the fault, connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically changed to Primary setting and MIDpoint Recloser is closed. When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects the load side. TIEpoint Recloser (TIE) TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV. When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and lockouts. TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side and when both side becomes DV.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

100

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

LCD Initial Screen Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, is displayed on LCD Initial Screen. Press [ENT] button to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode. Table 7-3. Initial Screen for Loop Control INITIAL SCREEN LOOP CONTROL

ⓐ Loop Control function are as below.

VS STATUS [LIVELINE] VL STATUS [LIVELINE] VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ] VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ] AUTO RESTORE [ - ] S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[P-1]



SEC : Sectionalizing Recloser



MID : Midpiont Recloser



TIE : Tiepoint Recloser



NON : None Selected

LOOP CONTROL



- : Since control type is selected as sectionalizer, auto loop control function

VS STATUS [LIVELINE] VL STATUS [LIVELINE] VS LOOP OPERATE[ - ] VL LOOP OPERATE[ - ] AUTO RESTORE [ - ] S-CNG[OFF] S-GR[ⓑ-ⓒ]

is not activated. VS STATUS: Displays the status of source side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE) VL STATUS: Displays the status of load side voltage(LIVE or DEAD LINE) VS LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to the dead line of source side 

RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.

VL LOOP OPERATE : Displays the loop control function is operating due to the dead line of load side. 

RUNNING : Timer is running to activate loop control.

AUTO RESTORE : Displays auto restoring status after loop control operation. It is only available when SEC and MID status. 

RUNNING : After returning to live line, timer is running for automatic reset

S-CNG : When loop control is operating, it can display the possibility of auto set group change. It is only available when MID and TIE status. S-GR : It indicates the currently applied set group. ⓑ It indicates that when currently applied set group as primary(P) or alternate(A) setting. ⓒ It indicates the currently applied set group.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

101

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

LOOP CONTROL Button Use LOOP CONTROL button to use Loop control on User interface Panel. LOOP CONTROL ENABLED When “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED is ON, loop control function is enabled. LED ON Control is possible only under the conditions as mentioned in “Table 7-6. “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions”. LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE When “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED is ON, auto restoration function is enabled. In auto restoration

Figure 7-4. Loop Control Button

function, “Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values after the loop control operation. LED

ON

Control

of

“LOOP

CONTROL

AUTO

RESTORE” is only possible when the "LOOP CONTROL ENABLED" LED is ON in SEC and MID type.

Table 7-4. “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED ON Control Conditions Loop Control Setting

Recloser Status

Function

Type Select

ENABLE

SEC

CLOSE

ENABLE

MID

CLOSE

ENABLE

TIE

OPEN

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Remark

102

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3.1. Setting Place the curser on “LOOP CONTROL” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Function [LOOP CONTROL] >Function: DISABLE Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to Tie : VS >VS Wire: 3PN

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether to use loop control function.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select [LOOP CONTROL] >Function: DISABLE >Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to TIE : VS >VS Wire: 3PN [NONE/SEC/MID/TIE]

Range

NONE, SEC, MID, TIE

Default NONE

Step

~

Set whether to use Recloser type and loop control function. After setting this, press [LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button (lamp ON) to operate this function.  NONE : Loop control is not in use.  SEC : It is used for SECtionalizing recloser.  MID : It is used for MIDpoint.  TIE : It is used for TIEpoint.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M [LOOP CONTROL] >Function: DISABLE >Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to TIE : VS >VS Wire: 3PN [VS/VL/VS&VL]

Range

VS, VL, VS&VL

Default VS

Step

~

Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used in SEC, MID. Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing. Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID  VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage  VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

103

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to TIE [LOOP CONTROL] >Function: DISABLE >Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to TIE : VS >VS Wire: 3PN [VS/VL/VS&VL]

Range

VS, VL, VS&VL

Default VS

Step

~

Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE. TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.  VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage  VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage  VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load side voltage becomes dead line voltage

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire [LOOP CONTROL] >Function: DISABLE >Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to Tie : VS >VS Wire: 3PN [Combination of ABC]

Range

3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)

Default

3PN

Step

~

Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage sensor(CVD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. CVD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage.  3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral  3PP : 3 Phase-Phase  1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral  1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral  1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral  1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B  1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C  1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

104

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire [LOOP CONTROL] >VL Wire: 3PN Primary: GROUP1 Alternate: GROUP2 Cng Alt-MID: OFF Cng Alt-TIE: OFF [Combination of ABC]

Range

3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)

Default 3PN

Step

~

Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage sensor(CVD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for CVD type Control S,T phase are not measured.  3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral  3PP : 3 Phase-Phase  1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral  1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral  1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral  1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B  1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C  1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Primary [LOOP CONTROL] >VL Wire: 3PN >Primary: GROUP1 Alternate: GROUP2 Cng Alt-MID: OFF Cng Alt-TIE: OFF [OFF/ON]

Range

GROUP 1 ~ GROUP 6

Default GROUP 1

Step

~

Set which the number of group is primary setting for LOOP CONTROL function. When the LOOP CONTROL function is active, it is automatically applied to the set group of this setting. In case of SEC type, it is always applied as the set group of this setting (applied as the primary setting).

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Alternate [LOOP CONTROL] >VL Wire: 3PN Primary: GROUP3 >Alternate: GROUP4 Cng Alt-MID: OFF Cng Alt-TIE: OFF [OFF/VS/VL/BOTH]

Range

GROUP 1 ~ GROUP 6

Default GROUP 2

Step

~

Set which the number of group is alternate setting for LOOP CONTROL function.

NOTE : When the Loop Control function is activated, the “GROUP SELECT” command via the field and remote control is not applied since the set group is applied by the ‘Primary’ and ‘Alternate’ settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

105

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt - Mid [LOOP CONTROL] >VL Wire: 3PN >Primary: GROUP1 Alternate: GROUP2 >Cng Alt-MID: OFF Cng Alt-TIE: OFF [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

OFF, ON

Default OFF

Step

~

Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point : Select whether to use automatic setting change in MID type. Dead Line status is remained for ‘Live Line TD’ time, setting group changes from Primary setting group to Alternate setting group.  OFF : Turn off auto change.  ON : Turn on auto change.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt - Tie [LOOP CONTROL] >VL Wire: 3PN Primary: GROUP1 >Alternate: GROUP2 >Cng Alt-MID: OFF >Cng Alt-TIE: OFF [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

OFF, VS, VL, BOTH

Default OFF

Step

~

Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE. Select whether to use automatic setting change in TIE type. Dead Line status is remained for ‘Live Line TD’ time, setting group changes from Primary setting group to Alternate setting group.  OFF : Turn off auto change.  ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS(when VS is Dead Line status).  ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL(when VL is Dead Line status).  ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL(When VS or VS is on the Dead Line status).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

106

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / LC After CL [LOOP CONTROL] >LC After CL:DISABLE LC After OP:DISABLE OT Both DL: 10.00 Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 Dead Line Lv: 0.20 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

DISABLE, ENABLE

Range

Default DISABLE

~

Step

Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC or MID. To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is coming from remote or local command. When Loop control function is set to ENABLE, “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED on User interface panel is turned on. DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not automatically activated.(Use “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” to manually activate it) ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically activated.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / LC After OP [LOOP CONTROL] >LC After CL:DISABLE >LC After OP:DISABLE OT Both DL: 10.00 Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 Dead Line Lv: 0.20 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

DISABLE, ENABLE

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Select After Manual Open : Setting Value is used in TIE. To select Loop control function automatically enable after recloser is opened by manual operation. Manual open is referred when the operation signal is coming from remote or local command. When Loop control function is set to ENABLE, “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” LED on User interface panel is turned on. DISABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is not automatically activated.(Use “LOOP CONTROL ENABLED” to manually activate it) ENABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is automatically activated.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DL [LOOP CONTROL] >LC After CL:DISABLE >LC After OP:DISABLE >OT Both DL: 10.00 Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 Dead Line Lv: 0.20 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 10.00

Step

0.01 sec

Open Time on Both Dead Line : Setting value is used in TIE. After TIE closed, source and load side voltage become dead line for a certain period, TIE opens by Loop control function.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

107

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Auto Rest’ T [LOOP CONTROL] >LC After CL:DISABLE >LC After OP:DISABLE >OT Both DL: 10.00 >Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 Dead Line Lv: 0.20 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 10.00

Step

0.01 sec

Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID. This is active when “LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE” LED on User Interface Panel is enabled. SEC operates Loop control (Automatic Open) if a voltage selected from “VRS to S/M” becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage becomes Live Line, a certain period (Auto Restoration Time) later, restores (Automatic Close). MID operate Loop control if a voltage selected form “VRS to S/M” becomes dead line (when “Chg Alt-MID” is on, it automatically changes to alternative Setting). After Loop control operated, When it returns to the live line in the open state and remains for a certain period (Auto Restoration Time), the MID re-restores (auto close and change to primary setting). The MID’s restore process looks like this: A voltage selected form “VRS to S/M” becomes dead line and MID operates.  TIE is closed and on operation fault is occurred and trip lockout.  The voltage that is dead line is returned to the live line.  MID is restored.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Dead Line Lv [LOOP CONTROL] LC After c1: ENABLE LC After Op: ENABLE OT Both DL: 10.00 Auto Rest’ T: 10.00 >Dead Line Lv: 0.20

Range

0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT

Default 0.20

Step

0.01 xVT

Set the dead line level to detect.

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line Lv [LOOP CONTROL] >Live Line Lv: 0.70 Dead Line TD: 50.00 Live Line TD: 50.00 DL Reset TD: 5.00 RBT After LC: 5.00

Range

0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT

Default 0.70

Step

0.01 xVT

Set the live line level to detect.

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

108

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Dead Line TD [LOOP CONTROL] >Live Line Lv: 0.70 >Dead Line TD: 50.00 Live Line TD: 50.00 DL Reset TD: 5.00 RBT After LC: 5.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 50.00

Step

0.01 sec

Dead Line Detection Time Delay: It is the delay time for detecting the dead line in order to operate the SEC, MID and TIE recloser for loop control. If the voltage is kept below 'Dead Line Level', it is considered as dead line condition. If voltage is not recovered during 'Live Line TD', loop control operation is performed Dead Line TD Timer is a cumulate timer that counts the dead line time when doing reclosing of the upper C / B or recloser. This timer does not reset the accumulated count even if it becomes live line and it is reset only by 'DL Reset TD' setting. The set time should be set to be equal to or greater than the largest time of the sum of the reclosing times of the upper C/B or recloser.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line TD [LOOP CONTROL] >Live Line Lv: 0.70 >Dead Line TD: 50.00 >Live Line TD: 50.00 DL Reset TD: 5.00 RBT After LC: 5.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 50.00

Step

0.01 sec

Live Line Detection Time Delay : This is the delay time for detecting the Live Line. If the live line is not available for the preset time after detection of the dead line status, the SEC, MID and TIE recloser are loop controlled. For smooth loop control operation, the set time should be set larger than the SEC setting value, and the MID setting value should be set to be greater than the SEC setting value for each 5 seconds or more. The loop control operation by this set time is as follows;  SEC does open operation.  In the case of MID, active set group is changed. (In the case of ‘Cng Alt-MID’ setting is on)  TIE does close operation, active set group is changed(In the case of ‘Cng Alt-TIE’ setting is on)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

109

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / Live Line TD [LOOP CONTROL] >Live Line Lv: 0.70 >Dead Line TD: 50.00 >Live Line TD: 50.00 >DL Reset TD: 5.00 RBT After LC: 5.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 5.00

Step

0.01 sec

Dead Line Reset Time : Dead Line Status and Dead Line TD 'Timer reset time setting. In case of SEC, if the voltage which was in the dead line condition is maintained over the set time longer than the 'Live Line Level', it is considered as that the line has returned to normal and automatically SEC is closed (In the case of that "LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE" LED is ON)

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / LOOP CONTROL / RBT After LC [LOOP CONTROL] >Live Line Lv: 0.70 >Dead Line TD: 50.00 >Live Line TD: 50.00 >DL Reset TD: 5.00 >RBT After LC: 5.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 5.00

Step

0.01 sec

Auto Reclosing Block Time after Loop Control Operation : Setting values are used in MID, TIE. This timer prevents from Auto Reclosing function when recloser operates due to a fault after Loop control operation. After ‘Live Line TD’ and changed Settings, while backward distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set time, MID recloser. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and MID trips after a set time, auto reclosing is executed. After ‘Live Line TD’, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips after a set time, auto reclosing is executed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

110

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED Key

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED LED

Dead Line Lv

Dead Line TD

DL Reset TD

Live Line TD

Live Line Lv

LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE Key MANUAL OPEN

LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE LED

Figure 7-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

111

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 7-6. MID Point Recloser Logic

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

112

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED Key LOOP CONTROL ENABLED LED

Dead Line Lv

Dead Line TD

DL Reset TD Live Line TD

Live Line Lv

Dead Line Lv

Live Line Lv

RBT After LC

Figure 7-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

113

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.3.3. Loop Control Application 1)

5-Reclosers Loop Control

For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC-MID-TIE. In “Table 7-5. 5-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side. Table 7-5. 5-Reclosers Setting SETTING

CB1

RC1

RC2

RC3

RC4

RC5

CB2

Type Select

-

SEC

MID

TIE

MID

SEC

-

VRS to S/M

-

VS 

VS 

X

VS 

VS 

-

VRS to Tie

-

X

X

VS&VL

X

X

-

VS Wire

-

3PN

3PN

3PN

3PN

3PN

-

VL Wire

-

1PN(A)

1PN(A)

1PN(A)

1PN(A)

1PN(A)

-

Cng Alt-Mid

-

X

ON

X

ON

X

-

Cng Alt-Tie

-

X

X

ON

X

X

-

LC After CL

-

ENABLE

ENABLE

X

ENABLE

ENABLE

-

LC After OP

-

-

X

ENABLE

X

-

-

OT Both DL

-

X

X

10.00

X

X

-

Auto Rest’ T

-

5.00

5.00

5.00

5.00

5.00

-

Dead Line Lv(xVT)

-

0.50

0.50

0.50

0.50

0.50

-

Live Line Lv(xVT)

-

0.70

0.70

0.70

0.70

0.70

-

Dead Line TD(sec)

-

22.0

22.0

22.0

22.0

22.0

-

Live Line TD(sec)

-

5.00

10.00

15.00

10.00

5.00

-

DL Reset TD(sec)

-

5.00

5.00

5.00

5.00

5.00

-

RBT After LC(sec)

-

X

10.00

10.00

10.00

X

-

-

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

-

-

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

-

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE Reclose Time

2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout) “X” is not used.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

114

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault

Figure 7-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates. “Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time. Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “Live Line TD” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn, MID shall have longer time set than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “Live Line TD” is enable, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to alternate set group setting. Step3 : When “Live Line TD” is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to alternate group setting automatically, and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after AutoRestoration Time. Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to primary group setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

115

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault

Figure 7-9. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and trip lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated Dead line time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When the line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates. “Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time. Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “Live Line TD” from MID→TIE in turn, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “Live Line TD” is enable, MID(RC2) changes to alternate group setting automatically. Step3 : When “Live Line TD” is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to alternate group setting. Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault. F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to alternate group setting after Auto Restoration Time. Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to primary group setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

116

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5-Reclosers Loop control at F3 Fault

Figure 7-10. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID (RC2) operate reclosing sequence and trip lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated Dead line time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When the line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates. “Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC3) operate. When “Live Line TD” is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to alternate group setting automatically. Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault. F3 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3) Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to primary group setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous normal line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

117

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

2)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

3-Reclosers Loop Control

For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE. In “Table 7-6. 3-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC3 is installed for CB2 side. Table 7-6. 3-Reclosers Setting SETTING

CB1

RC1

RC2

RC3

CB2

Type Select

-

SEC

VRS to S/M

TIE

SEC

-

-

VS



X

VS



-

VRS to Tie

-

X

VS&VL

X

-

VS Wire

-

3PN

3PN

3PN

-

VL Wire

-

1PN(A)

1PN(A)

1PN(A)

-

Cng Alt-Mid

-

X

X

X

-

Cng Alt-Tie

-

X

ON

X

-

LC After CL

-

ENABLE

X

ENABLE

-

LC After OP

-

-

ENABLE

-

-

OT Both DL

-

X

10.00

X

-

Auto Rest’ T

-

5.00

5.00

5.00

-

Dead Line Lv(xVT)

-

0.50

0.50

0.50

-

Live Line Lv(xVT)

-

0.70

0.70

0.70

-

Dead Line TD(sec)

-

22.0

22.0

22.0

-

Live Line TD(sec)

-

5.00

10.00

5.00

-

DL Reset TD(sec)

-

5.00

5.00

5.00

-

RBT After LC(sec)

-

X

10.00

X

-

-

ON

ON

ON

-

-

ON

OFF

ON

-

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE Reclose Time

2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout) “X” is not used.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

118

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault

Figure 7-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates. “Dead Line TD” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. SEC, TIE has the same setting time. Step2 : “Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate “Live Line TD” from SEC→TIE in turn, TIE shall have longer time set than SEC. When “Live Line TD” is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2) automatically changes to alternate group setting and close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto Restoration Time. Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to primary group setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

119

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault

Figure 7-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “Dead Line TD”. When a line is Dead Line, “Live Line TD” operates. Step2 :

“Live Line TD” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC2) automatically changes to alternate group setting and close. When closing TIE(RC2), TIE(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.

Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1). Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to primary group setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

120

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.4. Passcode Place the curser on “PASSCODE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. When entering to “PASSCODE” menu, Passcode 3 certification is necessary. EVRC2A-NT has 3 (three) Passcode, Passcode can be changed in this menu. Passcode 1 is applied when changing General Global settings and Group Settings, and Passcode 2 is applied when communication setting is changed. Passcode 3 is applied when clearing or resetting registered data such as event logs, counter logs, energy data, etc. The setting range and the procedure for changing the three Passcode are the same. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PASSCORD\ PASSCORD1 ~3 [PASSCODE 1] >PASSCODE 1: 0000

Range

0000 ~ 9999

Default 0000

Step

1

Put Passcode 1. [0000~9999:1]

7.1.5. PLC Place the curser on “PLC” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[PLC] >1.LOGIC TIMER 2.PULS TIMER 3.PULS COUNT 4.INPUT PORTS 5.OUTPUT PORTS 6.LATCH LOGIG

7.1.5.1. LOGIC TIMER Place the curser on “LOGIC TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. 

PLC has 8 logic timer.



If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If input A is disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-13. Logic Timer symbol”.



X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer.



In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM□.



In PLC, B is output for TM□.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

121

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

TM□ X

A

B

Y 0s/0s Figure 7-13. Logic Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-PU [LOGIC TIMER] >TM01-Pickup: 0.05 TM01-Dropout: 0.05 TM02-Pickup: 0.05 TM02-Dropout: 0.05 TM03-Pickup: 0.05

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.05

Step

0.01 sec

Set a pickup time of Logic timer 1.

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-DO [LOGIC TIMER] TM01-Pickup: 0.05 >TM01-Dropout: 0.05 TM02-Pickup: 0.05 TM02-Dropout: 0.05 TM03-Pickup: 0.05

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.05

Step

0.01 sec

Set a Dropout Time of Logic timer 1.

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) TM02~TM08 are same as TM01 above.

7.1.5.2. PULSE TIMER Place the curser on “PULSE TIMER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. 

PLC has 8 pulse timer.



When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output comes for Y time. Please refer to “Figure 7-14. Pulse Timer Symbol”



In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic IPTM□.



In PLC, B is output for PTM□.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

122

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

PTM□ A

B

Y 0s Figure 7-14. Pulse Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE TIMER / PTM1 [PULSE TIMER] >PTM01 Output: 0.01 PTM02 Output: 0.01 PTM03 Output: 0.01 PTM04 Output: 0.01 PTM05 Output: 0.01

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.01

Step

0.01 sec

Set an output time of pulse timer 1.

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) PTM02~PTM08 are same as PTM01 above.

7.1.5.3. PULSE COUNTER Place the curser on “PULSE COUNTER”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. 

PLC has 8 pulse counters.



Whenever Input B becomes 0 and Input A becomes 1, the pulse counter increases and, it reaches to set number X, output C becomes 1. If Input B becomes 1, Output C becomes 0 and increased count becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-15. Pulse Counter Symbol”.



It can be checked counter value about Input A on “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ COUNT/ USER COUNT” menu.



In PLC, A shall be input at user logic CLSET□.



In PLC, B shall be input at user logic CLRST□.



In PLC, C is output for CLT□

CLT PC□

A B

X R

Q

C

0 Figure 7-15. Pulse Counter Symbol

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

123

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / PULSE COUNTER / PTL01 Count Range

[PULSE TIMER] >CTL01 Count: 1000 CTL02 Count: 1000 CTL03 Count: 1000 CTL04 Count: 1000 CTL05 Count: 1000

1 ~ 60000

Default 1

1

Step

Set output count value of Pulse counter 1(PC1).

[1~60000:1]

*. NOTE ) PTL02 Count~PTL08 Count are sam as PTL01 Count above.

7.1.5.4. INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS Place the curser on “INPUT PORTS” or “OUTPUT PORTS” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[INPUT PORTS] >1.INPUT DEBOUNCE

1)

[OUTPUT PORTS] >1.OUTPUT PULSETIME

INPUT DEBOUNCE

Place the curser on “INPUT DEBOUNCE” in INPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. 

Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input.



Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal.



In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B becomes 1. If Input A is disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0. Please refer to “Figure 7-16. Input Debounce Timer Symbol”.



In PLC, A is IN101~IN□ of Control Input, B is output for IN□.

A

IN□ X X

B

0s Figure 7-16. Input Debounce Timer Symbol

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

124

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / INPUT PORTS / INPUT DEBOUNCE / IN101 Range

[INPUT DEBOUNCE] >IN101 : 0.020 IN102 : 0.020 IN103 : 0.020 IN104 : 0.020 IN105 : 0.020

0.005 ~ 300.000 sec

Default 0.020

Step

0.001 sec

Set an Input Debounce Time of IN101.

0.005~300.000:0.001s

*. NOTE ) ① IN102 ~ IN112 and IN201 ~ IN216 are the same as IN101 above. ② IN101 ~ IN112 are the SCADA input ports of the side panel, so the IN101 ~ IN112 settings do not apply unless the Scada I / O board is installed (‘SCADA I / O Use’ setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON)

2)

Output Pulse Timer

Place the curser on “OUTPUT PULSE TIME” in OUTPUT PORTS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. 

Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually.



In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C becomes 1. When Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for Y time. However, if Y time is set for 0, depending on Input A, corresponding coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to “Figure 7-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol’.



In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT□.



In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT□.



In PLC, C is output for OUT□ and this output operates RELAY.

OUT□ A B

Y

R

C

0s Figure 7-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

125

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / OUTPUT PULSE TIME / OUT101 [OUTPUT PULSE >OUT101 : OUT102 : OUT103 : OUT104 : OUT105 :

TIME] 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50

Range

0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec

Default 0.50

Step

0.01 sec

Set an Output pulse time of OUT101.

0(BUFF),0.01~100.00s

*. NOTE ) ① OUT102 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT216 are the same as OUT101 above. ② OUT101 ~ OUT108 is the scada output port of the side panel. Therefore, OUT101 ~ OUT108 settings are not applied unless the Scada I / O board is installed (‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ DEVICE/ H/W OPTION” menu is ON)

7.1.5.5. Latch Logic Place the curser on “LATCH LOGIC”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. 

PLC has 8 latch logics.



When input B is 0 and input A is 1 then output C is 1 and even when input A becomes 0, output C does not become 0. When input B is 1 then output C becomes 0.



A is input into user logic “LSET□”.



B is input into user logic “LRST□”.



C is output as “LT□”.

A B

LT□ S Q R

C

Figure 7-18. Latch Logic Symbol

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

126

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / PLC / LATCH LOGIG / NV Function [LATCH LOGIG] >NV Function: OFF

Range

OFF, ON

Default OFF

Step

~

Sets the non-volatility of the latch logic. If set to ON, latch logic will remain set(‘1’) status by restarting [OFF/ON]

ETMFC610. But, when set to OFF, the set(‘1’) status of the latch logic is cleared(‘0’) when ETMFC610 restarts.

7.1.5.6. Oneshot Logic 

PLC has 8 oneshot logics.



Each time input A is 1, output B outputs 1 Pulse. Even when input A is 1 continuously, output B does not output.



A is input into user logic “IOS□”.



B is output as “OS□”.

OS□ B

A Figure 7-19. Oneshot Logic Symbol

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

127

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.5.7. PLC Setting Example The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the EVENTs that occur within to logically map out for easier control of input/output. For operators used in logical mapping, refer to “Table 7-7. Operator Symbols”. Table 7-7. Operator Symbols OPERATOR

DESCRIPTION

*

“AND” - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.

+

“OR” – when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1..

!

“NOT” – when the input is 1, the output is 0.

(

)

-

This operation is performed first.

1

-

When outputting directly, the output is 1.

0

-

When outputting directly, the output is 0.

-

Buffer output.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

128

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

PLC logic setting example is as follows; If user wants pulse signal output at OUT101 port during Phase Time OverCurrent(Fast/Delay) fault occurrence, set the PLC logic as the formula below.

Example: Logical Expression 1) ITM01 = 151P1T+151P2T+251P1T+251P2T When any one of following : Phase Time Over Current(Fast/Delay) fault occurs, Logic Timer 01(TM01) is outputted. The Pickup Time and Dropout Time of Logic Timer 01 is set in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ PLC/ LOGIC TIMER” menu.

※. NOTE ) Time Over Current Element related Logic Bit designation ① 151P1T : (+) Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Phase

② 151P2T : (+) Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase ③ 251P1T : (-) Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Phase

④ 251P2T : (-) Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase 2) IOUT101 = TM01 Map the output of Logic Timer 01 into the input of Output101 Pulse Timer. When the Pulse Timer input signal is 1, pulse signal is outputted. Output pulse time is set in “GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ PLC/ OUTPUT PULSE TIME” menu. 3) BOUT101 = 0 As there is no block condition for Output101 port, 0 is always inputted. The logic diagram for the logical expression example above is as “Figure 7-20. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram”.

Figure 7-20. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

129

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

PLC Editing Example As shown in “Figure 7-21. PLC Edit Screen”, input the logical expression in the PLC edit screen operating program then upload PLC data to EVRC2A-NT. For more info, consult “EVRC2A-NT600 ETIMS Interface Software User Manual”.

Figure 7-21. PLC Edit Screen NOTE : 1. When editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space. 2. When editing PLC logic, you can see the list of logic that can be input to the equation by pressing the ‘F1’ key.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

130

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6. Device Place the curser on “DEVICE” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[DEVICE] >1.CONTROL TYPE 2.OPERATION TIME 3.H/W OPTION 4.GAS SENSOR 5.MANUAL CLOSE 6.LCD DISPLAY 7.PANEL SLEEP 8.TIME ZONE 9.OTHERS 10.FACTORY DEBUG

7.1.6.1. Control Type Place the curser on “CONTROL TYPE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE / Type [CONTROL TYPE] >Type: RECLOSER

Range

RECLOSER, SECCTIONALIZER

Default RECLOSER

Step

~

Set the control type according to the installed body. [REC/SEC]

ETR-300R has two control types (Recloser and Sectionalizer type). The control type must be selected according to the installed body. If the selected control type and the body type do not match, erroneous operation or non-operating occurs. The menu of the group setting to be applied depends on the control type. When set to RECLOSER, “GROUP SETTING/ RECLOSER” menu is applied and trip operation is performed in case of fault. When set to SECTIONALIZER, "“GROUP SETTING/ SECTIONALIZER” menu is applied. In case of fault, only fault indication is performed and trip operation is not performed. For detailed application function according to control type, refer to "“3. APPLICATION”. NOTE : Be sure to set the control type according to the characteristics of the main body. Otherwise, the EVRC2A-NT will not only operate normally, but it will also cause damage to the mainframe.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

131

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6.2. CB Operation Time Place the curser on “OPERATION TIME” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. In this menu, the operation time of the tank is set. The time set in this menu is used to compensate the T-C curve trip time and reclosing time. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Open Time [OPERATION TIME] >Open Time: 0.026 Close Time: 0.050 OP Fail Time: 1.00 CL Fail Time: 1.00 [0.000~1.000:0.001s]

Range

0.000 ~ 1.000 sec

Default 0.026

Step

0.001 sec

Set actual circuit breaker’s opening time. Circuit breaker’s complete opening time is calculated as follows. Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time + CB Trip Time (CB Opening Time + Arcing Time) *. EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ERT300-R is 1.00sec and CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breaker’s Clearing Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The difference between TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec needs to be set for CB Trip Time(40msec). This setting time compensates CB Trip Time.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ Close Time [OPERATION TIME] >Open Time: 0.026 >Close Time: 0.050 OP Fail Time: 1.00 CL Fail Time: 1.00

Range

0.000 ~ 10.000 sec

Default 0.050

Step

0.01

Set actual circuit breaker’s closing time. [0~10.000:0.001s]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ OP Fail Time 0.05~100.00 sec

[OPERATION TIME] Open Time: 0.026 Close Time: 0.050 >OP Fail Time: 1.00 CL Fail Time: 1.00

Range

[0.05~100.00:0.01 s]

Set fail time for decision Circuit Breaker’s opening operation fail.

Default 1.00

Step

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

0.01 sec

132

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / OPERATION TIME/ CL Fail Time 0.05~100.00 sec

[OPERATION TIME] Open Time: 0.026 Close Time: 0.050 OP Fail Time: 1.00 >CL Fail Time: 1.00

Range

[0.000~1.000:0.001s]

Set fail time for decision Circuit Breaker’s closing operation fail.

Default 1.00

0.01 sec

Step

7.1.6.3. H/W Option Place the curser on “H/W OPTION” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, set the H / W option of ETMFC610. Unlike the actual options, if set, the item may behave incorrectly. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / SCADA I/O Use [H/W OPTION] >SCADA I/O Use: ON >IRIG Use: OFF >Wifi Use: OFF EXT.Temper’ Use: ON

OFF, ON

Range

Default ON

Step

~

Select whether the SCADA I/O board is installed. When set to OFF, input / output control of IN101 ~ IN112 and OUT101

[OFF/ON]]

~ OUT108 ports is disabled and port status is always “OFF”.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use [H/W OPTION] >SCADA I/O Use: ON >IRIG Use: OFF >Wifi Use: OFF EXT.Temper’ Use: ON [OFF/ON]]

OFF, ON

Range

Default OFF

Step

~

Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is installed.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / Wifi Use [H/W OPTION] >SCADA I/O Use: ON >IRIG Use: OFF >Wifi Use: OFF EXT.Temper’ Use: ON [OFF/ON]]

Range

OFF, ON

Default OFF

Step

~

Select whether the wifi is installed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

133

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / EXT. Temper’ Use [H/W OPTION] >SCADA I/O Use: ON >IRIG Use: OFF >Wifi Use: OFF >EXT.Temper’ Use: ON [OFF/ON]]

Range

OFF, ON

Default OFF

Step

~

Select whether the external temperature is installed.

7.1.6.4. GAS Sensor Type Place the curser on “GAS SENSOR” in GENERAL menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / GAS SENSOR [GAS SENSOR] >Sensor: NONE Opr’ Block GPF; OFF

Range

NONE, INSTALL

Default NONE

Step

~

Set whether the gas sensor of the main body is installed or not. [NONE/INSTALL]

Set to INSTALL when the main body is a gas type, and set to NONE if it is a polymer type.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / Opr’ Block GPF [GAS SENSOR] >Sensor: NONE >Opr’ Block GPF; OFF

Range

ON, OFF

Default OFF

Step

~

In case of gas pressure failure (pressure low or high), it sets whether [OFF/ON]

or not the close operation block. This setting is applied only when the above 'Sensor' setting is INSTALL.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

134

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6.5. Manual Close Place the curser on “MANUAL CLOSE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / MANUAL CLOSE / Time Delay [MANUAL CLOSE] >Time Delay: 0.00

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Range

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Using the CLOSE button on the front panel, set the closing delay time [0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

to be applied to the main body when the close control is performed in the field. When OPEN button is pressed during close delay time, the delay timer will stop and close operation will not be performed. If the CLOSE button is pressed again during the close delay time, the close operation is immediately done even if the delay time remains.

7.1.6.6. LCD Display Place the curser on “LCD Display” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, items related to the LCD screen display method of the front panel are set. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Date Disp’ Type [LCD DISPLAY] >Date Disp’type: MDY Init Main Screen: 2 Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF

[YMD/MDY]

Range

YMD, MDY

Default MDY

Step

~

Set the display type of the date displayed on the LCD screen such as the event menu.  YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date  MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Init Main Screen [LCD DISPLAY] >Date Disp’type: MDY >Init Main Screen: 2 Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF

[1~8:1]

Range

1~8

Default 2

Step

2

The EVRC2A-NT has 8 initial screens. Set the main screen of 8 initial screens. The set screen is displayed for the first time after booting or deviating from main menu, when sleep mode is released.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

135

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / LCD DISPLAY / Flt Pop-up Msg [LCD DISPLAY] >Date Disp’type: MDY >Init Main Screen: 2 >Flt Pop-up Msg: OFF

OFF, ON

Range

Default OFF

Step

~

Set whether to display the fault pop-up screen when a fault occurs. The fault pop-up screen is shown in "“Table 7-8. Fault Pop-up

[OFF/ON]

Screen”.

Table 7-8. Fault Pop-up Screen FAULT POP-UP SCREEN [ALERT] FAULT INFO SEQ: 1 TYPE:

ABCNSQ 51

A: 00000 C: 00000 Q: 00000 2017/01/01

B: 00000 N: 00000 S: 00.00 00:00:00

① Fault sequence (shot count) is indicated ② Indicate fault target  A, B, C : each phase fault (Phase fault)  N : Ground fault  Q : Negative Sequence fault  S : Sensitive Earth Fault

[ALERT] FAULT INFO SEQ: ① TYPE:

② ③

A: ④ C: ④ Q: ④

B: ④ N: ④ S: ④ ⑤

③ Indicate fault element  - : Sectionalizer type, Fault Indication  51 : Time Overcurrent Trip  50 : Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip or Instantaneous Overcurrent Lockout  27 : Under Voltage Trip  59 : Over Voltage Trip  64 : Neutral Over Voltage Trip  81 : Under Frequency, Over Frequency or Frequency Decay Trip  32 : Forward Power or Direction Power Trip  46 : Broken Conduct Trip  D : Demand Trip  21 : Z0 Admitance Trip ④ Indicate each phase and negative sequence, S.E.F fault current ⑤ Indicate fault current occurring time *. Whenever fault is occurred, fault pop-up screen is accumulated, the latest fault screen is displayed at first. *. Using [ENT] button, accumulated fault pop-up screen is checked. *. Using [ESC] button, you can clear the pop-up screen without checking all

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

136

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

FAULT POP-UP SCREEN fault pop-up screens.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

137

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6.7. Panel Sleep Time Place the curser on “PANEL SLEEP” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Sleep Time [PANEL SLEEP] >Sleep Time: OFF Awake Method: BOTH

Range

OFF, 1 ~ 100 min

Default 5

Step

1 min

Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no key [0(OFF),1~100:1m]

operation on interface panel, EVRC2A-NT goes into sleep mode.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / PANEL SLEEP / Awake Method [PANEL SLEEP] Sleep Time: OFF >Awake Method: BOTH

Range

KEY, DOOR, BOTH

Default BOTH

Step

-

This setting value is affected to display wake-up method [KEY/DOOR/BOTH]

 DOOR : Using door pin attached on the control door, when the door is open, the control panel is awaken from sleep mode.  KEY : When “AWAKE” key button on the front panel is pushed, the control panel is awaken from sleep mode.  BOTH : DOOR and KEY are all used.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

138

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.1.6.8. Time Zone Place the curser on “TIME ZONE” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This setting is used to calculate out local time by using received time information from Time Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). This menu is used when Time Synchronization Module option is installed. Select standard time zone for User County. Sync time(sec) is used periodic time synchronization by Time Synchronization module when Time Synchronization module is installed. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Sign [TIME ZONE] >GMT Offset-Sign: + GMT Offset-Hour: 9 GMT Offset-Min: 0 Time SyncType: GMT

Range

+, -

Default +

Step

-

Display the receive UTC time and the local time off-set direction. [+/-]

Local time is faster than UTC time, select “+”, otherwise, select “-“.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Hour [TIME ZONE] GMT Offset-Sign: + >GMT Offset-Hour: 9 GMT Offset-Min: 0 Time SyncType: GMT

Range

0~23 hour(s)

Default 9

Step

1 hour

Set the difference of “Hour” between UTC time and Local time. [0~23:1hr]

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / GMT Offset-Min [TIME ZONE] GMT Offset-Sign: + GMT Offset-Hour: 9 >GMT Offset-Min: 0 Time SyncType: GMT [0~59:1min]

Range

0~59 min

Default 0

Step

1 min

Set the difference of “Minute” between UTC and Local time.

NOTE : Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00); Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0 The default value of above settings can vary according to the option type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

139

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

NOTE : If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be happened as follows. -

If the "Time Sync Type" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in EVRC2ANT can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.

-

If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event transmitted is not correct.

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type [TIME ZONE] GMT Offset-Sign: + GMT Offset-Hour: 9 GMT Offset-Min: 0 >Time SyncType: GMT [LOCAL/GMT]

Range

LOCAL, GMT

Default GMT

Step

~

Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized with Time Synchronization module.

NOTE : In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if “IRIG Use” setting is set with "NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION” menu, the time synchronization module is not able to be used.

7.1.6.9. Others Place the curser on “OTHERS” in DEVICE menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Count Use [OTHERS] >16bit Count Use:OFF 16bit Ener’ Use:OFF

Range

OFF, ON

Default ON

Step

~

Set the count data format that EVRC2A-NT resisted. [OFF/ON]

 OFF : Use 32bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 1,000,000.  ON : Use 16bit format Count Data. Each count data is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 65,534.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

140

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / OTHERS / 16bit Ener’ Use [OTHERS] >16bit Count Use:OFF 16bit Ener’ Use:OFF

Range

OFF, ON

Default ON

Step

~

Set the energy data format that the EVRC2A-NT registered. [OFF/ON]

 OFF : Use 32bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 999,999,999.  ON : Use 16bit format Energy Data. Each energy data is rolled over to 0 if the counter value exceeds 60,000.

7.1.6.10. Factory Debug This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.

7.1.7. Save Setting From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GENERAL menu. The procedure for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

141

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2. Communication Place the curser on “COMMUNIATION” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication and its related elements are sent in this menu and it has submenu as below.

[COMMUNICATION] >1.PROTOCOLS 2.PORTS 3.DIALUP MODEM 4.FTP-SSL 5.WIFI 6.EVENT&ETC *.SAVE SETTINGS

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value saved message’.

7.2.1. Protocol Setup Place the curser on “PROTOCOL SETUP” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication protocol of EVRC2A-NT is set and it has sub-menus as below.

[PROTOCOLS] >1.DNP3 2.IEC60870-5 3.MODBUS 4.IEC61850 5.SNTP 6.SNMP 7.ETIMS 8.MULTI-BIT

EVRC2A-NT supports DNP3, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104, MODBOUS, IEC61850, SNTP, SNMP, ETIMS and Multi-Bit Communication protocol. This menu may be changed depending on User’s request. Each protocol setting details are as below.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

142

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup 1)

DNP3 Slave 1 and DNP3 Slave 2

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ DNP3 SLAVE 1 or DNP3 SLAVE 2” to select setting for DNP3 Protocol. Setting items of “DNP3 SLAVE 1” and “DNP3 SLAVE 2” menu are same as following; GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Function [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Function: DISABLE Port Select:RS232-1 D/L Confirm: SOME D/L FrameDly: 100 D/L Retries: 0 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / COM Port [DNP3 SLAVE1] Function: DISABLE >Port Select:RS232-1 D/L Confirm: SOME D/L FrameDly: 100 D/L Retries: 0

Range

RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETHERNET

Default RS232-1

Step

~

Select DNP3 communication port.

[PORT1~PORT5]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Confirm [DNP3 SLAVE1] Function: DISABLE Port Select:RS232-1 >D/L Confirm: SOME D/L FrameDly: 100 D/L Retries: 0 [NO/YES/SOME]

Range

NO, YES, SOME

Default SOME

Step

~

Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.  NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.  YES : Data Link Confirm is used.  SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame. When Data Link Confirm is used, it shall be set same as the Host setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication may be failed due to Data Link Reset.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

143

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L FrameDly [DNP3 SLAVE1] Function: DISABLE Port Select:RS232-1 D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L FrameDly: 100 D/L Retries: 0 [0~5000:10ms]

Range

0 ~ 5000 msec

Default 100

Step

10 msec

Set Data Link frame Delay Time. In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time when multi-frame occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Retries [DNP3 SLAVE1] Function: DISABLE Port Select:RS232-1 D/L Confirm: SOME D/L FrameDly: 100 >D/L Retries: 0

Range

[0~2:1]

layer.

0~ 2

Default 0

Step

1

Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / D/L Timeout [DNP3 SLAVE1] Port Select:RS232-1 D/L Confirm: SOME D/L FrameDly: 100 D/L Retries: 0 >D/L Timeout: 10 [1~255:1s]

Range

1 ~ 255 sec

Default 10

Step

1 sec

Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfers till to receive Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm receiving and Data Link retry is available, EVRC2A-NT will send Data Link Frame again.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Retries [DNP3 SLAVE1] >A/L Retries: 0 A/L Timeout: 30 Master Addr: 60000 Slave Address: 1 SBO Timeout: 15

Range

0 ~ 255

Default 0

Step

1

Enter the number of retries of retransmission of unsol message

[1~255:1s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / A/L Timeout [DNP3 SLAVE1] >A/L Retries: 0 >A/L Timeout: 30 >Master Addr: 60000 >Slave Address: 1 >SBO Timeout: 15 [1~255:1s]

Range

1~ 255 sec

Default 30

Step

1 sec

Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive Application layer Confirm(ACK) from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master Application.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

144

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master Address [DNP3 SLAVE1] A/L Retries: 15 A/L Timeout: 30 >Master Addr: 60000 Slave Address: 1 SBO Timeout: 15

0 ~ 65534

Range

Default 60000

Step

1

Enter the master station address.

[0~65534:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Slave Address [DNP3 SLAVE1] >A/L Retries: 15 >A/L Timeout: 30 Master Addr: 60000 >Slave Address: 15 >SBO Timeout: 15 [0~65534:1]

0 ~ 65534

Range

Default 1

Step

1

Enter the slave(EVRC2A-NT) address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SBO Timeout [DNP3 SLAVE1] >A/L Retries: 15 >A/L Timeout: 30 >Master Addr: 60000 >Slave Address: 15 >SBO Timeout: 15 [1~255:1s]

1 ~ 255 sec

Range

Default 15

Step

1 sec

Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If there is no operation command during set time, Select command is cancelled.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Init Unsol [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Init Unsol: ENABLE Unsol Time: 5 Unsol Type: NOTRIG Class1: ENABLE Class2: ENABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response.  ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is transferred.  DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is not transferred.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol Time [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Init Unsol: ENABLE >Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG >Class1: ENABLE >Class2: ENABLE [0~60:1s]

Range

0 ~ 60 sec

Default 5

Step

1 sec

Set a delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is occurred. Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within the time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

145

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 /Unsol Type [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Init Unsol: ENABLE >Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG Class1: ENABLE Class2: ENABLE [NOTRIG/PERIOD]

Range

NOTRIG, PERIOD

Default NOTRIG

Step

-

Set the method to Unsolicited Message.  NOTRG: If there is no event occurrence during setting unsolicited time after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted.  PERIOD: Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and elapsing when the first event occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 1 [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Init Unsol: ENABLE >Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG >Class1: ENABLE Class2: ENABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case that Class 1 event is occurred.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 2 [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Init Unsol: ENABLE >Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG >Class1: ENABLE >Class2: ENABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case that Class 2 event is occurred.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Class 3 [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class3: ENABLE TCP/UDP Select: TCP TCP Port: 20000 UDP Port : 20001 Master IP Oct1: 0 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case that Class 3 event is occurred.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

146

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/UDP Select [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class3: ENABLE >TCP/UDP Select: TCP TCP Port: 20000 UDP Port : 20001 Master IP Oct1: 0

Range

TCP, UDP

Default TCP

Step

~

Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.

[TCP/UDP]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP Port [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class3: ENABLE TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 20000 UDP Port : 20001 Master IP Oct1: 0

Range

1 ~ 65535

Default 20000

Step

1

Set the TCP/IP Port number of EVRC2A-NT for TCP communication.

[1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / UDP Port [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class3: ENABLE TCP/UDP Select: TCP TCP Port: 20000 >UDP Port : 20001 Master IP Oct1: 0

Range

0 ~ 65535

Default 20001

Step

1

Set the TCP/IP Port number of EVRC2A-NT for UDP communication.

[1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Master IP Oct 1~4 [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct1: Master IP Oct2: Master IP Oct3: Master IP Oct4: [0~255:1]

Range 0 0 0 0

0 ~ 255

Default 0*

Step

1

Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication. IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx ① ②

③ ④

Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④ NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

147

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / K-Alv Check Tm [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct4: 0 >K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Fragment Size: 2048 Time Req(m): OFF Retry Type: REGEN [O(OFF),1~600:1s]

Range

0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec

Default 4

Step

1sec

Set the time period that checks the communication connecting status during the idle status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Fragment Size [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct4: 0 >K-Alv Check Tm: 4 >Fragment Size: 2048 Time Req(m): OFF Retry Type: REGEN [64~2048:1]

Range

64 ~ 2048

Default 2048

Step

1

Set the size of DNP fragment.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Time Req(m) [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct4: 0 K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Fragment Size: 2048 >Time Req(m): OFF Retry Type: REGEN [0(OFF),1~30000:1]

Range

0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min

Default OFF

Step

1

Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time received from master station.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Retry Type [DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct4: 0 K-Alv Check Tm: 4 Fragment Size: 2048 Time Req(m): OFF >Retry Type: REGEN [REGEN/IDENT]

Range

IDENT, REGEN

Default REGEN

Step

~

Set the Retry Type(Identical, Regenerated).

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / SA Func [DNP3 SLAVE1] >SA Func: DISABLE TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE Unsol off TO: OFF

[DISABLE/SAv2/SAv5]

Range

DISABLE, SAv2, SAv5

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether DNP Secure Authentication is used i.e, SAv2, SAv5 or not

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

148

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / TCP/IP TLS [DNP3 SLAVE1] SA Func: DISABLE >TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE Unsol off TO: OFF

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set the DNP TCP/IP Transport Layer Security is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3 SLAVE1 / Unsol off TO [DNP3 SLAVE1] SA Func: DISABLE TCP/IP TLS: DISABLE >Unsol off TO: OFF

Range

0(OFF), 0~65535 sec

Default OFF

Step

1 sec

Set final confirmation timeout period. When unsolicited message transmit is failed, the transmission retries

[0(OFF),0~65535:1s]

repeat. After final retry is done, it waits during this set time and then another unsolicited response series will be started.

2)

DNP3 Protocol Common

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON” menu. This setting is applied to the DNP3 Save 1 and DNP3 Save 2 protocols. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ BI Obj1 Var [COMMON] >BI Obj1 Var : BO Obj10 Var : CI Obj20 Var : FRZ Obj21 Var: AI Obj30 Var : AO Obj40 Var :

Range 1 2 4 6 2 2

0 (NONE), 0~2

Default 1

Step

1

Select Variation of Binary Input Object 02

[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ BO Obj10 Var [COMMON] BI Obj1 Var : >BO Obj10 Var : CI Obj20 Var : FRZ Obj21 Var: AI Obj30 Var : AO Obj40 Var :

Range 1 2 4 6 2 2

0 (NONE), 0 ~ 2

Default 2

Step

1

Select Variation of Binary Output Object 10

[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

149

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ CI Obj20 Var [COMMON] BI Obj1 Var : BO Obj10 Var : >CI Obj20 Var : FRZ Obj21 Var: AI Obj30 Var : AO Obj40 Var :

Range 1 2 4 6 2 2

0 (NONE), 0 ~ 2

Default 4

Step

-

Select Variation of Countr Object 20

[NONE/1/2/5/6]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/COMMON/FRZ Obj21 Var [COMMON] BI Obj1 Var : BO Obj10 Var : CI Obj20 Var : >FRZ Obj21 Var: AI Obj30 Var : AO Obj40 Var :

Range 1 2 4 6 2 2

0 (NONE), 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10

Default 6

Step

-

Select Variation of Frozen Countr Object 21

[NONE/1/2/5/6/9/10]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ CI Obj20 Var [COMMON] BI Obj1 Var : BO Obj10 Var : CI Obj20 Var : FRZ Obj21 Var: >AI Obj30 Var : AO Obj40 Var :

Range 1 2 4 6 2 2

0 (NONE), 0 ~ 4

Default 2

Step

-

Select Variation of Analog Input Object 30

[0(NONE), 0~4:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ DNP3/ COMMON/ AO Obj40 Var [COMMON] BI Obj1 Var : BO Obj10 Var : CI Obj20 Var : FRZ Obj21 Var: AI Obj30 Var : >AO Obj40 Var :

Range 1 2 4 6 2 2

0 (NONE), 0 ~ 2

Default 2

Step

-

Select Variation of Analog Output Object 40

[0(NONE), 0~2:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

150

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.2. IEC60870-5 Protocol Setup 1)

IEC60870-5-101

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC608705/ IEC60870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870-5-101. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function [IEC870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE Port Select:RS232-1 Link Address 1 ASDU Address 0 Cyclic Period 60

DISABLE, ENABLE

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether IEC60870-5-101 protocol is used for communication.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COM Port [IEC870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE >Port Select:RS232-1 Link Address: 1 ASDU Address: 0 Cyclic Period: 60

RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485

Range

Default RS232-1

Step

~

Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.

[PORT1-PORT3]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address [IEC870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE >Port Select:RS232-1 >Link Address: 1 ASDU Address: 0 Cyclic Period: 60 [1~65535:1]

1 ~ 65535

Range

Default 1

Step

1

Enter the slave(EVRC2A-NT) address for IEC60870-5-101 communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr [IEC60870-5-101] Function: DISABLE Port Select:RS232-1 Link Address: 1 >ASDU Address: 0 Cyclic Period: 60 [1~65535:1]

Range

0~65535

Default 0

Step

1

Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

151

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period [IEC60870-5-101] Function: DISABLE Port Select:RS232-1 Link Address: 1 ASDU Address: 0 >Cyclic Period: 60 [0(OFF),1~60000:1s]

Range

0(OFF), 1~60000 sec

Default 60

Step

1 sec

Select the Cyclic Period. It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period 0~255 sec

[IEC60870-5-101]> >Event Period: 15 D/L Retries: 0 Conf.Timeout: 10 Max Poll Time: 10 ASDU Addr Size: 2

Range

[0~255:1s]

events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay

Default 15

Step

1sec

Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/D/L Retries [IEC60870-5-101]> >Event Period: 15 >D/L Retries: 0 Conf.Timeout: 10 Max Poll Time: 10 ASDU Addr Size: 2 [0~255:1]

Range

0 ~ 255

Default 0

Step

1

Set the number of Data retry.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout [IEC60870-5-101]> >Event Period: 15 D/L Retries: 0 >Conf.Timeout: 10 Max Poll Time: 10 ASDU Addr Size: 2 [1~255:1s]

Range

1 ~ 255 sec

Default 10

Step

1 sec

Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after transfer the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time and Data retries is available, ETMFC610 transfers the Data again.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim [IEC60870-5-101]> >Event Period: 15 D/L Retries: 0 Conf.Timeout: 10 >Max Poll Time: 10 ASDU Addr Size: 2 [1~255:1s]

Range

1 ~ 255 sec

Default 10

Step

1 sec

Set the Data Polling period time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

152

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ ADSUAddr Size [IEC60870-5-101]> Event Period: 15 D/L Retries: 0 Conf.Timeout: 10 Max Poll Time: 10 >ASDU Addr Size: 2 [1~2:1]

Range

1~2

Default 2

Step

1

Enter the size of cause of transmission.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Confirm [IEC60870-5-101] >Link Confirm:ALWAYS Link Addr Size: 1 Rx Frame Size: 261 Rx Frame TO: 15 Tx Frame Size: 261

Range

NEVER, ALWAYS

Default ALWAYS

Step

~

Enter the Link layer confirm mode.

[NEVER/ALWAYS]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ LinkAddr Size [IEC60870-5-101] Link Confirm:ALWAYS >Link Addr Size: 1 Rx Frame Size: 261 Rx Frame TO: 15 Tx Frame Size: 261

Range

1~2

Default 1

Step

1

Enter the size of link address.

[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size [IEC60870-5-101] Link Confirm:ALWAYS Link Addr Size: 1 >Rx Frame Size: 261 Rx Frame TO: 15 Tx Frame Size: 261 [0~261:1]

Range

0 ~ 261

Default 261

Step

1

Enter the maximum size of received frame.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO [IEC60870-5-101] Link Confirm:ALWAYS Link Addr Size: 1 Rx Frame Size: 261 >Rx Frame TO: 15 Tx Frame Size: 261 [0(OFF),0~255:1s]

Range

0(OFF), 0 ~ 255 sec

Default 15

Step

1 sec

Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after receiving the frame sync.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

153

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size [IEC60870-5-101] Link Confirm:ALWAYS Link Addr Size: 1 Rx Frame Size: 261 Rx Frame TO: 15 >Tx Frame Size: 261 [0~261:1]

Range

0 ~ 261

Default 261

Step

1

Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ COT Size [IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 One Ch Response: NO Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Select Timeout: 5

Range

1~2

Default 1

Step

1

Enter the size of cause of transmission.

[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ IOA Size [IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 One Ch Response: NO Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Select Timeout: 5

Range

1~3

Default 2

Step

1

Enter the size of information object address.

[1~3:1]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ One Ch Response [IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 >One Ch Response: NO Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Select Timeout: 5 [NO/YES]

Range

NO, YES

Default NO

Step

~

This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length NACK when no response data available.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Frame Repet’TO [IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Select Timeout: 5 [0(OFF),0~255:1s]

Range

0(OFF), 0~255sec

Default 30

Step

1 sec

Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application layer timeout).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

154

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Select Timeout [IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 One Ch Response: NO Frame Repet’ TO: 30 >Select Timeout: 5 [0(OFF),0~255:1]

Range

0(OFF), 0~255

Default 5

Step

1 sec

Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CMD Termination NO, YES

[IEC60870-5-101] >CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES Clock Sync’ Evt:YES MSP Time-Tag: CP56 MIT Time-Tag: CP56

Range

[NO/YES]

commands other than set point commands.

Default YES

Step

~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ CSE Termination NO, YES

[IEC60870-5-101] CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES Clock Sync’ Evt:YES MSP Time-Tag: CP56 MIT Time-Tag: CP56

Range

[NO/YES]

point commands.

Default YES

Step

~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Clock Sync’Evt [IEC60870-5-101] CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES MSPTime-Tag: CP56 MIT Time-Tag: CP56

Range

NO, YES

Default YES

Step

~

Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events

[NO/YES]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MSPTime-Tag [IEC60870-5-101] CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES Clock Sync’ Evt:YES >MSP Time-Tag: CP56 MIT Time-Tag: CP56 [CP56/CP24]

Range

CP56, CP24

Default CP56

Step

~

Select whether a time tag format for single-point.  CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.  CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

155

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MIT Time-Tag [IEC60870-5-101] CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES Clock Sync’ Evt:YES MSP Time-Tag: CP56 >MIT Time-Tag: CP56 [CP56/CP24]

Range

CP56, CP24

Default CP56

Step

~

Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.  CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.  CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ MME Time-Tag [IEC60870-5-101] >MME Time-Tag: CP56 >Flt Time-Tag: CP56

Range

CP56, CP24

Default CP56

Step

~

Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized value for general event except for fault current event. [CP56/CP24]

 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.  CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-101/ Flt Time-Tag [IEC60870-5-101] >MME Time-Tag: CP56 >Flt Time-Tag: CP56

Range

CP56, CP24

Default CP56

Step

~

Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals. [CP56/CP24]

2)

 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.  CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

IEC60870-5-104

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC608705/ IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870-5-104. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function [IEC870-5-104] >Function: DISABLE >ASDU Address: 0 Cyclic Period: 60 Timeout(t0): 120

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether IEC60870-5-104 protocol is used for communication. [DISABLE/ENABLE]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

156

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr [IEC60870-5-104] Function: DISABLE >ASDU Address: 0 Cyclic Period: 60 Timeout(t0): 120 [1~65535:1]

0~65535

Range

Default 0

Step

1

Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period [IEC60870-5-104] Function: DISABLE ASDU Address: 0 >Cyclic Period: 60 Timeout(t0): 120 [0(OFF),1~60000:1s]

0(OFF), 1~60000 sec

Range

Default 60

Step

1 sec

Select the Cyclic Period. It is to set interval time between Points set for Cyclic.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0) [IEC60870-5-104] Function: DISABLE ASDU Address: 0 Cyclic Period: 60 >Timeout(t0): 120 [1~255:1s]

1~255 sec

Range

Default 120

Step

1

Select the Timeout for connection establishment.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t1) [IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10 Time Out(t2): 20 Event Perioid: 15 TCP Port No: 2404 [1~255:1s]

1~255 sec

Range

Default 15

Step

1

Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t2) [IEC60870-5-104] Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10 Time Out(t2): 20 Event Perioid: 15 TCP Port No: 2404 [1~255:1s]

1~255 sec

Range

Default 10

Step

1

Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message ( t2Time Out(t2): 20 Event Perioid: 15 TCP Port No: 2404 [1~255:1s]

Range

1~255 sec

Default 20

Step

1

Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period [IEC60870-5-104] Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10 Time Out(t2): 20 >Event Perioid: 15 TCP Port No: 2404 [0~255:1s]

Range

0~255 sec

Default 15

Step

1sec

Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port [IEC60870-5-104] Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10 Time Out(t2): 20 Event Perioid: 15 >TCP Port: 2404 [1~65535:1]

Range

1~65535

Default 2404

Step

1

Set the TCP/IP Port of EVRC2A-NT for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size [IEC60870-5-104] >Rx Frame Size: 255 Tx Frame Size: 255 SBO Timeout: 5 CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES [0~255:1]

Range

0 ~ 255

Default 255

Step

1

Enter the maximum size of received frame.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size [IEC60870-5-104] >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 SBO Timeout: 5 CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES

Range

0 ~ 255

Default 255

Step

1

Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.

[0~255:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

158

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ SBO Timeout [IEC60870-5-104] Rx Frame Size: 255 Tx Frame Size: 255 >SBO Timeout: 5 CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES

Range

0(OFF), 0~255

Default 5

Step

1sec

Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.

[0(OFF),0~255:1]

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ CMD Termination [IEC60870-5-104] Rx Frame Size: 255 Tx Frame Size: 255 SBO Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES [NO/YES]

Range

NO, YES

Default YES

Step

~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands.

GLOBALSETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ CSE Termination [IEC60870-5-104] Rx Frame Size: 255 Tx Frame Size: 255 SBO Timeout: 5 CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES [NO/YES]

Range

NO, YES

Default YES

Step

~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set point commands.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Clock Sync’Evt [IEC60870-5-104] >CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES MSP Time-Tag: CP56 >MIT Time-Tag: CP56 MME Time-Tag: CP56

Range

NO, YES

Default YES

Step

~

Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events

[NO/YES]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MSPTime-Tag [IEC60870-5-104] >CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES Clock Sync’ Evt:YES >MSP Time-Tag: CP56 MIT Time-Tag: CP56 [CP56/CP24]

Range

CP56, CP24

Default CP56

Step

~

Select whether a time tag format for single-point.  CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.  CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

159

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MIT Time-Tag [IEC60870-5-104] CMD Termination:YES CSE Termination:YES Clock Sync’ Evt:YES MSP Time-Tag: CP56 >MIT Time-Tag: CP56 [CP56/CP24]

CP56, CP24

Range

Default CP56

Step

~

Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.  CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.  CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ MME Time-Tag [IEC60870-5-104] >MME Time-Tag: CP56 >Flt Time-Tag: CP56

CP56, CP24

Range

Default CP56

Step

~

Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized value for general event except for fault current event. [CP56/CP24]

 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.  CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ Flt Time-Tag [IEC60870-5-104] >MME Time-Tag: CP56 >Flt Time-Tag: CP56

CP56, CP24

Range

Default CP56

Step

~

Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals. [CP56/CP24]

 CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a.  CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ k(Max Tx) 1 ~ 32767

[IEC60870-5-104] >MME Time-Tag: CP56 >Flt Time-Tag: CP56 >k(Max Tx): 12 >w(Max Rx): 8

Range

[ 1~32767:1 ]

variable.

Default 12

Step

1

Set the maximum difference receive sequence number to send state

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ IEC60870-5-104/ w(Max Rx) [IEC60870-5-104] >MME Time-Tag: CP56 >Flt Time-Tag: CP56 >k(Max Tx): 12 >w(Max Rx): 8

Range

1 ~ 32767

Default 8

Step

1

Set the atest acknowledge after receiving w I format APDUs. [ 1~32767:1 ]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

160

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

3)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5-104 Common

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL/ IEC608705/ COMMON” to select setting for common requirement of IEC60870-5-101 and IEC60870-5104. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MPS Start [COMMON] >MSP Start: MDP Start: MMENA Start: MMENB Start: MMENC Start:

Range 1000 1500 2000 2500 8000

0 ~ 65535

Default 1000

Step

1

Set the start address of Single-point Information for IEC60870-5101/104 protocol.

[0~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/ COMMON/ MDP Start [COMMON] >MSP Start: >MDP Start: MMENA Start: MMENB Start: MMENC Start:

Range 1000 1500 2000 2500 8000

0 ~ 65535

Default 1500

Step

1

Set the start address of Double-point Information for IEC60870-5101/104 protocol.

[0~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENA Start [COMMON] >MSP Start: MDP Start: >MMENA Start: MMENB Start: MMENC Start:

Range 1000 1500 2000 2500 8000

0 ~ 65535

Default 2000

Step

1

Set the start address of Measured Value, Normalized Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

[0~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENB Start [COMMON] >MSP Start: >MDP Start: MMENA Start: >MMENB Start: MMENC Start: [0~65535:1]

Range 1000 1500 2000 2500 8000

0 ~ 65535

Default 2500

Step

1

Set the start address of Measured Value, Scaled Value for IEC60870-5101/104 protocol.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

161

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMENC Start [COMMON] >MSP Start: MDP Start: MMENA Start: MMENB Start: >MMENC Start:

1000 1500 2000 2500 8000

[0~65535:1]

0 ~ 65535

Range

Default 8000

Step

1

Set the start address of Measured Value, Short Floating Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON/ MMEND Start 0 ~ 65535

[COMMON] >MMEND Start: 6000 MIT Start: 3000 CSC Start: 21000 CDC Start: 32000 CSEMA Start: 26000

Range

[0~65535:1]

Quality Descriptor for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

Default 6000

Step

1

Set the start address of Measured value, Normalized Value without

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / MIT Start 0 ~ 65535

[COMMON] >MMEND Start: 6000 >MIT Start: 3000 CSC Start: 21000 CDC Start: 32000 CSEMA Start: 26000

Range

[0~65535:1]

protocol.

Default 3000

Step

1

Set the start address of Integrated Totals for IEC60870-5-101/104

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5 / COMMON / CSC Start 0 ~ 65535

[COMMON] >MMEND Start: 6000 MIT Start: 3000 >CSC Start: 21000 CDC Start: 32000 CSEMA Start: 26000

Range

[0~65535:1]

protocol.

Default 21000

Step

1

Set the start address of Single Command for IEC60870-5-101/104

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CDC Start 0 ~ 65535

[COMMON] >MMEND Start: 6000 MIT Start: 3000 CSC Start: 21000 >CDC Start: 32000 CSEMA Start: 26000

Range

[0~65535:1]

protocol.

Default 32000

Step

1

Set the start address of Double Command for IEC60870-5-101/104

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

162

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON / CSEMA Start [COMMON] >MIT Start: 3000 CSC Start: 21000 CDC Start: 32000 >CSEMA Start: 26000

Range

0 ~ 65535

Default 26000

Step

1

Set the start address of Set-point Command, Normalized Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

[0~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ CSEMB Start [COMMON] >CSEMB Start: >PMENA Start: >PMENB Start: >PMENC Start:

Range 27000 10000 12000 14000

[0~65535:1]

0 ~ 65535

Default 27000

Step

1

Set the start address of Set-point Command, Scaled Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENA Start [COMMON] >CSEMB Start: 27000 >PMENA Start: 10000 >PMENB Start: 12000 >PMENC Start: 14000 [0~65535:1]

Range

0 ~ 65535

Default 10000

Step

1

Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values, Normalized Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENB Start >CSEMB >PMENA >PMENB >PMENC

[COMMON] Start: Start: Start: Start:

Range 27000 10000 12000 14000

[0~65535:1]

0 ~ 65535

Default 12000

Step

1

Set the start address of Set-point Parameter of Measured Values, Scaled Value for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ PMENC Start >CSEMB >PMENA >PMENB >PMENC

[COMMON] Start: Start: Start: Start:

[0~65535:1]

Range 27000 10000 12000 14000

0 ~ 65535

Default 14000

Step

1

Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

163

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC60870-5/COMMON/ MIT MODE [COMMON] PMENA Start: 10000 PMENB Start: 12000 PMENC Start: 14000 >MIT Mode : MODE B [MODE B/MODE D]

Range

MODE B , MODE D

Default MODE B

Step

-

Set the start address of Parameter of Measured Values, Short Floating Point Number for IEC60870-5-101/104 protocol.

7.2.1.3. MODBUS Protocol Setup Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MODBUS/ Function [MODBUS] >Function: DISABLE Port Select: RS485 Slave Address: 1 TX Delay: 0.05 TCP/UDP Select: TCP

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Port Select [MODBUS] Function: DISABLE >Port Select: RS485 Slave Address: 1 TX Delay: 0.05 TCP/UDP Select: TCP

Range

RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETHERNET

Default RS485

Step

~

Select MODBUS communication port.

[PORT1 – PORT5]

GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ Slave Address [MODBUS] Function: DISABLE Port Select: RS485 >Slave Address: 1 TX Delay: 0.05 TCP/UDP Select: TCP

Range

1 ~ 254

Default 1

Step

1

Enter the slave(EVRC2A-NT) address

[1~254:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

164

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS / TX Delay [MODBUS] Function: DISABLE Port Select: RS485 Slave Address: 1 >TX Delay: 0.05 TCP/UDP Select: TCP

Range

0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec

Default 0.05 sec

Step

0.01

Set TCP port number of EVRC2A-NT.

[0(OFF),0.00~300s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS /TCP/UDP select [MODBUS] Function: DISABLE Port Select: RS485 Slave Address: 1 TX Delay: 0.05 >TCP/UDP Select: TCP

Range

TCP, UDP

Default TCP

Step

1

Select to use between TCP and UDP.

[TCP/UDP]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ TCP Port [MODBUS] >TCP Port: >UDP Port:

Range 502 503

1 ~ 65535

Default 502

Step

1

Enter the Modbus address for TCP Port. [1~65535:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / MODBUS/ UDP Port [MODBUS] TCP Port: >UDP Port:

Range 502 503

1~65535

Default 503

Step

1

Enter the Modbus address for UDP Port. [1~65535:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

165

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.4. IEC61850 Protocol Setup ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the IEC61850 through Ethernet ports(Eth1 or Eth2). Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ IEC61850” to select setting for IEC61850 Protocol. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Function [IEC61850] >Function: DISABLE Goose Msg’: DISABLE

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Select whether to use IEC 61850 Protocol. [DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / IEC61850/ Goose Msg’ [IEC61850] >Function: DISABLE >Goose Msg’: DISABLE

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Select whether to use GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Event).

7.2.1.5. SNTP Protocol Setup ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the SNTP through Ethernet ports. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNTP” to select setting for SNTP Protocol. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP/ Function [SNTP] >Function: DISABLE T-S Period: 3600 SNTP IP 1: 0 SNTP IP 2: 0 SNTP IP 3: 0

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Select whether to use SNTP Protocol for Time Synchronization.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

166

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP / T-S Period [SNTP] Function: DISABLE >T-S Period: 3600 SNTP IP 1: 0 SNTP IP 2: 0 SNTP IP 3: 0 [0~60000:1s]

Range

1~60000

Default 3600

Step

1

Enter the time period for requesting time synchronization with the time server.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNTP / SNTP IP 1 ~4 [SNTP] Function: DISABLE T-S Period: 3600 >SNTP IP 1: 0 SNTP IP 2: 0 SNTP IP 3: 0 [0~255:1]

Range

0~255

Default 0

Step

1

Enter the IP Address 1 for SNTP server.

7.2.1.6. SNMP Protocol Setup ETMFC610 can be programmed for communication using the SNMP through Ethernet ports. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ SNMP” to select setting for SNMP Protocol. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Function [SNMP] >Function: DISABLE Accept PW: 00000000

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE / ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether SNMP Protocol Function is used or not. This setting supports SNMPv2c, SNMPv3.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS / SNMP/ Accept PW [SNMP] Function: DISABLE >Accept PW: 00000000

Range

0~z

Default 0

Step

~

Set the accept password of SNMP Protocol for SNMPv3, only. [0~Z]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

167

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.7. ETIMS Protocol Setup ETMFC610 can be setup for communication with interface software ETIMS through Serial ports(RS232-1 or RS232-2) or Ethernet ports. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ ETIMS”. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ TCP Port No [ETIMS] >TCP Port No: 30000 Serial Func: OFF Serial Port:RS232-1

Range

30000 ~ 40000

Default 30000

Step

1

Set the number of TCP Port for ETIMS Interface Software. [30000~40000:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ Serial Func [ETIMS] TCP Port No: 30000 >Serial Func: OFF Serial Port:RS232-1

Range

OFF, ON

Default ON

Step

~

Set whether to use ETIMS through serial port. [OFF/ON]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ ETIMS/ Serial port [ETIMS] TCP Port No: 30000 Serial Func: OFF >Serial Port:RS232-1

Range

RS232-1, RS232-2

Default RS232-1

Step

~

Select Serial Communication Port for ETIMS [RS232-1/RS232-2]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

168

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.1.8. Multi-Bit Protocol Multi-Bit communication protocol is a protocol used for Peer-to-Peer communication between the EVRC2A-NT. The exchange of digital information between the EVRC2A-NT (Fault event information and interlock information, Open/Close status information, etc.) makes it possible in real time to apply an advanced protection coordination such as isolation of the fault section and self-healing. EVRC2A-NT has two Multi-Bit Protocol (Multi-Bit A and Multi-Bit-B) in order to transmit and receive individually with Upstream and Downstream device. Multi-Bit communication protocol is transmitted and received continuously in real-time messages in each predetermined period, and transmits the message according to a communication transmission period setting. Features of the Multi-Bit communication protocol 

CRC checking, ID checking, status checking and debounce check of each bit through step-bystep to increase accuracy.



It makes distinguish communication error types and configure the corresponding methods and procedures of the respective error.



It can be checked correctly communication status through communication status test which uses communication data frame.

1)

Communication Connection

The EVRC2A-NT can accept Multi-Bit Protocol Communication with the maximum two EVRC2A-NT through two Multi-Bit Protocol(Multi-Bit A and Multi-Bit B). Each Multi-Bit Protocol is exchanging in real time Receiving Date 8 bit and Transmitting Date 8 bit with connected EVRC2A-NT. Each Multi-Bit Protocol can select transmitted ID(Tx ID) and the received ID(Rx ID). Tx ID must be same to the peer Rx ID, Rx ID must be same to the peer Tx ID. It will be detected correct communication connection through Tx ID and Rx ID.

*. Rx : Receiving Data (8 bit), Tx : Transmitting Data (8 bit) Figure 7-22. Multi-Bit Communication Protocol Communication Connection

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

169

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

For example, in Figure 7-22, EVRC2A-NT #2 can communicate with EVRC2A-NT #1 using Multi-Bit A protocol, and can communicate with EVRC2A-NT #3 using Multi-Bit B protocol. (EVRC2A-NT #1 can communicate using Multi-Bit A protocol, EVRC2A-NT #3 uses Mult-Bit B protocol) It means that, Mult-Bit A protocol’s Rx ID on EVRC2A-NT #1 and Mult-Bit A protocol’s Tx ID on EVRC2A-NT #2 must be same, Tx ID and Rx ID have to be equal. Rx ID and Tx ID of Multi-Bit B protocol on EVRC2A-NT #2 have to be same to the peer things. The Multi-Bit Protocol checks whether there is communication error by checking error such as CRC error, ID error and reception error on received data. If a communication error is detected, the received data is ignored. If the received data is recovered to normal, data transmission / reception proceeds normally. When occurring CRC error, ID error and reception error, EVRC2A-NT records the event and supports the corresponding BI point, so that the master station can monitor the information by remote communication.

2)

PLC Configuration Example

The logic names for 8 bits of reception data and 8 bits of transmit data of Multi-Bit Protocol are as follows. Each bit of data is recorded as an event when set ('1') and clear ('0'), and BI point is supported for each data bit, so that information about each bit state can be transmitted to the master station by remote communication. 



Multi-Bit A Protocol 

Reception bit name : RMBA01 ~ RMBA08



Transmission bit name : TMBA01 ~ TMBA08

Multi-Bit B Protocol 

Reception bit name : RMBB01 ~ RMBB08



Transmission bit name : TMBB01 ~ TMBB08

Reception Data PLC Configuration All the reception data logic can be used as input elements of PLC equation. Please configure reception data logic on PLC equation which will be applied by user. For example, when Multi-Bit A Protocol’s reception bit 01(RMBA01) is set(‘1’), if open operation is required, please put ‘RMBA01’ logic on External Trip Command(EOPEXT) logic. EOPEXT = RMBA01

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

170

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Transmission Data PLC Configuration All transmission data has PLC equation logic, so the user can configure the data state to send. For example, if recloser closing status(CLST) wants to be sent to Multi-Bit A Protocol’s transmission bit 01(TMBA01), please put ‘CLST’ on TMBA01 logic. When Recloser is on closing status, transmission bit 01 is set(‘1’) and sent. TMBA01 = CLST

Figure 7-23. PLC Edit Screen

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

171

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

3)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Multi-Bit Protocol Setup

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTIBIT /MULTI-BIT A or MULTI-BIT B” to select setting for Multi-Bit Protocol. Setting items of “MULT-BIT A” and “MULTI-BIT B” menu are same as following; GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Function [MULTI-BIT A] >Function: DISABLE Port Select:RS232-1 TX ID: 1 RX ID: 2 Comm.Period: 50

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

To use Multi-Bit protocol, set ENABLE.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Port Select [MULTI-BIT A] >Function: DISABLE >Port Select:RS232-1 TX ID: 1 RX ID: 2 Comm.Period: 50

Range

RS232-1, RS232-2, RS485, ETH1, ETH2

Default RS232-1

Step

~

Select Multi-Bit procotol communication port.

[RS232/RS485/ETH]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Tx ID [MULTI-BIT A] >Function: DISABLE >Port Select:RS232-1 >TX ID: 1 RX ID: 2 Comm.Period: 50 [1~8 : 1]

Range

1~8

Default 1

Step

~

Set the transmission ID. It should be the same as reception ID of the other party.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Rx ID [MULTI-BIT A] >Function: DISABLE >Port Select:RS232-1 >TX ID: 1 >RX ID: 2 Comm.Period: 50 [1~8 : 1]

Range

1~8

Default 1

Step

~

Set the reception ID. It should be the same as the transmission ID of the other party.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

172

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Comm.Period [MULTI-BIT A] >Function: DISABLE >Port Select:RS232-1 >TX ID: 1 >RX ID: 2 >Comm.Period: 50

Range

10 ~ 60000 msec

Default 1

Step

50 msec

Set Multi-Bit protocol communication cycle(period). It should be the same as the other party communication cycle(period).

[ 10~60000: 1 ms]

When the serial communication port is used, the communication cycle is restricted according to the communication baud rate as follows.  For 1200 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 100 ms.  For 2400 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 50 ms.  For 4800 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 25 ms.  For 9600 bps, the communication cycle must be at least 12.5 ms.  For 19200~115200 bps, no restrictions. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / TCP/UDP Select [MULTI-BIT A] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP TCP Port: 21000 UDP Port: 21001 >M/S Mode: SLAVE >Link IP Oct1: 0

Range

TCP, UDP

Default TCP

Step

~

Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Ethernet port.

[TCP/UDP]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / TCP Port [MULTI-BIT A] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 21000 UDP Port: 21001 >M/S Mode: SLAVE >Link IP Oct1: 0

Range

1 ~ 65535

Default 2100

Step

1

Set the TCP/IP Port number at the use of TCP communication.

[ 1~65535:1 ]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / UDP Port [MULTI-BIT A] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 21000 >UDP Port: 21001 >M/S Mode: SLAVE >Link IP Oct1: 0

Range

1 ~ 65535

Default 2101

Step

1

Set the UDP Port number at the use of UDP communication.

[ 1~65535:1]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

173

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / M/S Mode [MULTI-BIT A] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 21000 >UDP Port: 21001 >M/S Mode: SLAVE >Link IP Oct1: 0

SLAVE, MASTER

Range

Default SLAVE

Step

~

When using TCP or RS485 communication, select Slave or Master mode.

[ SLAVE/MASTER ]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Link IP Oct 1~4 [MULTI-BIT A] >Link IP Oct1: 0 >Link IP Oct2: 0 >Link IP Oct3: 0 >Link IP Oct4: 0 >Link Timeout: 15 [ 0~255: 1 ]

0 ~ 255

Range

Default 0

Step

1

Set other party IP address at the use of Ethernet port. IP Address : xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx ① ②

③ ④

Link IP Oct 1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Link Timeout [MULTI-BIT A] >Link IP Oct1: 0 >Link IP Oct2: 0 >Link IP Oct3: 0 >Link IP Oct4: 0 >Link Timeout: 15 [ 1~60000: 1 ms ]

1 ~ 60000 msec

Range

Default 15

Step

1 msec

On Ethernet communication, set the communication link timout time. If communication link is not established during the set time, it is determined that the communication is disconnected.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / RMB Debounce [MULTI-BIT A] >Link Timeout: >RMB Debounce: >ID Error Cnt: >CRC Error Cnt: >Rx Error Cnt:

1 ~ 100

Range 15 10 10 10 10

[ 1~100: 1 ]

Default 10

Step

1

Set pickup and dropout debounce count of the reception bit.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / ID Error Cnt [MULTI-BIT A] >Link Timeout: >RMB Debounce: >ID Error Cnt: >CRC Error Cnt: >Rx Error Cnt: [ 1~100: 1 ]

1 ~ 100

Range 15 10 10 10 10

Default 10

Step

1

Set the ID Error Count. If ID is received by this count, it is detected as ID Error.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

174

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / CRC Error Cnt [MULTI-BIT A] >Link Timeout: >RMB Debounce: >ID Error Cnt: >CRC Error Cnt: >Rx Error Cnt:

Range 15 10 10 10 10

1 ~ 100

Default 10

Step

1

Set the CRC Error Count. If CRC error is received by this count, it is detected as CRC error.

[ 1~100: 1 ]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOLS/ MULTI-BIT / Rx Error Cnt [MULTI-BIT A] >Link Timeout: >RMB Debounce: >ID Error Cnt: >CRC Error Cnt: >Rx Error Cnt: [ 1~100: 1 ]

Range 15 10 10 10 10

1 ~ 100

Default 10

Step

1

Set the Reception Error Count. If the received data is equal to this count, it is detected as reception error.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

175

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.2. Port Setup Place the curser on “PORT SETUP” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. EVRC2A-NT communication port and related elements are set in this menu and it has sub-menu as below.

[PORT SETUP] >1.RS232-1 2.RS232-2 3.RS485 4.ETHERNET

7.2.2.1. RS232-1 and RS232-2 Ports Setup EVRC2A-NT side panel RS232-1 and RS232-2 ports and related elements are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS232-1” to select setting for RS232-1 port. Also, settings for RS232-2 port are same as below. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS232-1/ Baud Rate [RS232-1] >Baud Rate: 9600 Parity Bit: NONE Data Bit: 8 Stop Bit: 1 Modem Sel: 4W

Range

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps

Default 9600

Step

~

Select the baud rate for RS232-1 port.

[1200 ~ 115200 bps]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Parity Bit [RS232-1] >Baud Rate: 9600 >Parity Bit: NONE Data Bit: 8 Stop Bit: 1 Modem Sel: 4W

Range

NONE, ODD, EVEN

Default NONE

Step

~

Select whether to use Parity Bit.

[NONE/ODD/EVEN]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

176

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Data Bit [RS232-1] >Baud Rate: 9600 Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 Stop Bit: 1 Modem Sel: 4W

Range

7, 8

Default 8

Step

1

Select the Data Bit.

[7~8:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Stop Bit [RS232-1] >Baud Rate: 9600 Parity Bit: NONE Data Bit: 8 >Stop Bit: 1 Modem Sel: 4W

Range

1, 2

Default 1

Step

1

Select the Stop Bit.

[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ Modem Sel [RS232-1] >Baud Rate: 9600 Parity Bit: NONE Data Bit: 8 >Stop Bit: 1 >Modem Sel: 4W [2W/4W/DIAL/NONE]

Range

2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE

Default 4W

Step

~

Select a modem for communication.  2W : 2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).  4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.  DIAL : Dial-Up1 modem is used.  NONE : Not used.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ CTS Usage >CTS >DCD >RTS >CTS >DCD

[RS232-1] Usage: ENABLE Usage: DISABLE Usage: AUTO CheckOut: 2 CheckOut: 5000

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Select whether to use CTS signal or not.  ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming CTS signal is Asserted.  DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of CTS signal.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

177

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ DCD Usage >CTS >DCD >RTS >CTS >DCD

[RS232-1] Usage: ENABLE Usage: DISABLE Usage: AUTO CheckOut: 2 CheckOut: 5000

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether to use DCD signal.  ENABLE : Data is transferred after confirming DCD signal is Deasserted.  DISABLE : Data is transferred regardless of DCD signal

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ RTS Usage >CTS >DCD >RTS >CTS >DCD

[RS232-1] Usage: ENABLE Usage: DISABLE Usage: AUTO CheckOut: 2 CheckOut: 5000

[OFF/ON/AUTO]

Range

OFF, ON, AUTO

Default AUTO

Step

~

 ON : RTS signal of EVRC2A-NT is always ON(Assert).  OFF : RTS signal of EVRC2A-NT is always OFF(Deassert).  AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of EVRC2A-NT is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of EVRC2A-NT is off.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ CTS CheckOut >CTS >DCD >RTS >CTS >DCD

[RS232-1] Usage: ENABLE Usage: DISABLE Usage: AUTO CheckOut: 2 CheckOut: 5000

[1~255:1s]

Range

1 ~ 255 sec

Default 2

Step

1 sec

Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal which informs that ETMFC610 is ready to transfer a data. If there is no CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not transfer the data. It is available if ‘CTS Usage’ setting is ON.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ DCD BackOffDly >CTS >DCD >RTS >CTS >DCD

[RS232-1] Usage: ENABLE Usage: DISABLE Usage: AUTO CheckOut: 2 BackOffDly:5000

[10~30000:10ms]

Range

10 ~ 30000 msec

Default 5000

Step

10 msec

Set a delay time of DCD signal checks which determine modem status before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set time, if DCD signal is ON, EVRC2A-NT does not transfer the data and treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if ‘DCD Usage’ setting is ON.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

178

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ TX PreDelay [RS232-1] >TX PreDelay: >TX PostDelay: >BackOffRandom:

Range 50 10 OFF

0 ~ 20000 msec

Default 50

Step

1 msec

Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished. [0~20000:1ms]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ TX PostDelay [RS232-1] >TX PreDelay: >TX PostDelay: >BackOffRandom:

Range 50 10 OFF

0 ~ 20000 msec

Default 10

Step

1 msec

Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished. [0~20000:1ms]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS232-1/ BackOffRandom [RS232-1] TX PreDelay: TX PostDelay: >BackOffRandom:

Range 10 50 OFF

0(OFF) 1~ 65535 msec

Default OFF

Step

1 msec

Set random back off time. [0(OFF),1~65535:1ms]

7.2.2.2. RS485 Port Setup Related elements with RS485 port in side panel of EVRC2A-NT are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ RS485” to select setting for RS485 port. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Baud Rate [RS485] >Baud Rate: Parity Bit: Data Bit: Stop Bit: CA Delay:

Range 9600 NONE 8 1 1.00

[1200 ~ 115200 bps]

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps

Default 9600

Step

~

Select the baud rate for RS485 port.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

179

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Parity Bit [RS485] >Baud Rate: >Parity Bit: Data Bit: Stop Bit: CA Delay:

Range 9600 NONE 8 1 1.00

NONE, ODD, EVEN

Default NONE

Step

~

Set whether to use Parity Bit, and set a type.

[NONE/ODD/EVEN]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Data Bit [RS485] >Baud Rate: Parity Bit: >Data Bit: Stop Bit: CA Delay:

Range 9600 NONE 8 1 1.00

7, 8

Default 8

Step

1

Select the Data Bit.

[7~8:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ Stop Bit [RS485] >Baud Rate: Parity Bit: Data Bit: >Stop Bit: CA Delay:

Range 9600 NONE 8 1 1.00

1, 2

Default 1

Step

1

Select the Stop Bit.

[1~2:1]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / RS485/ CA Delay [RS485] >Baud Rate: >Parity Bit: Data Bit: Stop Bit: >CA Delay:

Range 9600 NONE 8 1 1.00

0.00 ~ 240.00

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set a delay time from data reced till transferring a reply data.

[0.00~240.00:0.01]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

180

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.2.3. EHTERNET Ports Setup Related elements with Eth1 and Eth2 ports in side panel of EVRC2A-NT are set Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS/ ETHERNET” to select setting. Eth1 and Eth2 ports are applied with the same settings as below. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4 [ETHERNET] >IP Addr Oct1: IP Addr Oct2: IP Addr Oct3: >IP Addr Oct4: >Gateway Oct1:

Range 0 0 0 0 0

0 ~ 255

Default 0*

Step

1

Select the IP Address for ETMFC610 ethernet port. IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx ② ②

[0~255:1]

③ ④

IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④ NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4 [ETHERNET] >Gateway Oct1: Gateway Oct2: Gateway Oct3: >Gateway Oct4:

Range 0 0 0 0

0 ~ 255

Default 0*

Step

1

Select the Gateway Address. Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx ① ②

[0~255:1]

③ ④

Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④ NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ Subnet Mask Oct1 ~ 4 [ETHERNET] >SubnetMask Oct1: SubnetMask Oct2: >SubnetMask Oct3: >SubnetMask Oct4:

Range 0 0 0 0

0 ~ 255

Default 0*

Step

1

Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETMFC610 ethernet port. Subnet Mask Address : 255.xxx.xxx.xxx

[0~255:1]

① ②

③ ④

Subnet Mask Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④ NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to the option type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

181

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Function [ETHERNET] >K-Alv Func: ENABLE >K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 K-Alv Interval: 2 >K-Alv Retry: 3 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Select whether to use or not the Ethernet communication connecting status check function.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Idle Time [ETHERNET] >K-Alv Func: ENABLE >K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 K-Alv Interval: 2 >K-Alv Retry: 3 [0(OFF),1~600:1s]

Range

0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec

Default 4

Step

1sec

If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the communication connecting maintainance status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Interval [ETHERNET] >K-Alv Func: ENABLE >K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 >K-Alv Interval: 2 >K-Alv Retry: 3 [0(OFF),1~600:1s]

Range

0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec

Default 2

Step

1sec

After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any reply during the setting time, check again the status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORTS / EHTERNET/ K-Alv Retry [ETHERNET] >K-Alv Func: ENABLE >K-Alv Idle T: 4.00 K-Alv Interval: 2 >K-Alv Retry: 3

Range

0~255

Default 3

Step

1

Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail

[0~255:1]

and close the communication connection.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

182

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.3. RTU Communication (Dialup Modem) Setup EVRC2A-NT can support dial-up modem communication, Hayes-compatible, through RS232-1 port and RS232-2 when their port types are both RS232.

7.2.3.1. Configure modem with AT commands Before using Modem connected with EVRC2A-NT, following setting shall be confirmed. Configure port speed(must be done) Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between EVRC2A-NT and Modem, and set DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems. Configure answer mode(frequently) The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2. Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done) Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem. The AT command is AT&C1. Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done) Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high, the modem is ready to receive calls. If DTR is low, the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any existing call. The AT command is AT&D2. Configure Data Set Ready(must be done) Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON. The AT command is AT&S0. Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done) A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received. For example:

CONNECT 9600 The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages. The AT command is ATQ1. There will be no OK printed in response to this command.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

183

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Configure no echo of commands(must be done) Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing. The AT command is ATE0. Configure silent connection(must be done) Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for a dialing modem, as it prevents a human being accidentally repeatedly called. The speaker can be annoying on answering modems. The AT command is ATM1.

7.2.3.2. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem Transmitting a Communication Packet 

Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)



The Communication packet is transmitted

※. Dial when DCD is Deassert

Receiving a Communication Packet 

Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)



The Communication packet is received

※. if DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.

Dialing 

The user should insert an order for Reset.



Wait 0.5 second



Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number.



Checks DCD is Asserted

※. Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

184

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Hang up 

DTR Line is deasserted



Wait 2 second



DTR Line is asserted



Wait 2 second

※. EVRC2A-NT will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received or transmitted.

7.2.3.3. Dialup Modem Setup Place the curser on “DIALUP MODEM” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

[DIALUP MODEM] >1.CALLING STRING 2.CALLING NUMBER 3.INITIAL STRING 4.CONNECTION

The settings for the dialup modem are shown below; 1)

Calling String

In order to set “Calling String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ CALLING STRING” GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING STRING [CALLING STRING] >CS: ATD

Range

ATD, ATDT, ATDP

Default ATD

Step

~

Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them. [! ~ z]

 ATD : Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)  ATDT : Tone Dial  ATDP : Pulse Dial

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

185

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

2)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Calling Number

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER” GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER [CALLING NUMBER] >CN:0123456789XXXXXX

Range

~

Default ~

Step

~

Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number]. Total 16 digits shall be used from the first digit space and empty space [! ~ z]

3)

shall be filled up by ‘X’.

Initial String

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM / INITIAL STRING” GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ INITIAL STRING [INITIAL STRING] >IS: AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0 &D2 +CRM=129

[space ~ z]

Range Default

~ AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0 &D2 +CRM=129

Step

~

Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number, character, space or special character. ETMFC610 should be reset before making a phone call(connection). NOTE : Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

186

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

4)

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Connection

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIAL MODEM/ CONNECTION” GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Cmd Res’ TO [CONNECTION] >Cmd Res’ TO: Connect TO: Idle Time:

Range 2 30 60

[0~255:1s]

0 ~ 255 sec

Default 2

Step

1 sec

Setting the Command response waiting time. If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the status of modem failure is maintained.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Connect TO [CONNECTION] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 >Connect TO: 30 Idle Time: 60

[0~255:1s]

Range

0 ~ 255 sec

Default 30

Step

1 sec

Setting the Modem connection waiting time. If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a connection failure as the status of modem failure is maintained for the setting time

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Idle Time [CONNECTION] Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60

[0~255:1s]

Range

0 ~ 255 sec

Default 60

Step

1 sec

Setting the Command response waiting time. If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the status of modem failure is maintained.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

187

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.4. FTP-SSL Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL to file transfer in order to configure protocol SSL. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL / Function [FTP-SSL] >Function: DISABLE Admin PW: 00000000 User1 PW: 00000000

DISABLE / ENABLE

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

-

Set whether FTP-SSL Fucntion is used or not. [0~255:1s]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/FTP-SSL/Admin PW [FTP-SSL] Function: DISABLE >Admin PW: 00000000 User1 PW: 00000000

[0~z]

0~z

Range

Default 0

Step

~

Set the administer password for FTP-SSL. Administer’s log-in account name is ‘entec_admin’ with read and write authority.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP-SSL/User1 PW [FTP-SSL] Function: DISABLE Admin PW: 00000000 >User1 PW: 00000000

Range

0~z

Default 0

Step

~

Set the user password for FTP-SSL. [0~z]

User 1’s log-in account name is ‘entec_user1’with read-only authority.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

188

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.5. Wifi Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI” to set related Wifi. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/WiFi SSID [WIFI] >WiFi SSID:00000000 WiFi P/W: 00000000 SSID Hidden: ON

Range

0~z

Default Lower 8 digits of Serial Step

~

Number

[0~z]

Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wifi for Wifi access.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ WiFi P/W [WIFI] WiFi SSID:00000000 >WiFi P/W: 00000000 SSID Hidden: ON

Range

0~z

Default ab3456dc

Step

~

For wifi access, set WIFI password. [0~z]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/ SSID Hidden [WIFI] WiFi SSID:00000000 WiFi P/W: 00000000 >SSID Hidden: ON

Range

OFF, ON

Default ON

Step

~

For selecting whether WIFI SSID is visible or not [0~z]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

189

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

7.2.6. Event & Etc Setup Place the curser on “EVENT&ETC” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, sets the items used in common among EVRC2A-NT communication protocol setting items. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP” to select setting for EVENT&ETC SETUP. GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Method [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AEvt Method: OFF AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Daily Max I:DISABLE Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT BI EvtBuff Size:256 [OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]

Range

OFF, TH, DB, BOTH

Default OFF

Step

~

This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event Active: in DNP point map.  OFF : AI point event is not occurred.  TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than Threshold value.  DB : AEvent is occurred when the AI data change value is over the Deadband value  BOTH : TH and DB all used.  Use EVRC2A-NT interface program to setting the “Event Active” activation or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and Deadband value.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AEvt Skip at Ft [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AEvt Method: OFF >AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Daily Max I:DISABLE Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT BI EvtBuff Size:256 [NO/YES]

Range

NO, YES

Default NO

Step

~

Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated during Fault pickup.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

190

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Daily Max I [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AEvt Method: OFF AEvt Skip at Ft: NO >Daily Max I:DISABLE Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT BI EvtBuff Size:256 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Select the [DISABLE/ENABLE] of Daily Maximum Load Current transmission.  DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event..  ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Flt ‘I’ Evt [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AEvt Method: OFF AEvt Skip at Ft: NO >Daily Max I:DISABLE >Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT BI EvtBuff Size:256 [NO/YES/1SHOT]

Range

NO, YES, 1SHOT

Default 1SHOT

Step

~

When occurring fault, set whether or not record AI point which is related with fault such as fault current.  NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event.  YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event.  1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence to Event. NOTE : The Fault Current occurrence time of each Sequence is when it becomes no voltage after experience the Fault Current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI EvtBuff Size [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AEvt Method: OFF AEvt Skip at Ft: NO Daily Max I:DISABLE >Flt ‘I’ Evt: 1SHOT >BI EvtBuff Size:256

Range

32, 64, 128, 256

Default 256

Step

~

Set the Binary Queue Size

[32/64/128/256]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

191

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI EvtBuff Size [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI EvtBuff Size:256 CI EvtBuff Size:256 BI Evt Method: ALL AI Evt Method: ALL >CI Evt Method: ALL

Range

32, 64, 128, 256

Default 256

Step

~

Set the Binary Queue Size

>[32/64/128/256]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/EVENT&ETC/ CI EvtBuff Size [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI EvtBuff Size:256 >CI EvtBuff Size:256 BI Evt Method: ALL AI Evt Method: ALL CI Evt Method: ALL [32/64/128/256]

Range

32, 64, 128, 256

Default 256

Step

~

Set the binary event mode.  ALL : all status is buffed for same point.  LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Method [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI EvtBuff Size:256 CI EvtBuff Size:256 >BI Evt Method: ALL AI Evt Method: ALL CI Evt Method: ALL [ALL/LAST]

Range

ALL, LAST

Default ALL

Step

~

Set the analog event mode.  ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.  LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Evt Method [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI EvtBuff Size:256 CI EvtBuff Size:256 BI Evt Method: ALL >AI Evt Method: ALL CI Evt Method: ALL [ALL/LAST]

Range

ALL, LAST

Default ALL

Step

~

Set the analog event mode.  ALL : all analog is buffed for same point.  LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

192

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Method [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI EvtBuff Size:256 CI EvtBuff Size:256 >BI Evt Method: ALL AI Evt Method: ALL >CI Evt Method: ALL [ALL/LAST]

Range

ALL, LAST

Default ALL

Step

~

Set the counter event mode.  ALL : all counter is buffed for same point.  LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / DO Cmd at Local [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI Evt Method: ALL >CI Evt Method: ALL >DO Cmd at Local:OFF >Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL >Time Tag Type:LOCAL

Range

OFF,ON

Default OFF

Step

~

Set whether or not to control DO command on local control status.

[ALL/LAST]

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Syn’ Ref [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI Evt Method: ALL >CI Evt Method: ALL >DO Cmd at Local:OFF >Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL >Time Tag Type:LOCAL [LOCAL/GMT]

Range

LOCAL,GMT

Default LOCAL

Step

~

Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time Synching with the master station. NOTE : This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated with UTC(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the time internal clock in EVRC2A-NT can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

193

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Time Tag Type [EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI Evt Method: ALL >CI Evt Method: ALL >DO Cmd at Local:OFF >Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL >Time Tag Type:LOCAL

Range

LOCAL,GMT

Default LOCAL

Step

~

Set the time type for occurred events in Communication.

[LOCAL/GMT]

NOTE : This setting is set to be UTC and the setting values associated with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the time of event transmitted is not correct.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Frz Period [COMMON] CI Evt Method: ALL DO Cmd at Local:OFF Time Syn’ Ref:LOCAL Time Tag Type:LOCAL >CI Frz Period: OFF [0(OFF),0~60000:1m]

Range

0(OFF), 0~60000m

Default OFF

Step

1minute

Set freeze period of CI points.

7.2.7. Save Setting This menu allows you to save the changed settings of the GENERAL menu. The procedure for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

194

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8. GROUP SETTING Place the curser on “GROUP SETTING” in MAIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. [GROUP SETTING] >1.GROUP 1 2.GROUP 2 3.GROUP 3 4.GROUP 4 5.GROUP 5 6.GROUP 6

The GROUP SETTING menu has six identical subgroup settings. The setting group which is turned on "SET GROUP" LED is applied to the EVRC2A-NT. The [GROUP SELECT] button is used to select a set group applied to present EVRC2A-NT. Please refer to the explanation of “GROUP SELECT” button in “6.1.2. Local Control Section” for procedure of changing the set group locally. NOTE : If ‘LOOP CONTROL’ function is activated, selected group is not changed to press the [GROUP SELEC] button.

[GROUP 1] >1.RECLOSER 2.SECTIONALIZER 3.MONITORING *.SAVE SETTING

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value saved message’. All set groups have the same submenus. Each set group is classified into RECLOSER, SECTIONALIZER and MONITORING sub menus. When set to "RECLOSER" type in “MAIN MENU / GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / CONTROL TYPE”, only "RECLOSER" and "MONITORING" menus are operated ("SECTIONALIZER" menu is not operated). When set to "SECTIONALIZER" type, only "SECTIONALIZER" and "MONITORING" menus are operated ("RECLOSER" menu is not operated).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

195

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1. Recloser Place the curser on “RECLOSER” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu sets the protection elements that operate when the recloser control type is set.

[RECLOSER] >1.AUTO RECLOSING >2.TIME OC-PHA 3.TIME OC-GND 4.TIME OC-NEQ 5.INST OC-PHA 6.INST OC-GND 7.INST OC-SEF 8.INST OC-NEQ 9.INST OCL-PHA 10.INST OCL-GND 11.INST OCL-NEQ 12.INRUSH RES’/CLPU 13.HARMONIC BLOCK 14.DIRECTION 15.BROKEN CONDUCT 16.VOLTAGE 17.FREQUENCY 18.POWER 19.DEMAND 20.Z0 ADMITANCE 21.HOTLINE TAG 22.USER CURVE 23.OTHERS

Protection Elements - ANSI Designations In case of Recloser control type, the protection elements are as follows; Table 8-1. Protection Elements -ANSI Designations(1/2) ANSI Designations

Protective Elements Five shot auto reclosing

79

LCD Menu GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER /AUTO RECLOSING

Phase fast/delay time overcurrent

51P-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA

Ground fast/delay time overcurrent

51G-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-GND

51Q(46)-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ

Phase instantaneous overcurrent

50P-1

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA

Ground instantaneous overcurrent

50G-1

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND

Sensitive Earth Fault protection

50SG

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC-SEF

50Q(46)-1

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INST OC -NEQ

Phase instantaneous lockout overcurrent

50P-2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC-PHA

Ground instantaneous lockout overcurrent

50G-2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC-GND

50Q(46)-2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INSTL OC -NEQ

Negative squence fast/delay time overcurrent

Negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent

Negative sequence instantaneous lockout overcurrent

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

196

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 8-1. Protection Elements -ANSI Designations(2/2) Protective Elements

ANSI

LCD Menu

Designations

Inrush restraint

CLPU-1

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT

Cold load pickup

CLPU-2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP

2nd Harmonic Block

2HB

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCK

5th Harmonic Block

5HB

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HARMONIC BLOCK / 5TH BLOCK

Phase directional time control

67P

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE

Ground directional time control

67G

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND

Sensitive Earth Fault directional time control

67SG

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / SEF

Negative sequence directional time control

67Q

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ

Broken conduct

46BC

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT

Under voltage 1/2

27-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1,2

27R

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTROATION

59-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1,2

Neutral over voltage 1/2

64N-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE 1,2

Over voltage restoration

59R

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTROATION

Under frequency 1/2

81U-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/ UNDER FREQUENCY 1, 2

Over frequency1/2

81O-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/ OVER FREQUENCY 1,2

Frequency decay 1/2

81D-1,2

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/ FREQUENCY DECAY 1,2

Frequency restoration

81R

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY/ FREQUENCY RESTROATION

Forward power

32FP

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD POWER

Direction power

32P

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER

Phase demand current

49P

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE

Ground demand current

49G

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / GROUND

Negative sequence demand current

49Q

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / NEG SEQ’

Active demand power

49W

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / ACTIVE POWER

Reactive demand power

49V

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / DEMAND / REACTIVE POWER

Under voltage restoration Over voltage 1/2

Z0 admitance

21YN

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITANCE

Hotline tag

-

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / HOTLINE TAG

Sequence coordination

-

GROUP SETTING / ... / RECLOSER / OTHERS / Seq’ Coordi’

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

197

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Protection Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations

SOURCE

EVRC2A-NT Controller

46BC

OPTION

51Q

50Q

1,2

1,2

Isef

49Q

50SG

ZCT 3I0

21YN In

51G

50G

1,2

1,2

51P

50P

1,2

1,2

32P

49W

32FP

49V

49G

67SG In

CT 3WYE

Ia, Ib, Ic

Calc. I1

Calc. I2

Calc. 3I0

67P

67Q

67G

Calc. V1

Calc. V2

Calc. 3V0

Calc. Pow'

27

59

1,2

1,2

2HB

49P

5HB

81 O/U/D 1,2

3VD

64N 1,2

27R

52

59R

81R

CLPU 1,2

79

3VD

*. NOTE )

LOAD

: Overcurrent elements

Figure 8-1. Protection Elements Block Diagram All overcurrent protection function consist of dual-elements ((+) and (-)) of individual operations. It can be operated in several ways depending on the configuration of the line system and the user's request. Several application example of dual overcurrent protection elements are as follows;

1)

Ring Line System Application

By using directional elements and dual overccurent protection elements ((+) and (-)), it is possible to protect simultaneously both sides of the source line on ring line system operation. After setting the directional type as forward, when using the dual-elements (function is set to ENABLE), The (+) element does fault protection about the forward direction and the (-) element does the fault protection about the reverse direction. The (+) element operates as the setting type of the directional element, and the (-) element operates as the opposite direction to the setting type of the directional element. If the type of the directional

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

198

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

element is set as NONE, the (+) and (-) elements operate simultaneously regardless of the direction of the fault.

Figure 8-2. Ring Line System Application

2)

Radial Line System Application

When working in a radial line system, the directional element does not work and only one of the (+) or (-) elements is used. ((+) element is recommended)

Figure 8-3. Radial Line System Application

3)

Overcurrent Alarm elements Application

In the case of time overcurrent function, each element can be used for trip or alarm purposes. Thus, one of the dual overcurrent protection elements can be operated as the trip element and another one is operated as the alarm element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

199

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.1. Auto Reclosing (79) EVRC2A-NT provides Auto Reclosing (79) when a system failure of the line occurs which interrupts the system at high speed and automatically recloses after a certain period of time passes after interruption. When it is a temporay fault due to contact of external object, lightning, or loss of insulation, the system will automatically reclose after high speed interruption, resulting in minimization of failure range and power outage period. Auto Reclosing function is applied when fault current is larger than the fault pickup current, the system will repeat trip and reclosing according to the sequence. Then, it will be LOCKOUT or return to the normal sequence status after AUTO Reset TIME. The sequence of Auto Reclosing consists of ‘Reset’, ‘Cycle’ and ‘Lockout’.

Figure 8-4. Protection Elements Block Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

200

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) LOCKOUT In the situations stated below, the Lockout occurs. In the Lockout state, the system doesn’t reclose automatically, so the user should close Recloser(or CB) manually at the site or remotely. •

In case when the failure occurs continuously and the recloser(or CB) has repeated trip for the number of times set previously. (Permanent failure)

•

When the user opens the recloser(or CB) manually

•

In case of trip due to Instantaneous lockout overcurrent element

•

In case of trip when fault current is larger than pickup current of Inrush Restraint function during Inrush Restraint

•

In case of trip due to the current larger than CLPU pickup current for the period of CLPU operation

•

In case of trip due to protection elements (Voltage(27,59), Frequency(81) and Demand, etc.) excluding OverCurrent Trip.

•

In case of trip due to the Hot Line Tag function

•

In case of Overcurrent Trip while Auto Reclosing function is disabled (‘RECLOSE ENABLE’ Lamp OFF)

This “Figure 8-5. Lockout Sequence Operation” shows the typical protection sequence of lockout after 4 times of OCR trips when the total operation time is set as 4.

(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC

(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time

(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC

(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time

(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC

(6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time

(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC Figure 8-5. Lockout Sequence Operation

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

201

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

After Recloser(or CB) is closed manually at site or remote controller from the status of Lockout, and it passes Lockout Reset Time. Lockout status will convert into reset, then normal reclosing fucntiond will be activated.

2) RESET RESET means the system has returned to normal state.

The reset occurs in the following

situations.  Lockout  Reset : In case when Recloser(or CB) is closed manually at the site or remotely and the Lockout Reset Time has passed.  Cycle  Reset : While it is in sequence, the over current is removed before lockout as well as the Auto Reset Time has passed. The “Figure 8-6. Reset Sequence Operation” shows the sequence where the system return to normal status because the overcurrent is removed after 2 times of reclosing operations when the total operation time is set as 4.

(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC

(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time

(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC

(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time

(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC

(6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time

Figure 8-6. Reset Sequence Operation If fault occurs during the Auto Reset Time, only remaining reclosing operations will be performed and then, the system will lockout.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

202

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) CYCLE It indicates the current sequence status. It occurs when OCR fault trips onyly except Instantaneous lockout overcurrent elements, and maintain as cycle until operation time reach to the setting. During Cycle, Later certain period after fault trip, it automatically operates reclosing function. (But, Cycle occurs only when Auto Reclosing is enabled(‘RECLOSE ENABLE’ LED ON)

8.1.1.1. Auto Reclosing Setup After a fault has occurred, the reclosing element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose interval time expires. The number of lockout operation setting can be programmed from one to five, and each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer. If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts. At this moment, if make close operation remotely or locally, Lockout is released and fault detecting is activated. Also, if the fault is temporary, the Lockout sequence of the Recloser is Rest by Reset logic. If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic. The reclosing element can be disabled in the GROUP settings by one operating lockout or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel. AUTO RECLOSING menu is classified as below; [AUTO RECLOSING] >1.FUNCTION 2.OPERATIONS 3.INTERVALS

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

203

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Each of the setting items under AUTO RECLOSING menu are described below.

Function Setup GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / Reclose Fun [FUNCTION] >Reclose Fun: ENABLE

Range

ENABLE, DISABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

-

Select whether to enable or disable the reclsoing function. [DISABLE/ENABLE]

This setting is used to change the reclosing function of EVRC2A-NT.

Operations Setup Set the operation of phase fault, ground fault, SEF fault and negative sequence fault. The operation settings are applied individually according to the fault type. OPERATION menu is classified as below; [OPERATIONS] >1.PHASE 2.GROUND 3.SEF 4.NEG SEQ’

Auto reclosing function of EVRC2A-NT supports maximum of 5 reclosing shots. It is possible to set the curve (FAST or DELAY) to be applied for each shot. This feature allows to implement the ‘Save Fuse’ scheme by using the combination of 2 Fast and 2 Delay curves (total 4 shots trip lockout i.e. first and second shot should be fast trip time curves and third and fourth shots should be delayed trip time curves).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

204

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Each of the setting items under the OPERATIONS menu are described below.

1) Operations Setup – PHASE GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / OPERATIONS / PHASE / Lockout Shots [PHASE] >Lockout Shots: 4 Sh1 Fast Active:YES >Sh2 Fast Active:YES >Sh3 Fast Active: NO >Sh4 Fast Active: NO [1~5: 1]

Range

1~5

Default 4

Step

1

Select the total number of the Phase trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the Phase trip operations.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh1 Fast Active [PHASE] Lockout Shots: 4 >Sh1 Fast Active:YES >Sh2 Fast Active:YES >Sh3 Fast Active: NO >Sh4 Fast Active: NO [NO/YES]

Range

NO, YES

Default YES

Step

~

st

For 1 trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation. When YES is applied, fast T-C curve of time overcurrent and delay T-C are operated together, on the other hand, when NO is applied, only delay T-C is operated.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh2 Fast Active [PHASE] Lockout Shots: 4 Sh1 Fast Active:YES >Sh2 Fast Active:YES Sh3 Fast Active: NO Sh4 Fast Active: NO

Range

NO, YES

Default YES

Step

~

For 2nd trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.

[NO/YES]

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE / Sh3 Fast Active [PHASE] Lockout Shots: 4 Sh1 Fast Active:YES Sh2 Fast Active:YES >Sh3 Fast Active: NO Sh4 Fast Active: NO

Range

NO, YES

Default NO

Step

-

For 3rd trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.

[NO/YES]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

205

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh4 Fast Active [PHASE] Lockout Shots: 4 Sh1 Fast Active:YES Sh2 Fast Active:YES Sh3 Fast Active: NO >Sh4 Fast Active: NO

Range

NO, YES

Default NO

Step

-

For 4th trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.

[NO/YES]

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ AUTO RECLOSING/ OPERATIONS/ PHASE /Sh5 Fast Active Sh1 Sh2 Sh3 Sh4 >Sh5

[PHASE] Fast Active:YES Fast Active:YES Fast Active: NO Fast Active: NO Fast Active: NO

Range

NO, YES

Default NO

Step

-

For 5th trip shot, it sets fast T-C curve operation.

[NO/YES]

2) Operations Setup – GROUND The ground operation settings process is the same as the phase operation.

3) Operations Setup – SEF GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / OPERATIONS / SEF / Lockout Shots [SEF] >Lockout Shots:

Range 4

1~5

Default 4

Step

1

Select the total number of the SEF trip operations. [1~5:1]

This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip operations.

4) Operations Setup – NEG SEQ’ The negative sequence operation settings process is the same as the phase operation.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

206

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Intervals Setup Set the reclosing time of phase fault, ground fault, SEF fault and negative sequence fault. The reclosing time is applied individually according to the fault type. INTERVALS menu is classified as below; [INTERVALS] >1.PHASE/NEG SEQ’ 2.GROUND 3.SEF 4.OTHER

Each of the setting items under the INTERVALs menu are described below.

1) Intervals Setup – PHASE/NEG SEQ’ Set the reclosing interval time of phase fault and negative sequence fault at the same time. However the interval time is applied according to phase fault and negative sequence fault, respectively. GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 1 0.10 ~ 1800.00 sec

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] >Reclose 1: 0.60 Reclose 2: 2.00 Reclose 3: 15.00 Reclose 4: 15.00

Range

[0.10~1800.00:0.01s]

first trip operation and the close operation.

Default 0.60

Step

0.01 sec

This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the

GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 2 1.00 ~ 1800.00 sec

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Reclose 1: 0.60 >Reclose 2: 2.00 Reclose 3: 15.00 Reclose 4: 15.00

Range

[0.10~1800.00:0.01s]

the second trip operation and the close operation.

Default 2.00

Step

0.01 sec

This setting is used to change the second reclose interval time between

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

207

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 3 1.00 ~ 1800.00 sec

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Reclose 1: 0.06 Reclose 2: 2.00 >Reclose 3: 15.00 Reclose 4: 15.00

Range

[0.10~1800.00:0.01s]

the third trip operation and the close operation.

Default 15.00

Step

0.01 sec

This setting is used to change the third reclose interval time between

GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / PHASE/NEG SEQ’ / Reclose 4 1.00 ~ 1800.00 sec

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Reclose 1: 0.06 Reclose 2: 2.00 Reclose 3: 15.00 >Reclose 4: 15.00

Range

[0.10~1800.00:0.01s]

the fourth trip operation and the close operation.

Default 15.00

Step

0.01 sec

This setting is used to change the fourth reclose interval time between

2) Intervals Setup – GROUND The ground interval settings process is the same as the phase interval. 3) Intervals Setup – SEF The SEF interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.

4) Intervals Setup – OTHERS GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reset T(A.R) [OTHERS] >Reset T(A.R): 30.00 Reset T(L.O): 10.00 Reclose Wait: 60.00

[0.10~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.10~ 600.00 sec

Default 30.00

Step

0.01 sec

It is to select Reset time during auto reclosing. During reclosing sequence operation, if current is back to normal for this set time, recloser sequence is Reset. Generally, Reclosing reset time shall be set longer than present reclose sequence time. During reclose sequence time, if a fault current is removed, ‘Reset T(A.R)’ starts and during ‘Reset T(A.R)’, a fault is detected again, Reset timer is reset.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

208

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reset T(L.O) [OTHERS] Reset T(A.R): 30.00 >Reset T(L.O): 10.00 Reclose Wait: 60.00

[0.10~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.10~ 600.00 sec

Default 10.00

Step

0.01 sec

To set Lockout reset time. After recloser is closed by locally or remotely, within this set time, auto reclosing is not activated. It is to eliminate reclosing sequence if a fault current is detected after manual closing, and to have waiting time for feeder stabilization. After this set time, Recloser function is activated.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / AUTO RECLOSING / INTERVALS / OTHERS / Reclose Wait [OTHERS] Reset T(A.R): 30.00 Reset T(L.O): 10.00 >Reclose Wait: 60.00

[0(OFF),0.10~600.0s]

Range

0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 60.00

Step

0.01 sec

Reclose signal is output after reclose interval time, when reclosing operation does not operate due to close power supply problem, it will set time to maintain recloser signal. If reclosing operation does not work during this period, it will be directly LOCK OUT even though reclosing sequence is remained.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

209

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.2. Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51P) The EVRC2A-NT has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element contained in the EVRC2A-NT, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus phse fault current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time overcurrent element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A-NT and other external devices on the distribution system. US, ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the EVRC2A-NT. A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to the US, ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. Phase time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent malfunction of inrush current generated when relcloser or nearby power distribution device is closed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

210

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

‘Time OC-PHASE’ menu is sub-divided as follow: [Time OC-PHA] >1.(+)PHASE FAST 2.(+)PHASE DELAY 3.(-)PHASE FAST 4.(-)PHASE DELAY

Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - PHASE element.

1) (+) PHASE FAST Setup (+) PHASE FAST setting menu is available for setting (+) PHASE FAST Curve. GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / (+)PHASE FAST / Function [(+)PHASE FAST] >Function: TRIP Pickup: 500 Curve: [US-VI] >Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

Range

DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM

Default TRIP

Step

-

Set the function of (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent as enable or disable. If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips. If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm..

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / (+)PHASE FAST / Pickup [(+)PHASE FAST] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 500 Curve: [US-VI] >Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00

Range

10 ~ 1600A

Default 500A

Step

1A

Set pickup current of (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent element.

[10~1600:1A]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

211

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Curve [(+)PHASE FAST] Function: ENABLE Pickup: 500 >Curve: [US-VI] >Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [Curves : total 62]

A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)

Range

Default US-VI Select desired curve type for (+)PHASE FAST time overcurrent element. The T-C curves supported by the EVRC2A-NT are as follows; 







US -

US-NI : US Normally Inverse

-

US-VI : US Very Inverse

-

US-EI : US Extremely Inverse

-

US-STI : US Short Time Inverse

-

US-STVI : US Short Time Very Inverse

ANSI /IEEE -

IEEE-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse

-

IEEE-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse

-

IEEE-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse

IEC -

IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse

-

IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse

-

IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse

-

IEC-STI : IEC Short Time Inverse

-

IEC-LTI : IEC Long Time Inverse

ES -

ES-NI : KEPCO ESB Normally Inverse

-

ES-VI : KEPCO ESB Very Inverse

-

ES-EI : KEPCO ESB Extremely Inverse

-

ES-LTVI : KEPCO ESB Long Time Very Inverse



Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s



KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4



User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4



McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32



Fuse curves : RI, HR, FR

For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

212

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range Setting

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Curve

A(101)

B(117)

C(133)

D(116)

E(132)

IEC-EI

K(162)

L(107)

M(118)

N(104)

Setting

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Curve

IEC-NI

P(115)

R(105)

T(161)

V(137)

IEC-VI

W(138)

Y(120)

Z(134)

1(102)

Setting

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

Curve

2(135)

3(140)

4(106)

5(114)

6(136)

7(152)

8(113)

8*(111)

9(131)

11(141)

Setting

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

Curve

13(142)

14(119)

15(112)

16(139)

18(151)

N1

N2

N3

N4

US-NI

Setting

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

Curve

US-VI

US-EI

ES-NI

ES-VI

USER-1

USER-2

USER-3

USER-4

DEF-1S

DEF-10S

Setting

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

Curve

IEEE-NI

IEEE-VI

IEEE-EI

US-STI

IEC-LTI

IEC-STI

ES-LTVI

ES-EI

RI

Setting

61

62

Curve

HR

FR

US-STVI

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Time Dial [(+)PHASE FAST] Function: ENABLE Pickup: 500 Curve: [US-VI] >Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [0.05~15.00:0.01]

Range

0.01 ~ 15.00

Default 1.00

Step

0.01

Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after time add application.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Time Add [(+)PHASE FAST] Function: ENABLE Pickup: 500 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 >Time Add.: 0.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set Time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

213

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA /PHASE FAST / M.R.T [(+)PHASE FAST] Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST [0.00~10.00:0.01s]

0.00 ~ 10.00 sec

Range

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Reset Method [(+)PHASE FAST] Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]

INST, LINEAR

Range

Default INST

Step

~

In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)PHASE FAST overcurrent protection is reset.  INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.  LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT (Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-PHA / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time [(+)PHASE FAST] Curve: [US-VI] Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF [0(OFF),0.01~600.00]

0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Range

Default 0(OFF),

Step

0.01 sec

Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation.

2)

(+) PHASE DELAY Setup

‘(+) PHASE DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

3) (-) PHASE FAST Setup ‘(-) PHASE FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

4) (-) PHASE DELAY Setup ‘(-) PHASE DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) PHASE FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

214

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.3. Ground Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51G) The EVRC2A-NT has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element in the EVRC2A-NT is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The ground time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus gournd fault current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements within the EVRC2A-NT and other external devices on the distribution system. ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the EVRC2A-NT. A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the current level measured by the EVRC2A-NT drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. Ground time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent malfunction of inrush current generated when relcloser or distribution device is closed. ‘Time OC-GROUND’ menu is sub-divided as follow: [Time OC-GND] >1.(+)GROUND FAST 2.(+)GROUND DELAY 3.(-)GROUND FAST 4.(-)GROUND DELAY

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

215

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Following setting is used to program the Time Overcurrent - GROUND element.

1) (+) GROUND FAST Setup (+) GROUND FAST setting menu is available for setting (+) GROUND FAST Curve. GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Function [(+)GROUND FAST] >Function: TRIP Pickup: 250 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

DISABLE, TRIP, TR&AL, ALARM,

Range

Default TRIP

Step

-

Set the function of (+) GROUND FAST fast time overcurrent as enable or disable. If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips. If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Pickup [(+)GROUND FAST] Function: TRIP >Pickup: 250 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00

Range

10 ~ 1600A

Default 250A

Step

1A

Set pickup current of (+)GROUND FAST time overcurrent element.

[10~1600:1A]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Curve [(+)GROUND FAST] Function: TRIP Pickup: 250 >Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [10~1600:1A]

Range

A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)

Default US-VI Select desired curve type for (+)GROUND FAST time overcurrent element. For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

216

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Time Dial [(+)GROUND FAST] Function: TRIP Pickup: 250 Curve: [US-VI] >Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [0.05~15.00:0.01]

Range

0.05 ~ 15.00

Default 1.00

Step

0.01

Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after time add application.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Time Add [(+)GROUND FAST] Function: TRIP Pickup: 250 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 >Time Add.: 0.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.

[0.00~15.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / M.R.T [(+)GROUND FAST] Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 10.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST / Reset Method [(+)GROUND FAST] Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]

Range

INST, LINEAR

Default INST

Step

~

In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)GROUND FAST fast overcurrent protection is reset.  INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.  LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT (Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

217

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC- GND / (+)GROUND FAST /Low Set DT [(+)GROUND FAST] Curve: [US-VI] Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF [0(OFF),0.01~600.00]

0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00sec

Range

Default 0(OFF),

Step

0.01sec

Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation.

2)

(+) GROUND DELAY Setup

‘(+) GROUND DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

3) (-) GROUND FAST Setup ‘(-) GROUND FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

4) (-) GROUND DELAY Setup ‘(-) GROUND DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) GROUND FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

218

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.4. Negative Sequence Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent (51Q(46)) The EVRC2A-NT has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus negative sequence fault current for tripping using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the group setting and both PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A-NT and other external devices on the distribution system. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI/IEEE, IEC, ESB, US, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. Negative sequence time overcurrent does not work during inrush restraint in order to prevent malfunction of inrush current generated when relcloser or nearby distribution device is closed. ‘Time OC-NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow; [Time >1.(+)NEG 2.(+)NEG 3.(-)NEG 4.(-)NEG

OC-NEQ] SEQ’ FAST SEQ’ DELAY SEQ’ FAST SEQ’ DELAY

Following setting is used to program ‘Time OC-NEQ’ elements.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

219

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) (+) NEG SEQ’ FAST Setup (+) NEG SEQ’ FAST setting menu is available for setting (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST Curve. GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Function [(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 500 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL

Range

Default TRIP

Step

-

Set the function of negative sequence fast time overcurrent as enable or disable. If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips. If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Pickup [(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 500 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00

Range

OFF, 1.0 ~ 1600.0A

Default 500.0A

Step

1A

Set pickup current of (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent element.

[10~1600:1A]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Curve [(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 500 >Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [curves : total 62]

Range

A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)

Default US-VI Select desired curve type for (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent element. For more details, refer to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

220

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Time Dial [(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 500 Curve: [US-VI] >Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 [0.05~15.00:0.01]

Range

0.05 ~ 15.00

Default 1.00

Step

0.01

Set time dial, multiplying this value to selected T-C curve. Multiplying this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after time add application.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Time Add [(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Pickup: 500 Threshold: 1.00 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 >Time Add.: 0.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set time adder to add set value on selected T-C curve.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / M.R.T [(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Threshold: 1.00 Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 10.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST / Reset Method [(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]

Range

INST, LINEAR

Default INST

Step

~

In case that a fault current is decreased under pickup level, (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST time overcurrent protection is reset.  .INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.  LINEAR: When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s RT (Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

221

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / TIME OC-NEQ / (+)NEG SEQ’ FAST /Low Set DT [(+)NEG SEQ’ FAST] Curve: [US-VI] Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF 0(OFF),0.01~600.00s

0(OFF), 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Range

Default OFF

Step

0.01 sec

Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation.

2)

(+) NEG SEQ’ DELAY Setup

‘(+) NEG SEQ’ DELAY’ settings settings are very similar ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

3) (-) NEG SEQ’ FAST Setup ‘(-) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

4) (-) NEG SEQ’ DELAY Setup ‘(-) NEG SEQ’ DELAY’ settings are very similar to ‘(+) NEG SEQ’ FAST’ time overcurrent setting.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

222

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.5. Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (50P1) The EVRC2A-NT has a phase instantaneous overccurent element. This element in the EVRC2ANT, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus phse high fault current. The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED on user interface panel. This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme. ‘INST OC - PHA’ menu is sub-divided as follow: [INST OC - PHA] >1.(+)INST OC-PHA 2.(-)INST OC-PHA

Following settings are used to program ‘INST OC – PHASE’ elements.

1) (+)INST OC-PHA Setup GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Function [(+)INST OC-PHA] >Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [ENABLE,DISABLE]

Range

ENABLE, DISABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Set the function (+) INST OC -PHASE as enable or disable. DISABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function does not operate. ENABLE : (+) INST OC -PHASE function operates.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Pickup [(+)INST OC-PHA] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [10~20000:1A]

Range

10 ~ 20000 A

Default 4000

Step

1A

Set the pickup current for (+) INST OC -PHASE element. This value is the minimum operating current for (+) INST OC PHASE element

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

223

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Time Delay 0.00~600.00 sec

[(+)INST OC-PHA] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1

Range

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay time.

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set time delay of trip operation for (+) INST OC -PHASE element. If

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-PHA / (+)INST OC-PHA / Active Shot [(+)INST OC-PHA] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Shot: 1 [1~5:1shot]

Range

1~5 shot

Default 1

Step

1shot

Sets the time when this element is activated. If Active Shot = 1, then (+)INST OC -PHASE element is enabled for the first trip operation and next trip operations.

2) (-) INST OC – PHA Setup (-) INST OC-PHA settings are very similar with (+) INST OC-PHA settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

224

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.6. Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50G1) The EVRC2A-NT has a ground instantaneous overccurent element. This element in the EVRC2ANT, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus ground high fault current. The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the ground setting and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme. ‘INST OC - GND’ menu is sub-divided as follow; [INST OC - GND] >1.(+)INST OC-GND 2.(-)INST OC-GND

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –GND’ element.

1) (+) INST OC-GND Setup GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Function [(+)INST OC-GND] >Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [ENABLE,DISABLE]

Range

ENABLE, DISABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Set the function of ground instantaneous overccurent element as enable or disable. DISABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on the ground does not operate. ENABLE: (+) INST OC-GND function on ground operates.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Pickup 10 ~ 20000 A

[(+)INST OC-GND] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1

Range

[10~20000:1A]

This value is the minimum operating current of this element.

Default 4000

Step

1A

Set the pickup current of ground instantaneous overccurent element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

225

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Time Delay 0.00~600.00 sec

[(+)INST OC-GND] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1

Range

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

set for 0, trips immediately on gorund fault current without delay.

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set Time Delay for ground instantaneous overccurent element. If it is

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC-GND / (+)INST OC-GND / Active Shot [(+)INST OC-GND] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Shot: 1 [1~5:1shot]

Range

1~5 shot

Default 1

Step

1shot

Sets the time when this element is activated. If Active Shot = 1, then ground instantaneous overccurent element is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.

2) (-) INST OC-GND Setup (-) INST OC-GND settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC-GND settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

226

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.7. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SG) The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy of CTs. For SEF element, EVRC2A-NT has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CT’s(standard) or connected to a separate window type ZCT. The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus sensitive earth fault current . The SEF element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED, GROUND ENABLED and SEF ENABLED on user interface panel. For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded. A sensitive earth fault element does not work during the inrush restraint to prevent malfunction of the inrush current that occurs when the relcloser or nearby distribution device is closed. ‘INST OC-SEF’ menu is sub-divided as follow; [INST OC - SEF] >1.(+)INST OC-SEF 2.(-)INST OC-SEF

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

227

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC –SEF’ element.

1) (+)INST OC-SEF Setup GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Function [(+)INST OC-SEF] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 10.0 >Time Delay: 5.00

[DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set the function of sensitive earth fault element as enable or disable when the power flow is in forward direction. If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips. If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm..

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Pickup [(+)INST OC-SEF] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 10.0 Time Delay: 5.00

[0.1~160.0:1A]

0.1~160.0 A

Range

Default 10.0

Step

1A

Set the pickup current of sensitive earth fault element. This value is the minimum operating current of sensitive earth fault element.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – SEF / (+)INST OC – SEF / Time Delay [(+)INST OC-SEF] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 10.0 >Time Delay: 5.00

Range

0.00~600.00 sec

Default 5.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set Time Delay for sensitive earth fault trip. If it is set for 0, trips [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

immediately sensitive earth fault current without delay.

2) (-) INST OC – SEF Setup (-) INST OC- SEF settings are very similar to the (+)INST OC- SEF settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

228

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.8. Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent (50Q1(46)) The negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element in the EVRC2A-NT is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus negative sequence high fault current. The operating time of this element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. This element is enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION on user interface panel. This element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme. ‘INST OC - NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow; [INST OC - NEQ] >1.(+)INST OC-NEQ 2.(-)INST OC-NEQ

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OC – NEQ’ element.

1) (+)INST OC-NEQ Setup GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Function [(+)INST OC-NEQ] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [ENABLE,DISABLE]

ENABLE, DISABLE

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set the function of negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element as enable or disable. DISABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on the negative sequence does not operate. ENABLE : (+) INST OC-NEQ function on negative sequence operates.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

229

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Pickup [(+)INST OC-NEQ] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [10~20000:1A]

10 ~ 20000 A

Range

Default 4000

Step

1A

Set the pickup current of negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element. This value is the minimum operating current of negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Time Delay [(+)INST OC-NEQ] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

0.00~600.00 sec

Range

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set Time Delay for negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on negative sequence fault current without delay.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OC – NEQ / (+)INST OC – NEQ / Active Shot [(+)INST OC-NEQ] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Shot: 1 [1~5:1shot]

1~5 shot

Range

Default 1

Step

1shot

Sets the time when this element is activated. If Active Shot = 1, then negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.

2) (-) INST OC – NEQ Setup (-) INST OC- NEQ settings are very similar to the (+) INST OC- NEQ settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

230

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.9. Phase Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50P2) The EVRC2A-NT has a phase instantaneous lockout overccurent element. This element in the EVRC2A-NT, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus phase high fault current. When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other phase overcurrent elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated. This element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current. This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of permanent fault. The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and phase instantaneous overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. This element element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme ‘INST OCL - PHA’ menu is sub-divided as follow: [INST OCL-PHA] >1.(+)INST OCL-PHA 2.(-)INST OCL-PHA

Following settings are used to program ‘INST OCL – PHASE’ elements.

1) (+)INST OCL-PHA Setup GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Function [(+)INST OCL-PHA] >Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [ENABLE,DISABLE]

Range

ENABLE, DISABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Set the function (+) INST OCL -PHASE as enable or disable. DISABLE : (+) INST OCL -PHASE function does not operate. ENABLE : (+) INST OCL -PHASE function operates.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

231

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Pickup [(+)INST OCL-PHA] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [10~20000:1A]

Range

10 ~ 20000 A

Default 4000

Step

1A

Set the pickup current for (+) INST OCL -PHASE element. This value is the minimum operating current for (+) INST OCLPHASE element

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Time Delay 0.00~600.00 sec

[(+)INST OCL-PHA] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1

Range

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

it is set for 0, trips immediately without delay time.

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set time delay of trip operation for (+) INST OCL-PHASE element. If

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-PHA / (+)INST OCL-PHA / Active Shot [(+)INST OCL-PHA] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Shot: 1 [1~5:1shot]

Range

1~5 shot

Default 1

Step

1shot

Sets the time when this element is activated. If Active Shot = 1, then (+)INST OCL-PHASE element is enabled for the first trip operation and next trip operations.

2) (-) INST OCL – PHA Setup (-) INST OCL-PHA settings are very similar with (+) INST OCL-PHA settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

232

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.10. Ground Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50G2) The EVRC2A-NT has a ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element. This element in the EVRC2A-NT, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. This element provides a definite time delay versus ground high fault current. When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other gournd overcurrent elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated. This element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current. This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of permanent fault. The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and ground instantaneous overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. This element element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme ‘INST OCL - GND’ menu is sub-divided as follow; [INST OCL - GND] >1.(+)INST OCL-GND 2.(-)INST OCL-GND

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OCL –GND’ element.

1) (+) INST OCL-GND Setup GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Function [(+)INST OCL-GND] >Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [ENABLE,DISABLE]

Range

ENABLE, DISABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Set the function of ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element as enable or disable. DISABLE: (+) INST OCL-GND function on the ground does not operate. ENABLE: (+) INST OCL-GND function on ground operates.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

233

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Pickup [(+)INST OCL-GND] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [10~20000:1A]

10 ~ 20000 A

Range

Default 4000

Step

1A

Set the pickup current of ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element. This value is the minimum operating current of this element.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Time Delay [(+)INST OCL-GND] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

0.00~600.00 sec

Range

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set Time Delay for ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on gorund fault current without delay.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL-GND / (+)INST OCL-GND / Active Shot [(+)INST OCL-GND] Function: ENABLE >Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Shot: 1 [1~5:1shot]

1~5 shot

Range

Default 1

Step

1shot

Sets the time when this element is activated. If Active Shot = 1, then ground instantaneous lockout overccurent element is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.

2) (-) INST OCL-GND Setup (-) INST OCL-GND settings are very similar to the (+) INST OCL-GND settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

234

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.11. Neg Seq’ Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent (50Q2(46)) The negative sequence instantaneous lockout overccurent element provides a definite time delay versus negative sequence high fault current. When this element is enabled, this element is operated prior to any other negative sequence overcurrent elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated. This element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current. This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of permanent fault. The operating time of this element should be set for equal to or faster than and negative sequence instantaneous overccurent element. This element is enabled in the group setting and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. This element element is not affected by the inrush restrain and cold load pickup scheme ‘INST OCL - NEQ’ menu is sub-divided as follow; [INST OCL - NEQ] >1.(+)INST OCL-NEQ 2.(-)INST OCL-NEQ

Following settings are used to program the ‘INST OCL – NEQ’ element.

1) (+)INST OCL-NEQ Setup GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Function [(+)INST OCL-NEQ] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [ENABLE,DISABLE]

ENABLE, DISABLE

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set the function of negative sequence instantaneous lockout overccurent element as enable or disable. DISABLE : (+) INST OCL-NEQ function on the negative sequence does not operate. ENABLE : (+) INST OCL-NEQ function on negative sequence operates.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

235

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Pickup [(+)INST OCL-NEQ] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [10~20000:1A]

Range

10 ~ 20000 A

Default 4000

Step

1A

Set the pickup current of negative sequence instantaneous lockout overccurent element. This value is the minimum operating current of this element.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Time Delay [(+)INST OCL-NEQ] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00 Active Shot: 1 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00~600.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set Time Delay for negative sequence instantaneous lockout overccurent element. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on negative sequence fault current without delay.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INST OCL– NEQ / (+)INST OCL– NEQ / Active Shot [(+)INST OCL-NEQ] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Shot: 1 [1~5:1shot]

Range

1~5 shot

Default 1

Step

1shot

Sets the time when this element is activated. If Active Shot = 1, then negative sequence instantaneous lockout overccurent element is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.

2) (-) INST OCL – NEQ Setup (-) INST OCL- NEQ settings are very similar to the (+) INST OCL- NEQ settings.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

236

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.12. Inrush Restraint The EVRC2A-NT suppresses the time overcurrent operation during the inrush current restraint period to prevent erroneous operation of the EVRC2A-NT due to the inrush current generated when the recloser does close operation or the near-field distribution device does close operation (the instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent elements do normal operation). The setting of the Inrush current restraint function can be set individually for phase, ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence.

Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

237

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

After it’s done black out more than outage time, it restores load current supply, inrush current restraint algorithm is applied. When the restoration of load supply is occured, in the case of that generated inrush current is greater than inrush duration fault pickup current as inrush current 1 of “Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics”, it’s considered as fault current, recloser does trip operation during inrush duration. (But, when the delay curve of time overcurrent element is ENABL, recloser does operation). When inrush current is less than inrush duration fault pickup current as inrush current 2 of “Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics” After fault protection operation is suppressed during R.M.T Time(Restore Minimu Time), recloser does trip operation after inrush duration. However, inrush duration is removed if inrush current is less than reset current before R.M.T Time (Restore Minimum Time) as inrush current 3 of “Figure 8-7. Inrush Restratint Operation Characteristics”. When faul current is flowed more than inrush duration fault pick up current during inrush duration, reloser does 1st trip operation and goes to lockout status on RECLOSE ENABLED. NOTE: According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, in order to activate inrush current restraint sectopm the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If “NO” is set, the decision is made when a recloser is closed (52A) by local or remote control.

8.1.12.1. Inrush Restraint Setup ‘INRUSH RESTRAINT’ menu is sub-divided as follow;

[INRUSH RESTRAINT] >1.FUNCTION 2.PICKUP CURRENT 3.RESTORE MIN. TIME 4.INRUSH RES’ RESET 5.PHASE CURVE 6.GROUND CURVE 7.NEG SEQ’ CURVE 8.OTHERS

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

238

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) Function Setup GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Phase DISABLE, ENABLE

[FUNCTION] >Phase: ENABLE Ground: ENABLE SEF: ENABLE Neg Seq’: ENABLE

Range

[ENABLE/DISABLE]

phase current.

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Ground DISABLE, ENABLE

[FUNCTION] Phase: ENABLE >Ground: ENABLE SEF: ENABLE Neg Seq’: ENABLE

Range

[ENABLE/DISABLE]

ground current.

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / SEF DISABLE, ENABLE

[FUNCTION] Phase: ENABLE Ground: ENABLE >SEF: ENABLE Neg Seq’: ENABLE

Range

[ENABLE/DISABLE]

sensitive earth fault current.

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / FUNCTION / Neg Seq’ DISABLE, ENABLE

[FUNCTION] Phase: ENABLE Ground: ENABLE SEF: ENABLE >Neg Seq’: ENABLE

Range

[ENABLE/DISABLE]

Negative sequence current.

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Sets whether the inrush current suppression function is applied to

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

239

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) Inrush Duration Fault Pickup Current Setup GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Phase [PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 2000 Ground: 2000 SEF: 20.0 >Neg Seq’: 2000 [10~20000:1 A]

Range

10 ~ 20000A

Default 2000

Step

1A

Phase fault current level is configured during inrush current restraint duration. If the phase current is greater than the setring value, the delay curve of the phase time overcurrent element is activated.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Ground [PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 2000 >Ground: 2000 SEF: 20.0 >Neg Seq’: 2000 [10~20000:1 A]

Range

10 ~ 20000A

Default 2000

Step

1A

Ground fault level is configured during the inrush current restraint duration. If the ground current is greater than the setting value, the delay curve of the ground time overcurrent element is activated.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ S.E.F [PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 2000 >Ground: 2000 >SEF: 20.0 >Neg Seq’: 2000 [0.1~2000.0:0.1 A]

Range

0.1 ~ 2000.0A

Default 20.0

Step

0.1A

Sets the sensitive earth fault current level during the inrush current restraint duration If S.E.F current is greater than this setting, a sensitive earth fault element will operate.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / PICKUP CURRENT/ Neg Seq’ [PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 2000 >Ground: 2000 SEF: 20.0 >Neg Seq’: 2000 [10~20000:1 A]

Range

10 ~ 20000A

Default 2000

Step

1A

Sets the negative sequence fault current level during the inrush current restraint duration. If the negative sequence current is greater than the setting value, the delay curve of the negative sequence time overcurrent element operates.

NOTE: The above setting applies the pickup current to operate the time overcurrent element, and the multiple of current pickup current which is applied to the T-C curve during the time overcurrent operation applies the pickup current setting value of the delay curve. If the function of the delay curve is disabled, the time overcurrent element does not operate (does not trip) even if a fault current occurs during the inrush current restraint duration.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

240

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) Restroe Minimum Time Setup GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / P-Function [RESTORE MIN. TIME] >P-Function: ENABLE G-Function: ENABLE S-Function: ENABLE Q-Function: ENABLE RMT TIME: 0.60

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Set whether to apply restore minimum time for phase inrush current.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / G-Function [RESTORE MIN. TIME] >P-Function: ENABLE >G-Function: ENABLE S-Function: ENABLE Q-Function: ENABLE RMT TIME: 0.60

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for ground inrush current.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / S-Function [RESTORE MIN. TIME] >P-Function: ENABLE G-Function: ENABLE >S-Function: ENABLE Q-Function: ENABLE RMT TIME: 0.60

Range

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

current.

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for sensitive earth inrush

GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT / RESTORE MIN. TIME / Q-Function DISABLE, ENABLE

[RESTORE MIN. TIME] >P-Function: ENABLE >G-Function: ENABLE S-Function: ENABLE >Q-Function: ENABLE RMT TIME: 0.60

Range

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

inrush current.

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Sets whether to apply restore minimum time for negative sequence

NOTE: Depending on the above settings, the inrush current restraint duration release condition will be different. If it sets to EANBLE, the restore minimum time is applied and regardless of current size, the inrush current restraint duration is released after a restore minimum time. On the other hand, if it sets to DISABLE, the restore minimum time is not applied and the current size should fall below the reset current, and the inrush current restraint duration is released.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

241

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP#/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ RESTORE MIN.TIME/ RMTTIME [RESTORE MIN. TIME] P-Function: ENABLE G-Function: ENABLE S-Function: ENABLE Q-Function: ENABLE >RMT TIME: 0.60 [0.01~600.00:0.01 s]

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Range

Default 0.60

Step

0.01 sec

Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush current. The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for time overcurrent detection from inrush duration fault pickup current back to nominal pickup level.

4) Reset Current & Time Setup GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / P-Reset I [INRUSH RES’ RESET] >P-Reset I: 500 G-Reset I: 250 S-Reset I: 10.0 Q-Reset I: 500 Reset Time: 0.60 [10~1600:1 A]

Range

10~1600A

Default 500

Step

1A

Set the level of reset current for phase inrush restraint. Inrush current that is lower than this reset current setting level, is kept for the reset time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped and normal over current protection function operates.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / G-Reset I [INRUSH RES’ RESET] >P-Reset I: 500 >G-Reset I: 250 S-Reset I: 10.0 Q-Reset I: 500 Reset Time: 0.60

Range

10~1600A

Default 250

Step

1A

Set the level of reset current for ground inrush restraint.

[10~1600:1 A]

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / S-Reset I [INRUSH RES’ RESET] >P-Reset I: 500 G-Reset I: 250 >S-Reset I: 10.0 Q-Reset I: 500 Reset Time: 0.60

Range

0.1~160.0A

Default 10.0

Step

0.1A

Set the level of reset current for sensitive earth inrush restraint.

[10~1600:1 A]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

242

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / Q-Reset I [INRUSH RES’ RESET] >P-Reset I: 500 G-Reset I: 250 S-Reset I: 10.0 >Q-Reset I: 500 Reset Time: 0.60

Range

10~1600A

Default 500

Step

1A

Set the level of reset current for negative sequence inrush restraint.

[10~1600:1 A]

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ INRUSH RES’/CLPU/ INRUSH RESTRAINT/ INRUSH RES’RESET / Reset Time [INRUSH RES’ RESET] P-Reset I: 500 G-Reset I: 250 S-Reset I: 10.0 Q-Reset I: 500 >Reset Time: 0.60

Range

0.01 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.60

Step

0.01 sec

Sets the time to reset inrush current restraint duration.

[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]

5) Inrush Current Restrait Duration’s T-C Curve Setup Set the T-C curve to be applied during the Inrush current restraint duration.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / Curve [PHASE CURVE] >Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST [curve : total 62]

Range

A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)

Default US-VI

Step

~

Set T-C curve to apply when Phase inrush current is more than few times of phase disconnect inrush current. Applicable curve ragne refers to “Table 8-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range”.

*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above. GROUP # /RECLOSER/INRUSH RES’/CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE/ Time Dial 0.01~15.00

[PHASE CURVE] Curve: [US-VI] >Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST

Range

[0.01~15.00:0.01]

the slop of a curve. Coefficient multiply works after Time Adder.

Default 1.00

Step

0.01

Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application changes

*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

243

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/RECLOSER/INRUSH RES’ CLPU/INRUSH RESTRAINT/ PHASE CURVE / Time Add. 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[PHASE CURVE] Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 >Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST

Range

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

including its own delay time.

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Adding a time onto a set curve. More delays due to this set time

*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above. GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / M.R.T [PHASE CURVE] Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST [0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range

0.00 ~ 10.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Minimum Response Time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time, tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be cooperated with other protection device or fuse.

*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above. GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / PHASE CURVE / Reset Method [PHASE CURVE] Curve: [US-VI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]

Range

INST, LINEAR

Default INST

Step

~

In case that current level is decreased under Pickup level, Phase cold load pickup element is reset.  INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.  LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

*. NOTE) Ground Curve and NEG SEQ’ CURVE are same as PHASE CURVE above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

244

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

6) Other Setup GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / OTHERS / Outage Time [OTHERS] >Outage Time: >Outage I: >Make Use ‘I’:

0.01 ~ 10.00 sec

Range 5.00 2 NO

[0.01~600.00:0.01 s]

Default 5.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the outage time. After the outage condition is maintained for more than the setting time, the restoration of load supply becomes active and the Inrush current restraint section becomes active. Outage conditions are as follows; 

If "Make Use 'I'" setting is NO, it is considerd to be outage when recloser status is open.



If "Make Use 'I'" setting is YES, it is considered to be outage when current is below 2A.

However, under the above conditions, current should be below "Outage I". GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / OTHERS / Outage I [OTHERS] >Outage Time: >Outage I: >Make Use ‘I’:

0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A

Range 5.00 2 NO

[0(OFF),1~630:1 A]

Default 2

Step

1A

Set the current to determine outage. It is considered to be outage only when the current is below the setting value. However, when it sets to OFF, this setting is not used when determining the outage status.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / INRUSH RESTRAINT / OTHERS / Make Use ‘I’ [OTHERS] >Outage Time: >Outage I: >Make Use ‘I’:

[NO/YES]

NO, YES

Range 5.00 2 NO

Default NO

Step

~

Set whetherer or not to use current as decision condition for operating function. 

When it sets to NO, the inrush current restraint interval becomes active when relcoser is changed from open to close status.



When it set to YES, when the current increases above 2A, the inrush current restraint interval is active.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

245

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.13. Cold Load Pickup The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line. In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time overcurrent element during certain time (Pickup Multi) defined by a user. Over Current Pickup Level Step Up At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is risen as follows.

 Without Supply Time  Operationa l Cold Load Multi '  1    ( Pickup Multi '  1)  Interval Time   As example, when ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively, over 30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3. Over Current Pickup Level Step Down If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1. When ‘Pickup Multi’ and ‘Interval Time’ are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the cold load multiple in “Figure 8-8. Cold Load Multipilier” is shown as follows. NOTE: The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of T-C curve is a minimum working current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

246

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 8-9. Cold Load Multipilier

8.1.13.1. Cold Load Pickup Setup This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element. GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Function [COLD LOAD PICKUP] >Function: ENABLE Make Use ‘I’: NO Pickup Multi: 2.0 Interval Time: 10 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default ENABLE

Step

~

Set whether to Enable or disable the Cold load pickup function. When it sets to ON, cold load multiplier is applied to pickup current of phase, ground and negative sequence time overcurrent.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Make Use ‘I’ [COLD LOAD PICKUP] >Function: ENABLE >Make Use ‘I’: NO Pickup Multi: 2.0 Interval Time: 10 [NO/YES]

Range

YES, NO

Default NO

Step

~

Set whether or not to be used as a decision condition for operating the cold load pickup function. 

If it sets to NO, power loss and power restoration are considered as open or close state of relcoser.



If it sets to YES, determine power loss and power restoration as current (less than or equal to 2A)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

247

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Pickup Multi’ [COLD LOAD PICKUP] >Function: ENABLE >Make Use ‘I’: NO >Pickup Multi: 2.0 Interval Time: 10 [1.0~5.0:0.1xMTC]

Range

1.0~5.0 xMTC

Default 2.0

Step

0.1xMTC

Set the multiple of cold load. If 1 is set, the cold load multiple is not applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied for overcurrent pickup current.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER / INRUSH RES’/CLPU / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Interval Time 1~720 min

[COLD LOAD PICKUP] >Function: ENABLE >Make Use ‘I’: NO >Pickup Multi: 2.0 >Interval Time: 10

Range

[1~720:1 m]

level is raised or dropped.

Default 10

Step

1 min

Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

248

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.14. Harmonic Block (2HB and 5HB) Magnetizing inrush current in power transformer on the distribution line causes to operate overcurrent element. It provides the second and fifth harmonic block function to block overcurrent element caused by transformer inrush current. If measured second harmonic current content exceeds the adjustable pickup threshold setting value, the second harmonic block function can restraint to operate overcurrent elements until the inrush current has subsided.

Figure 8-10. Function block diagram for 2HB Function E2HBE

&

Min Curr. Ia

Ib

Ic

+ + + -

2nd Harmonic Calculation

IaRms.H2 /IaRms

+ -

&

IaRms.H2 /IaRms

+ -

&

IaRms.H2 /IaRms

+ -

&

2HBAT

Time Delay

2HBBT

Reset Time

2HBCT

OR

2HBT

Pickup

Figure 8-11. Function logic diagram for 2HB The fifth harmonic block function process is same as the second harmonic block function above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

249

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

This setting is to restrain the inrush current caused by the second harmonic element. GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Function [2ND BLOCKING] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00 Reset Time: 1.00 Min.I: 60

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set the second harmonic function as enabled or disabled.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Pickup [2ND BLOCKING] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00 Reset Time: 1.00 Min.I: 60 [OFF, 5~100:1 %]

Range

0(OFF), 5 ~ 100 %

Default OFF

Step

1%

Set the second harmonic pickup level. At least one of the phase currents has the second harmonic exceeded this setting value, this function is activated. In case of setting 0(OFF), the function is deactivated.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Time Delay [2ND BLOCKING] Function: DISABLE Pickup: OFF >Time Delay: 1.00 Reset Time: 1.00 Min.I: 60 [0.00~600.0s:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the second harmonic block function delay time. If the second harmonic exceeds above pickup setting during the delay time, selected overcurrent elements restrains to operate.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Reset Time 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[2ND BLOCKING] Function: DISABLE Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00 >Reset Time: 1.00 Min.I: 60

Range

[0.00~600.0s:0.01s]

selected overcurrent elements keep restraining during the reset time.

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

The second harmonic current is less than the pickup setting level, the

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HARMONIC BLOCK / 2ND BLOCKING / Min. I 0(OFF), 1~630A

[2ND BLOCKING] Function: DISABLE Pickup: OFF Time Delay: 1.00 Reset Time: 1.00 >Min.I: 60

Range

[0(OFF),1~630:1 A]

harmonic blocking element to operate.

Default 60

Step

1A

Enter the minimum value of current required to allow the second

*. NOTE ) 5TH BLOCKING setting process is same as 2ND BLOCKING settings above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

250

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.15. Directional Controls (67) The Directional Controls provide time overcurrent protection in the direction of power flow. The directional controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding faults in different directions. The directional controls are comprised of phase, gound, SEF and negative sequence overcurrent elements. If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation. The directional controls settings can be different in each GROUP settings. Each of the directional control elements has four setting items as follow: [DIRECTION] >1.PHASE 2.GROUND 3.SEF 4.NEG SEQ

8.1.15.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P) Normal voltage V1 provides phase pole direction in Power line system. Phase direction is determined by comparing normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1). If an angle between normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1) is within



90˚, the direction is forward otherwise it is

backward(reverse direction). Maximum torque angle is set between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Max torque initial angle is set for ∠300˚ lead angle for Normal voltage V1 (Initial set value of Max Torque angle shall be set ∠300˚ lead angle). If Polarized voltage becomes lower than the Minimum polarized Voltage, phase direction control is lost and phase over current is not detected. On the other hand, if phase direction control is set for ‘NONE’, regardless of phase direction, phase over current is detected. Phase direction control type can be set in order to detect phase over current. Depending on control type, over current can be detected in Forward direction or reverse direction or regardless of direction.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

251

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Following “Figure 8-12. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization” shows normal current (I1) direction polarity phasor diagram in complex plane. Polarizing Referance Voltage:

V1

T ro Ze

Typical Fault Angle

orq e Lin ue

I1

um xim Ma

T

ine eL u orq

Maximum Torque Angle : set 300 degree

rw Fo

ard

rse ve Re

Figure 8-12. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization The phase direction control in followingfour settings should be enabled. GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type [PHASE] >Type: M.T.A: M.P.V(V1): Block OC: [NONE/FOR/REV]

Range NONE 300 0.30 YES

NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE

Default NONE

Step

~

Set phase direction type. NONE : Regardless of phase direction, phase overcurrent is detected by normal phase current(Ia,Ib,Ic). FOR : (+) Phase overcurrent is detected when forward phase direction. (-) Phase overcurrent is detected when reverse phase direction. REV : (+) Phase overcurrent is detected when reverse phase direction. (-) Phase overcurrent is detected when forward phase direction.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

252

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type [PHASE] Type: >M.T.A: M.P.V(V1): Block OC:

Range NONE 300 0.30 YES

0 ~ 359 degree

Default 300

Step

1 degree

Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing

[0~359:1 Lead]

voltage. For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be approximately ∠300∼∠330 degree.

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION /PHASE / M.P.V(V1) [PHASE] Type: M.T.A: >M.P.V(V1): Block OC:

Range NONE 60 0.30 YES

0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT

0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT

Default 0.30

Step

0.01 xVT

To check Phase disconnect direction, it shall set Minimum Polarizing Voltage, V1). It is available to check the direction when a votage shall be more than this set value. Otherwise, checking is blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction is not checked.

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / PHASE / Block OC [PHASE] Type: M.T.A: M.P.V(V1): >Block OC: [NO/YES]

Range NONE 60 0.30 YES

NO, YES

Default NO

Step

~

Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below minimum polarizing voltage set. NO : Trip on over current element. YES : No trip on over current element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

253

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.15.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G) Zero phase voltage 3V0 provides ground control direction in power system. Ground direction is determined by comparing zero phase voltage (3V0) and zero phase current(I0). If an angle from zero phase voltage to zero phase current is within

 90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is

forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359 ˚. Initial set value of max torque angle is set for ∠135˚ leading compared with Zero sequence voltage(V0). Polarized voltage drops Min. polarized voltage, ground direction control is cancelled and ground over current is not detected. On the other hand, if ground direction control is set for ‘NONE’, ground over current is detected regardless of direction. Ground direction control type is set to detect ground over current. Depending on control type, over current is detected or is not detected. Following figure shows phasor graph of zero phase current direction polarity in complex plane.

rq ue

Li n

e

-V0

To

Ig

ue rq To

M ax im um

ro Ze

Fault Current

Re ve rs e

Fo

rw

ar d

ne Li

Polarizing Referance Voltage:

V0

Figure 8-13. Phasor Graph for Ig Directional Polarization

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

254

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

The ground direction control in followingfour settings should be enabled. GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / Type [GROUND] >Type: M.T.A: M.P.V(3V0): Block OC:

Range NONE 135 0.30 YES

NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE

Default NONE

Step

~

Set Ground direction type. NONE : Regardless of ground direction, ground overcurrent is detected

[NONE/FOR/REV]

by normal current(In). FOR : (+) Ground overcurrent is detected when forward ground direction. (-) Ground overcurrent is detected when reverse ground direction. REV : (+) Ground overcurrent is detected when reverse ground direction. (-) Ground overcurrent is detected when forward ground direction.

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.T.A [GROUND] Type: >M.T.A: M.P.V(3V0): Block OC:

NONE 145 0.30 YES

Range

0 ~ 359 degree

Default 135

Step

1 degree

Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.

[0~359:1°Lag]

For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠135 degree. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.P.V(3V0) [GROUND] Type: M.T.A: >M.P.V(3V0): Block OC:

Range NONE 135 0.30 YES

0(OFF),0.10~0.80 xVT

0(OFF), 0.10~0.80 xVT

Default 0.30

Step

0.01 xVT

Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check ground fault direction. Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction checking is disabled.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

255

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / GROUND / Block OC [GROUND] Type: M.T.A: M.P.V(-3V0): >Block OC:

Range NONE 60 0.30 YES

NO, YES

Default YES

Step

~

Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below minimum polarizing voltage set.

[NO/YES]

NO : Trip on over current element. YES : No trip on over current element.

8.1.15.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF) The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the GROUND directional control. But the default value of SEF directional element “Type” is ‘None’, and default value of “M.T.A(V0) is ‘135°’ .

8.1.15.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46)) Negative Sequence voltage V2 provides negative sequence pole direction in power system. Negative sequence direction is determined by comparing negative sequence voltage(V2) and negative current(I2). (I2) is within

If an angle from negative sequence voltage (V2) to negative sequence current

 90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise, reverse

direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Maximum Torque Angle initial set value leads from negative sequence voltage(V2) for ∠135˚. If polarizing voltage drops minimum polarizing voltage, negative sequence direction control is cancelled and over current is not detected. On the other hand, if negative sequence direction control type is set for ‘NONE’, over current is detected regardless of direction. Set negative sequence direction control type to detect negative sequence overcurrent. Depending on control type, overcurrent is detected in forward or reverse or both direction. Following figure shows phasor graph of negative sequence current(I2) direction polarity.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

256

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 8-14. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization The negative sequence directional controls in followingfour settings should be enabled. GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / Type [NEG SEQ’] >Type: NONE M.T.A: 135 M.P.V(V2): 0.30 Block OC: YES [NONE/FOR/REV]

Range

NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE

Default NONE

Step

~

Set Negative sequence direction type. NONE : Regardless of negative sequence direction, over current is detected by normal current(I2). FOR : (+) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when forward negative sequence direction. (-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when reverse negative sequence direction. REV : (+) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when reverse negative sequence direction. (-) Negative sequence overcurrent is detected when forward negative sequence direction.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

257

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.T.A [NEG SEQ’] Type: NONE >M.T.A: 135 M.P.V(V2): 0.30 Block OC: YES

Range

0 ~ 359 degree

Default 135

Step

1 degree

In case that negative sequence over current is occurred, Minimum Torque Angle of negative sequence current(I2) against zero phase

[0~359:1°Lag]

voltage(V2) is set

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / M.P.V(-V2) [NEG SEQ’] Type: NONE M.T.A: 135 >M.P.V(V2): 0.30 Block OC: YES

Range

0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 0.80 xVT

Default 0.30

Step

0.01 xVT

Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check Negative Sequence. Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise,

0(OFF),0.10~0.80xVT

direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction checking is disabled.

GROUP # /RECLOSER / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ’ / BLOCK OC [NEG SEQ’] Type: NONE M.T.A: 135 M.P.V(V2): 0.30 >Block OC: YES [NO/YES]

Range

NO, YES

Default YES

Step

~

Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below minimum polarizing voltage set. NO : Trip on over current element. YES : No trip on over current element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

258

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.16. Broken Conductor (64BC) The broken conductor element operates when the ratio between the negative sequence current (I2) and the positive sequence current (I1) of the relay is larger than the operation setting (pickup) value. Under normal conditions I2/I1 ratio is zero but when a fault occurs on the load, this ratio of I2/I1 increases. ‘Broken Conductor’ protection element configuration is as below.

Figure 8-15. 46BC Function Block Diagram . The figure below shows the function logic diagram of Broken Conductor.

Figure 8-16. 46BC Function Logic Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

259

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Function [BROKEN CONDUCT] >Function: DISABLE Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Time Delay: 4.00 Min.I: 60 Max.I: 500 [DIS/TR/TR&AL/AL]

DISABLE, TRIP, ALARM, TR&AL

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

Set the function of broken conduct element as enable or disable. If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips. If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Pickup(I2/I1) [BROKEN CONDUCT] Function: DISABLE >Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Time Delay: 4.00 Min.I: 60 >Max.I: 500

Range

1~100 %

Default 5

Step

1%

Set the Broken Conductor pickup level.

[1~100:1 %]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Time Delay [BROKEN CONDUCT] Function: DISABLE Pickup(I2/I1): 5 >Time Delay: 4.00 Min.I: 60 >Max.I: 500

Range

0.00~600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the Broken Conductor function delay time. [0.00:600.00:0.01 s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I [BROKEN CONDUCT] Function: DISABLE Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Time Delay: 4.00 >Min.I: 60 >Max.I: 500 [0(OFF), 1~630:1 A]

Range

0(OFF), 1~630A

Default 60

Step

1A

Enter the minimum value of current required to allow the broken conduct element to operate. Positive sequence current is less than setting value, element will not operate.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

260

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / BROKEN CONDUCT / Min. I [BROKEN CONDUCT] Function: DISABLE Pickup(I2/I1): 5 Time Delay: 4.00 >Min.I: 60 >Max.I: 500 [0(OFF),10~1600:1 A]

0(OFF), 10~1600

Range

Default 500

Step

1A

Enter the maximum value of current required to allow the broken conduct element to operate. Positive sequence current is greater than setting value, element will not operate.

8.1.17. Voltage (27/59/64N) In this section, undervoltage, overvoltage and neutral elements will be described. And the voltage menu is composed with 8 sub-menus as follows:

[VOLTAGE] >1.UNDER VOLT1 2.UNDER VOLT2 3.UV RESTORATION 4.OVER VOLT1 5.OVER VOLT2 6.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT1 7.NEUTRAL OVERVOLT2 8.OV RESTORATION

8.1.17.1. Undervoltage (27) In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time, two under voltage elements make a trip or alarm operation. The under voltage element are set in GROUP setting. It is available to select a number of phase to be checked for undervoltage function. The under voltage element are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

261

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1) UNDER VOLT1 Setup The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to followingsettings. GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Function [UNDER VOLT1] >Function: OFF Pickup: 0.80 Time Delay: 5.00 Min. V: 0.10 Voltage Type: 1P [OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]

OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL

Range

Default OFF

Step

~

Set the function of under voltage 1 element as enable or disable. If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips. If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Pickup [UNDER VOLT1] Function: OFF >Pickup: 0.80 Time Delay: 5.00 Min. V: 0.10 Voltage Type: 1P [0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.80

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the pickup value for under voltage 1 element. This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 0.80xVT and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be less than 10.56kV (= 13.2kV * 0.80) to operate this element.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Time Delay 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[UNDER VOLT1] Function: OFF Pickup: 0.80 >Time Delay: 5.00 Min. V: 0.10 Voltage Type: 1P

Range

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

during this time delay below the pickup level, this element will operate.

Default 5.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

262

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Min. V 0.10~1.40 xVT

[UNDER VOLT1] Function: OFF Pickup: 0.80 Time Delay: 5.00 >Min. V: 0.10 Voltage Type: 1P

Range

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

ratio of the rated voltage.

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Set the minimum voltage to operate this element. This setting is the

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLT1 / Voltage Type [UNDER VOLT1] Function: OFF Pickup: 0.80 Time Delay: 5.00 Min. V: 0.10 >Voltage Type: 1P [1P/2P/3P]

Range

1P, 2P, 3P

Default 1P

Step

~

Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage. 1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage. 2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage. 3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.

2) UNDER VOLT2 Setup The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.

3) UV RESTORATION Setup The undervoltage restoration should be enabled to followingsettings. GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Function [UV RESTORATION] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 0.95 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether to use undervoltage restoration function. This function is a function to automatically do close operation when the voltage returns to normal status after trip by undervoltage function.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Pickup [UV RESTORATION] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 0.95 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS [0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range

0.00~1.40 xVT

Default 0.95

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the pickup value for undervoltage restoration element. When the voltage is above the setting value, it is considered that the voltage returns to normal status.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

263

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Time Delay [UV RESTORATION] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 0.95 >Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 30.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the time delay for this function. If the voltage remains above the pickup level during this setting time, the recloser does automatically close operation.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Reset Time [UV RESTORATION] Pickup: 0.95 Time Delay: 30.00 >Reset Time: 5.00 Source Side: VS Voltage Type: 3P [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 5.00

Step

0.01sec

Sets the reset time of the undervoltage restoration function. The undervoltage restration function does not work if the voltage does not return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by the undervoltage function.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Source Side [UV RESTORATION] Pickup: 0.95 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 >Source Side: VS Voltage Type: 3P [VS/VL/VS&VL]

Range

VS,VL, VS&VL

Default VS

Step

~

Undervoltage restoration operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.  VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage  VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage  VS&VL : Undervoltage element operates one of either Source side or load side voltage becomes higher voltage level compared with pickup setting in UV RESTORATION.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / UV RESTORATION / Voltage Type [UV RESTORATION] Pickup: 0.95 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS >Voltage Type: 3P [1P/2P/3P]

Range

1P, 2P, 3P

Default 1P

Step

~

Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage Restoration. 1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage. 2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage. 3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

264

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.17.2. Overvoltage (59) and Neutral Overvoltage (64N) In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain time, over voltage elements makes a trip or alarm operation. Over voltage elements is set in GROUP setting. Phase overvoltage(59) elements are available to select a number of phase to be checked for overvoltage function. Neutral overvoltage elements operate with zero sequence volage (3V0) by the input phase volage. The over voltage element are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.

1) OVER VOLT1 Setup The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to followingsettings. GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Function [OVER VOLT1] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 1.10 Time Delay: 5.00 Voltage Type: 1P [DIS/TR/AL/TR&AL]

DISABLE, TR, AL, TR&AL

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set the function of over voltage 1 element as enable or disable. If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips. If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Pickup [OVER VOLT1] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 1.10 Time Delay: 5.00 Voltage Type: 1P [0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 1.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the pickup value for over voltage element1. This setting is the ratio of the rated voltage. If the set value is 1.10xVT and the phase rated voltage is 13.2kV, the phase voltage should be higher than 14.52kV (= 13.2kV * 1.10) to operate this element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

265

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Time Delay 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[OVER VOLT1] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 1.10 >Time Delay: 5.00 Voltage Type: 1P

Range

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

above this pickup level for this time delay, this element will operate.

Default 5.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the time delay to operate this element. If the voltage is maintained

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLT1 / Voltage Type [OVER VOLT1] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 1.10 Time Delay: 5.00 >Voltage Type: 1P [1P/2P/3P]

Range

1P, 2P, 3P

Default 1P

Step

~

Set a number of phase to be detected for Overvoltage 1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage. 2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage. 3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.

2) OVER VOLT2 Setup The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

3) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 1 Setup The neutral overvoltage 1 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.

4) NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 2 Setup The neutral overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1. However, there is no setting menu for voltage type.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

266

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

5) OV RESTORATION Setup The overvoltage restoration should be enabled to followingsettings. GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Function [OV RESTORATION] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 1.05 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS Voltage Type: 3P [DIS/TR/AL/TR&AL]

DISABLE, ENABLE

Range

Default DISABLE

Default DISABLE

Set whether to use overvoltage restoration function. This function is a function to automatically close when voltage returns to normal status after trip by overvoltage and neutral overvoltage function.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Pickup [OV RESTORATION] Function: OFF >Pickup: 1.05 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS [0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range

0.00~1.40 xVT

Default 1.05

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the pickup value for over voltage restoration element. When the voltage is below the setting value, it is considered that the voltage returns to normal status.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Time Delay [OV RESTORATION] Function: OFF Pickup: 1.05 >Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 30.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the time delay for this function. If the voltage remains below the pickup level during this setting time, the recloser does automatically close operation.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Reset Time [OV RESTORATION] Function: OFF Pickup: 1.05 Time Delay: 30.00 >Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS Voltage Type: 3P [1~100:1m]

Range

1~100 min

Default 5

Step

1min

Set the operation reset time of overvoltage restoration function. The overvoltage restoration function does not work if the voltage does not return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by overvoltage function.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

267

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Source Side [OV RESTORATION] Pickup: 1.05 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 >Source Side: VS Voltage Type: 3P [VS/VL/VS&VL]

Range

VS,VL, VS&VL

Default VS

Step

~

Overvoltage restoration operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.  VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage  VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage  VS&VL : Overvoltage element operates one of either Source side or load side voltage becomes lower voltage level compared with pickup setting in OV RESTORATION.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / VOLTAGE / OV RESTORATION / Voltage Type [OV RESTORATION] Pickup: 1.05 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Source Side: VS >Voltage Type: 3P [1P/2P/3P]

Range

1P, 2P, 3P

Default 1P

Step

~

Set a number of phase to be detected for Overvoltage Restoration. . 1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage. 2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage. 3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

268

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.18. Frequency (81) In this section, underfrequency, overfrequency and frequency delay elements will be described. And the frequency menu is composed with 6 sub-menus as follows:

[FREQUENCY] >1.UNDER FREQUENCY1 2.UNDER FREQUENCY2 3.OVER FREQUENCY1 4.OVER FREQUENCY2 5.FREQUENCY DELAY 6.AUTO RESTORATION

8.1.18.1. Underfrequency (81U) The underfrequency element is activated to trip when the distribution system frequency drops below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time. The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.(If VTs is delta connection(  ), VA-B voltage is zero crossing and if wye connection(Y), VA-N voltage zero crossing to measure frequency.) The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control.. The underfrequency elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. The underfrequency element should be enabled to followingsettings.

1) UNDER FREQUENCY 1 Setup The under frequency 1 should be enabled to followingsettings. GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Function [UNDER FREQUENCY1] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 58.50 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Volt: 0.10

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether under frequency element 1 is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

269

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup [UNDER FREQUENCY1] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 58.50 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Volt: 0.10

Range

40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

Default 58.50

Step

0.01Hz

Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup.

[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay [UNDER FREQUENCY1] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 58.50 >Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Volt: 0.10

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 2.00

Step

0.01 sec

It sets the delay time to operate the underfrequency element.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time [UNDER FREQUENCY1] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 58.50 Time Delay: 2.00 >Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Volt: 0.10

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 2.00

Step

0.01 sec

It sets the time to reset the underfrequency element

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. Volt 0.00~1.40 xVT

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 58.50 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 >Min.Volt: 0.10

Range

[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]

element to operate.

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the underfrequency

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / UNDER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A

[UNDER FREQUENCY1] Pickup: 58.50 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Volt: 0.10 >Min. I: 60

Range

[0(OFF), 1~630:1 A]

underfrequency element to operate.

Default 60

Step

1A

Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

270

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

2) UNDER FREQUENCY 2 Setup The underfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the underfrequency 1.

8.1.18.2. Overfrequency (81O) In case that overfrequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain time, overfrequency element makes a trip operation. Overfrequency element is set in GROUP setting. If VTs is delta  connection VA-B is to be zero-crossing and if Y connection, VA-N.is to be zero-crossing. Overfrequency minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent mal-operation when recloser is closed locally or remotely. The overfrequency elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel.

1) OVER FREQUENCY 1 Setup The over frequency 1 should be enabled to followingsettings; GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /OVER FREQUENCY1 / Function [OVER FREQUENCY1] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 62.50 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min. Volt: 0.10

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether over frequency element 1 is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Pickup [OVER FREQUENCY1] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 62.50 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min. Volt: 0.10

Range

40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

Default 62.50

Step

0.01Hz

Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup.

[40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

271

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Time Delay [OVER FREQUENCY1] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 62.50 >Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min. Volt: 0.10

0.00~ 600.00 sec

Range

Default 2.00

Step

0.01 sec

Sets the delay time to operate the overfrequency element.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Reset Time [OVER FREQUENCY1] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 62.50 Time Delay: 2.00 >Reset Time: 2.00 Min. Volt: 0.10

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Range

Default 2.00

Step

0.01 sec

Sets the time to reset the overfrequency element.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. V 0.00~1.40 xVT

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Pickup: 62.50 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 >Min. Volt: 0.10 Min. I: 60

Range

[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]

element and overfrequency to operate.

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the overfrequency

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / OVER FREQUENCY1 / Min. I 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A

[OVER FREQUENCY1] Pickup: 62.50 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min. Volt: 0.10 >Min. I: 60

Range

[0(OFF),1~630:1A]

overfrequency element to operate.

Default 60

Step

1A

Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the

2) OVER FREQUENCY 2 Setup The overfrequency 2 settings process a very similar method to the overfrequency 1.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

272

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.18.3. Frequency Decay (81D) When frequency fluctuates due to unbalance between load and active power in power system, EVRC2A-NT offers frequency decay element in order to prevent unstable condition in the power system. The frequency decay elements are enabled in the group settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Frequency decay should be enabled as follows; GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Function [FREQUENCY DECAY] >Function: DISABLE Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Freq: 45.00

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

DISABLE ~

Set whether frequency decay element is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Pickup(Hz/sec) [FREQUENCY DECAY] Function: DISABLE >Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Freq: 45.00

Range

0.01~5.00 Hz/sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01Hz/sec

Enter the level of which the frequency decay element is to pickup.

[0.01~5.00:0.01Hz]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

273

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Time Delay [FREQUENCY DECAY] Function: DISABLE Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 >Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Freq: 45.00 [0.05~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.05~600.00sec

Default

2.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the delay time for frequency decay elements. According to pickup setting value, time window of frequency decay rate is changed described in followingtable.

Fault Trip Time of Frequency decay element is like below;

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time 0.05~600.00sec

[FREQUENCY DECAY] Function: DISABLE Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Time Delay: 2.00 >Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Freq: 45.00

Range

[0.05~600.00:0.01s]

configure reset time longer than time window.

Default 2.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the reset time of Frequency decay element pickup. It must

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Freq [FREQUENCY DECAY] Function: DISABLE Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 >Min.Freq: 50.00 [45.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

45.00~65.00 Hz

Range

Default 50.00

Step

0.01 Hz

Set the minimum frequency in order to operate frequency decay element. When frequency is bigger than setting value, it will be operated.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

274

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. Volt [FREQUENCY DECAY] Pickup(Hz/sec):1.00 Time Delay: 2.00 Reset Time: 2.00 Min.Freq: 45.00 >Min.Volt: 0.10 [0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range

0.00~1.40 xVT

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Set the minimum voltage in order to operate frequency decay element. Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting value, it will be operated.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Min. I [FREQUENCY DECAY] >Min.I: 60 Type : ABSOLUTE

Range

0(OFF), 1~630A

Default 60

Step

1A

Set the minimum current in order to operate frequency decay element. [0(OFF), 1~630A:1A]

Even if one of the three phases on source side is bigger than this setting value, it will be operated.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /FREQUENCY DECAY / Reset Time [FREQUENCY DECAY] Min.I: 60 >Type : ABSOLUTE

Range

INCREASE, DECREASE, ABSOLUTE

Default ABSOLUTE

Step

~

Set operation trend type of Frequency decay element. [INC/DEC/ABSOLUTE]

When INCREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay rate is increased. When DECREASE is configured, it operates when frequency decay rate is decreased. When ABSOLUTE is configured, it operates when absolute value of frequency decay rate is bigger than pickup setting value.

8.1.18.4. Frequency Auto Restoration (81R) The EVRC2A-NT has an auto restoration function that automatically trips the recloser when the frequency returns to normal status after a fault trip by the frequency element. Auto Restoration of frequency element should be enabled as follows; GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY /AUTO RESTORATION / Function [AUTO RESTORATION] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 59.98 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Min. Volt: 0.10

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether auto restoration for frequency element is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

275

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Pickup [AUTO RESTORATION] >Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 59.98 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Min. Volt: 0.10 [40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

Range

Default 59.98

Step

0.01Hz

Enter the level of which the Auto Restoration of frequency element is to pickup. Auto Restoration must be operated when the frequency on source side is higher than the setting value. However, all frequency elements should not be picked up at this time.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Time Delay [AUTO RESTORATION] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 59.98 >Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 Min. Volt: 0.10 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 30.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the time delay for this function. The recloser is automatically closed when the frequency on source side remains above the pickup level during setting time.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Reset Time [AUTO RESTORATION] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 59.98 Time Delay: 30.00 >Reset Time: 5 Min. Volt: 0.10 [1~100:1m]

Range

1~100min

Default 5

Step

1 min

Set the operation reset time of this function. The auto restoration function does not work if the voltage does not return to normal status during the setting time after tripping by the frequency function.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / FREQUENCY / AUTO RESTORATION / Min. Volt 0.00~1.40 xVT

[AUTO RESTORATION] Function: DISABLE Pickup: 59.98 Time Delay: 30.00 Reset Time: 5 >Min. Volt: 0.10

Range

[0.00~1.40:0.01 xVT]

frequency element.

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the Auto Restoration of

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

276

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.19. Power (32) In this section, forward power elements and directional power elements will be described. And the power setting menus are composed with 3 sub-menus as follows: [POWER] >1.FUNCTION 2.FORWARD POWER 3.DIRECTIONAL POWER

8.1.19.1. Common Setting for Power elements This setting applies to all power elements of forward power and directional power elements; GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / Function [FUNCTION] >Function: DISABLE BLK After RS: 5.00

DISABLE, TR, AL, TR&AL

Range

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set the function of power elements as enable or disable. [OFF,TR,AL,TR&AL]

If function = DISABLE, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip(TR), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip condition, the device trips. If function = Alarm(AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a alarm condition, the device gives the alarm. If function = Trip&Alarm(TR&AL), the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a trip and alarm condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / BLK After CL [FUNCTION] >Function: DISABLE BLK After CL: 5.00

Range

0.02~600.00 sec

Default 5.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the Block Time After Close for power elements. [0.02~600.00:0.01s]

To prevent malfunction of power elements by inrush current incurred at the restoration of load supply, set the time that each power element’s operation is suppressed after the restoration of load supply. After close opration, all function for power elements are blocked during this set time.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

277

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.19.2. Forward Power(32FP) EVRC2A-NT provides the two of the Forward Power (32FP) elements. If three phase active power is kept above the pickup level for a certain time. Three phase active power is calculated as below, and it operates only about the forward (positive) active power.  WYE VT Connection Type

 DELTA VT Connection Type

*. Note )

Figure 8-17. Forward Power(32FP) Elements Characteristic

The forward power should be enabled to followingsettings; GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Pickup1 [FORWARD POWER] >Pickup1: 0.00 Time Delay1: 5.00 Pickup2: 0.00 Time Delay2: 5.00

Range

0.00~300.00 MW

Default 0.00

Step

0.01

Set the pickup level of forward power element 1 0(OFF),0.00~300.00MW

*. NOTE ) Pickup2 setting is same as Pickup1 setting above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

278

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / FORWARD POWER /Time Delay1 [FORWARD POWER] Pickup1: 0.00 >Time Delay1: 5.00 Pickup2: 0.00 Time Delay2: 5.00

Range

0.02~600.00 sec

Default 5.00

Step

0.01

Set each time delay of forward power element 1. [0.02~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

8.1.19.3. Directional Power(32P) EVRC2A-NT has two directional power(32P) elements. If measured three phase power is kept above the pickup level for a certain time and measured phasor angle of the power is located on operation area, the element are operated.

Figure 8-18. Directional Power(32P) Elements Characteristic

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

279

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

The direction power should be enabled to followingsettings; GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Min.Power1 [DIRECTION POWER] >Min.Power1: OFF Angle1: 0.00 Time Delay1: 0.00 Min.Power2: OFF Angle2: 0.00

Range

0(OFF), -300.00~300.00 MW

Default 0(OFF)

Step

0.01 MW

Set the minimum power level for directional power element 1.

-300.00~+300.00:0.01

*. NOTE ) Min.Power2 setting is same as Min.Power1 setting above. GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER /Angle 1 [DIRECTION POWER] Min.Power1: OFF >Angle1: 0.00 Time Delay1: 0.00 Min.Power2: OFF Angle2: 0.00

Range

0.00~359.99 degree

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 degree

Set torque degree for directional power element 1.

0.00~359.99:0.01deg

*. NOTE ) Angle2 setting is same as Angle1 setting above. GROUP # / RECLOSER / POWER / DIRECTION POWER / Time Delay 1 [DIRECTION POWER] Min.Power1: OFF Angle1: 0.00 >Time Delay1: 1.00 Min.Power2: OFF Angle2: 0.00

Range

0.02~600.00 sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set time delay for directional power element 1.

[0.02~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) Time Delay2 setting is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

280

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.20. Demand (49) EVRC2A-NT has five types for demand detect elements.When Demand currnet or demand power over the detect level is maintained a constant time during the detect element activation, this element is detected. The detect level and delay time can be set individually per phase current, ground current, negative sequence current, active power and reactive power elements. And the demand current menu is composed with 5 sub-menus as follows: [DEMAND] >1.PHASE 2.GROUND 3.NEG SEQ’ 4.ACTIVE POWER 5.REACTIVE POWER

8.1.20.1. Phase Demand Current (49P) Phase demand current element setting items are same as following; GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE /Function [PHASE] >Function: DISABLE Pickup: 500 Time Delay: 10.00 Demand Type:THERMAL Thermal Interval:15

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether phase demand current element is used or not.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Pickup [PHASE] Function: DISABLE >Pickup: 500 Time Delay: 10.00 Demand Type:THERMAL Thermal Interval:15

Range

10~1600A

Default 500

Step

1A

Set the pickup level of the phase demand current element

[10~1600:1 A]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

281

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Time Delay [PHASE] Pickup: 500 >Time Delay: 10.00 Demand Type:THERMAL Thermal Interval:15 Block Interval: 15

0.00~600.00

Range

Default 10.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the time delay of the phase demand current element

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Demand Type THERMAL, BLOCK

[PHASE] Pickup: 500 Time Delay: 10.00 >Demand Type:THERMAL Thermal Interval:15 Block Interval: 15

Range

[THERMAL/BLOCK]

element.

Default THERMAL

Step

~

Set the type of arithmetic operation for the phase demand current

GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Thermal Interval 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min

[PHASE] Pickup: 500 Time Delay: 10.00 Demand Type:THERMAL >Thermal Interval:15 Block Interval: 15

Range

[5/10/15/20/30/60m]

is seleted for arithmetic operation.

Default 15

Step

~

Set the interval of the phase demand current element when thermal type

GROUP # / RECLOSER / DEMAND / PHASE / Block Interval 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min

[PHASE] Pickup: 500 Time Delay: 10.00 Demand Type:THERMAL Thermal Interval:15 >Block Interval: 15

Range

[5/10/15/20/30/60m]

is seleted for arithmetic operation.

Default 15

Step

~

Set the interval of the phase demand current element when block type

8.1.20.2. Ground Demand Current (49G) Ground demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current element.

8.1.20.3. Negative Sequence Demand Current (49Q) Negative sequence demand current element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

282

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.20.4. ACTIVE POWER Setup Active demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current element.

8.1.20.5. REACTIVE POWER Setup Reactive demand power element settings process is similar method to the phase demand current element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

283

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.21. Z0 Admittance (21YN) High Impedance Fault occurs when the power lines come into contact with the earth. Due to the high fault resistance of the contact earth, the magnitude of the fault current becomes very low. Magnitude of the fault current varies depending on the condition of the earth. Fault current is not generated when the line comes in contact with dry sand or asphalt making the fault detection very difficult. However, high impedance fault detection is inevitably required because of the risk of electric shock or fire caused by arcing due to fault current flowing into the earth when the line comes in contact with the earth. It is easy to detect high impedance faults using Z0 admittance element provided by the EVRC2ANT. This function is set in Primary or Alternate setting group and "PROTECTION ENABLED" LED on the user interface panel must be ON for operation. Furthermore, this function does not work during cold load pickup durations. This Z0 admittance element is applicable to high-resistance grounding systems, non-grounding systems, and compensating grounding systems. Neutral admittance uses the neutral conductance (real part of the neutral admittance) and the neutral susceptance (imaginary part of the neutral admittance) and the protection function is activated when the neutral voltage or the neutral current is above the pickup value. When the measured neutral admittance value is greater than the set value, the trip operation is performed. The trip operating zone can be set using Operational Type, Directional Type, Up Susceptance, Down Susceptance, Right Conductance, and Left Conductance setting values. Particularly, the shape of the operating zone is determined according to the Operational Type and Directional Type settings, as shown in “Figure 8-19. Z0 Admittance Operating Zone”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

284

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Directional Type Forward B

Reverse

0

None (Bidirectional)

B0

B0

G

G0

G0

B

Operational Type

B0

B0

G0

B0

G0

B0

B0

G0

G&B

G0

G0

B0

G0

GRight : Right Conductance

BUp : Up Susceptance

GLeft : Left Conductance

BDown : Down Susceptance

G0

Figure 8-19. Z0 Admittance Operating Zone

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

285

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Z0 admittance element setting items are same as following; GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Function [Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Function: DISABLE Type : G&B Direction: NONE Min. Isef: 1.0 Min. 3V0 : 0.10

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether to use Z0 admittance element.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Type [Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Function: DISABLE >Type : G&B Direction: NONE Min. Isef: 1.0 Min. 3V0 : 0.10 [G&B/G/B]

Range

G, B, G&B

Default G&B

Step

~

Select the operational type of Z0 admittance element. G&B: Determines the operating zone by Conductance (real part of admittance) and Susceptance (imaginary part of admittance) G: Determines the operating zone by Conductance (real part of admittance). B: Determines the operating zone by Susceptance (imaginary part of admittance).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

286

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Direction [Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Function: DISABLE >Type : G&B >Direction: NONE Min. Isef: 1.0 Min. 3V0 : 0.10 [NONE/FOR/REV]

NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE

Range

Default NONE

Step

~

Select the directional type of Z0 admittance element. NONE − When G&B and G type, it operates if the Conductance is out of the Right Conductance and Left Conductance setting. − When G&B and B type, it operates if the Susceptance is out of the Up Susceptance and Down Susceptance settings. FORWARD − When G&B and G type, it operates if the Conductance is out of the Right Conductance settings. − When G&B and B type, it operates if the Susceptance is out of the Up Susceptance settings. REVERSE − When G&B and G type, it operates if the Conductance is out of the Left Conductance settings. When G&B and B type, it operates if the Susceptance is out of the Down Susceptance settings.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Min. Isef 0.1 ~ 160.0 A

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Function: DISABLE >Type : G&B >Direction: NONE >Min. Isef: 1.0 Min. 3V0 : 0.10

Range

[0.1~160.0:0.1A]

element.

Default 1.0

Step

0.1 A

Set the minimum sensitive earth current to operate Z0 admittance

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Min. 3V0 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Function: DISABLE >Type : G&B >Direction: NONE >Min. Isef: 1.0 >Min. 3V0 : 0.10

Range

[0.10~14.00:0.01xVT]

element.

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Set the minimum zero sequence voltage to operate Z0 admittance

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

287

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Time Delay [Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Direction: NONE >Min. Isef: 1.0 >Min. 3V0 : 0.10 >Time Delay: 2.00 >Reset Time: 0.10 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 2.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the trip delay time of Z0 admittance element. Z0 admittance must be maintained in the operating zone for the set time to perform trip operation.

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Reset Time [Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Direction: NONE >Min. Isef: 1.0 >Min. 3V0 : 0.10 >Time Delay: 2.00 >Reset Time: 0.10

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 sec

Set the reset time of Z0 admittance element.

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Con(G)-Right 0.02 ~ 500.00 mS

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Reset Time: 0.10 >Con(G)-Right: 1.00 >Con(G)-Left : 1.00 >Sus(B)-Up : 1.00 >Sus(B)-Down : 1.00

Range

[0.02~500.00:0.1ms]

Z0 admittance element.

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 mS

Set the Right(Forward) Conductance to determine the operating zone of

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Con(G)-Left 0.02 ~ 500.00 mS

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Reset Time: 0.10 >Con(G)-Right: 1.00 >Con(G)-Left : 1.00 >Sus(B)-Up : 1.00 >Sus(B)-Down : 1.00

Range

[0.02~500.00:0.1ms]

Z0 admittance element.

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 mS

Set the Left(Reverse) Conductance to determine the operating zone of

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Sus(B)-Up 0.02 ~ 500.00 mS

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Reset Time: 0.10 >Con(G)-Right: 1.00 >Con(G)-Left : 1.00 >Sus(B)-Up : 1.00 >Sus(B)-Down : 1.00

Range

[0.02~500.00:0.1ms]

Z0 admittance element.

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 mS

Set the Up(Forward) Susceptance to determine the operating zone of

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

288

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / RECLOSER / Z0 ADMITTANCE / Sus(B)-Down 0.02 ~ 500.00 mS

[Z0 ADMITTANCE] >Reset Time: 0.10 >Con(G)-Right: 1.00 >Con(G)-Left : 1.00 >Sus(B)-Up : 1.00 >Sus(B)-Down : 1.00

Range

[0.02~500.00:0.1ms]

Z0 admittance element.

Default 1.00

Step

0.01 mS

Set the Down(Reverse) Susceptance to determine the operating zone of

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

289

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.22. Hotline Tag When “HOT LINE TAG” LED is ON in the front panel, the time overcurrent elements are operated with the setting value of this menu(However, this setting is also applied for sensitive earth faults). Also, Lockout with 1 time trip even the reclosing function is activated. The Hot Line Tag function is composed of phase, ground, SEF and negative sequence overcurrent elements with T-C curves for Hot Line Tag function only. Hotline Tag menu is composed with 4 sub-menus as follows;

[HOTLINE TAG] >1.PHASE 2.GROUND 3.SEF 4.NEG SEQ’

8.1.22.1. PHASE In this menu, T-C curve of phase time overcurrent elememts applied in Hotline Tag function is set. GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Curve [PHASE] >Curve: [US-NI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST [curves: total 62]

Range

A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S (Total 62 curves)

Default US-NI

Step

~

Set T-C curve of hot line tag function for phase time overcurrent elements. Applicable curve ragne refers to “Table 8-2. Recloser timecurrent operation characteristic setting range”.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Time Dial 0.05 ~ 15.00

[PHASE] Curve: [US-NI] >Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST

Range

[0.05~15.00:0.01]

changes the slop of a curve.

Default 1.00

Step

0.01

Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

290

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Time Add. 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

[PHASE] Curve: [US-NI] Time Dial: 1.00 >Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST

Range

[0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

More delays due to this set time including its own delay time.

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Adding a time onto a set curve.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / M.R.T [PHASE] Curve: [US-NI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00 Reset Method: INST [0.00~10.00:0.01 s]

Range

0.00 ~ 10.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01 sec

Minimum Response Time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time, tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be cooperated with other protection device or fuse.

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / PHASE / Reset Method [PHASE] Curve: [US-NI] Time Dial: 1.00 Time Add.: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]

Range

INST, LINEAR

Default INST

Step

~

In case that current level is decreased under Pickup level, Phase cold load pickup element is reset.  INST : After 1 cycle, Reset.  LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

8.1.22.2. GROUND This menu sets the T-C curve of the ground time overcurrent elememts applied in the Hotline Tag function. The setting items are the same as the PHASE menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

291

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.22.3. SEF This menu sets the time delay for sensitive earth fault in Hotline Tag function. GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ HOTLINE TAG / SEF / Time Delay [SEF] >Time Delay:

Range 10.00

0.00~600.00 sec

Default 10.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set the time delay of sensitive earth fault in Hotline Tag function. [0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

8.1.22.4. NEG SEQ’ This menu sets the T-C curve of the negative sequence time overcurrent elememts applied in the Hotline Tag function. The setting items are the same as the PHASE menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

292

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.23. User Curve - Time Overcurrent Curves The EVRC2A-NT has a total of 62 kinds of standard curves: ANSI / IEEE curves, IEC curves, US curves and Definite time curves, KEPCO ES curves, KERI curves, 4 user-defined curves, 3 fuse curves, 32 non standard curves. According to Standard ANSI / IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3, tirp operation times and reset times can be defined as follows. The operation times and reset times are defined as follows : US Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA ANSI/IEEE Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA IEC Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA ES Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA USER-DEFINED Trip Time(Sec) = TD × (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA RESET TIME Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2)) Table 8-3. Curve Factor TD

Time dial

TA

Time adder

α, β, γ

Characteristic constant

M

Multiples of pickup current

Rt

Reset characteristic constant NOTE : “Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15㎸ or 27㎸, otherwise which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

293

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.23.1. User-Defined Curves The EVRC2A-NT supports 4 user-defined curves for user to implement their own curve according to their requirement. The user can define the aforementioned characteristic constant of trip operation time and reset time equation in 4 user-defined curves. [USER CURVE] >1.USER CURVE1 2.USER CURVE2 3.USER CURVE3 4.USER CURVE4

1) USER CURVE1 Setup GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a [USER CURVE 1] >Factor a: 59.5000 Factor b: 2.0200 Factor r: 1.8000 Factor rt: 59.5000

Range

0.0000 ~ 150.9998

Default 59.5000

Step

0.0001

User defined curve factor α [0~150.9998:0.0001]

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b [USER CURVE 1] Factor a: 59.5000 >Factor b: 2.0000 Factor r: 1.8000 Factor rt: 59.5000

Range

0.0000 ~ 150.9998

Default 2.0000

Step

0.0001

User defined curve factor β [0~150.9998:0.0001]

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r [USER CURVE 1] Factor a: 59.5000 Factor b: 2.0200 >Factor r: 1.8000 Factor rt: 59.5000

Range

0.0000 ~ 150.9998

Default 1.8000

Step

0.0001

User defined curve factor γ [0~150.9998:0.0001]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

294

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP #/ RECLOSER/ USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt [USER CURVE 1] Factor a: 59.5000 Factor b: 2.0200 Factor r: 1.8000 >Factor rt: 59.5000

0.0000 ~ 150.9998

Range

Default 59.5000

Step

0.0001

User defined curve factor rt [0~150.9998:0.0001]

2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 Setup USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

295

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.23.2. Standard Curves Coefficients Table 8-4. US Curve Curves

α

β

γ

Rt

Normally Inverse

5.95

2.0

0.18

5.95

Very Inverse

3.88

2.0

0.0963

3.55

Extremely Inverse

5.67

2.0

0.0352

5.67

Short Time Inverse

0.00342

0.02

0.00262

0.323

Short Time Very Inverse

1.9925

2.0

0.0475

1.992

Curves

α

β

γ

Rt

Normally Inverse

0.1400

0.0200

0.0

9.700

Very Inverse

13.500

1.000

0.0

13.500

Extremely Inverse

80.000

2.000

0.0

80.000

Long Time Inverse

135.000

1.000

0.0

135.00

Short Time Inverse

0.0500

0.0400

0.0

0.500

Curves

α

β

γ

Rt

Normally Inverse

0.011

0.02

0.042

9.000

Very Inverse

3.985

1.95

0.1084

3.985

Extremely Inverse

2.82

2.00

0.01217

2.91

Long Time Very Inverse

15.94

1.95

0.4336

15.94

Curves

α

β

γ

Rt

Normally Inverse

0.0515

0.02

0.114

4.85

Very Inverse

19.61

2.0

0.491

21.6

Extremely Inverse

28.2

2.0

0.1217

29.1

Curves

α

β

γ

Rt

Definite Time 1sec

0.0

-

1.0

1.0

Definite Time 10sec

0.0

-

10.0

10.0

Table 8-5. IEC Curve

Table 8-6. ES Curve

Table 8-7. ANSI/IEEE Curve

Table 8-8. Definite Time

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

296

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.23.3. Non Standard Curves Table 8-9. Non Standard Curves McGraw-Edison recloser curves Phase

Ground

Old

New

Old

New

A

101

1

102

B

117

2

135

C

133

3

140

D

116

4

106

E

132

5

114

K

162

6

136

L

107

7

152

M

118

8

113

N

104

8*

111

P

115

9

131

R

105

11

141

T

161

13

142

V

137

14

119

W

138

15

112

Y

120

16

139

Z

134

18

151

Table 8-10. KEPCO(Korea) Curvers Curves N1, N2, N3, N4

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

297

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.23.4. Fuse Curves 1) RI Curve Trip Time “RI” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with mechanical relay. When “RI” curve is applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.

Trip Time 

Here,

1 0.339  0.236

I Is 

TD is set time dial, Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element. I is actual fault current.

2) HR Curve Trip Time “HR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “HR” curve is applied, time overcurrent element is operated by following formula.

Trip Time  10 Here,

I   log 2    ( 3.832)  3.66  Is 



1 0.1

TD is set time dial, Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element. I is actual fault current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

298

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

3) FR Curve Trip Time “FR” curve is a special curve to be used in conjunction with the fuse. When “FR” is applied, inverse protection element is operated by following formula.

 I  log    ( 7.16 )  3.0  Is 

Trip Time  10

Trip Time  10

 I  log    ( 5.4 )  2.47  Is 

Trip Time  10

Here,



1 0.1

, when 1.2 



1 0.1

, when 2.0 

 I  log    ( 4.24 ) 1.98  Is 



1 0.1

I  2.0 IS

··formula (1)

I  2.66 ·formula (2) IS

, when 2.66 

I IS

··formula (3)

TD is set time dial, Is is pickup current for time overcurrent element. I is actual fault current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

299

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.23.5. Curves Table 8-11. Curve List No

Curve

No

Curve

No

Curve

1

A(101)

22

3(140)

43

ES-NI

2

B(117)

23

4(106)

44

ES-VI

3

C(133)

24

5(114)

45

USER-1

4

D(116)

25

6(136)

46

USER-2

5

E(132)

26

7(152)

47

USER-3

6

IEC-EI

27

8(113)

48

USER-4

7

K(162)

28

8*(111)

49

DEF-1S

8

L(107)

29

9(131)

50

DEF-10S

9

M(118)

30

11(141)

51

IEEE-NI

10

N(104)

31

13(142)

52

IEEE-VI

11

IEC-NI

32

14(119)

53

IEEE-EI

12

P(115)

33

15(112)

54

US-STI

13

R(105)

34

16(139)

55

US-STVI

14

T(161)

35

18(151)

56

IEC-LTI

15

V(137)

36

N1

57

IEC-STI

16

IEC-VI

37

N2

58

ES-LTVI

17

W(138)

38

N3

59

ES-EI

18

Y(120)

39

N4

60

RI

19

Z(134)

40

US-NI

61

HR

20

1(102)

41

US -VI

62

FR

21

2(135)

42

US -EI

Table 8-12. Curve Characteristics *. Curve time is Clearing Time. *. Operation accuracy is +/-5% or +/-10㎳.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

300

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : US NORMALLY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

15.00 13.00

2

11.00

2

9.00 7.00 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

5.00 4.00 3.00

0.5 0.4

Time(Second)

0.5 0.4

2.00

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

1.00

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.5

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

0.01 800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.02

600

0.02

500

0.03

400

0.04

0.03

300

0.05

0.04

200

0.05

100

Time(Second)

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

1) US Nermally Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-20. US Normally Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

301

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

2) US Very Inverse Curves

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : US VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3 2 15.00 13.00 11.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

9.00 7.00

0.5

5.00

0.5

0.4

4.00

0.4

0.3

3.00

0.3

0.2

2.00

0.2

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

1.00

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.05

0.5

0.05

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

0.01 600

0.01 500

0.02

400

0.02

300

0.03

200

0.04

0.03

100

0.04

Time(Second)

Time(Second)

2

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-21. US Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

302

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : US EXTREMELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

15.00 13.00

0.5

0.5

11.00

0.4

0.4

9.00

0.3

0.3

7.00

0.2

Time(Second)

0.2

5.00 4.00 3.00

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

2.00

0.05

0.05 1.00

0.04

0.04

0.03

0.03 0.5

0.02

0.02

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

0.01 200

0.01 100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

3) US Extremely Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-22. US Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

303

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : US SHORT TIME INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

15.00 13.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

11.00 9.00 7.00

0.5 0.4

0.5 0.4

5.00

0.3

0.3

4.00 3.00

0.2

Time(Second)

0.2

2.00 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

1.00

0.05

0.05

0.04

0.04

0.5

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

0.01 600

0.01 500

0.02

400

0.02

300

0.03

200

0.03

100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

4) US Short Time Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-23. US Short Time Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

304

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : US SHORT TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

15.00 13.00 11.00

0.5

0.5

9.00

0.4

0.4

7.00

0.3

Time(Second)

0.3

5.00 0.2

0.2

4.00 3.00

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

2.00

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.05

1.00

0.05

0.04

0.04

0.03

0.03 0.5

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

0.01 400

0.01 300

0.02

200

0.02

100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

5) US Short Time Very Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-24. US Short Time Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

305

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC NORMALLY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

0.4 0.3

0.5

Time(Second)

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.2

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.05

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

0.01 800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.02

600

0.02

500

0.03

400

0.04

0.03

300

0.05

0.04

200

0.05

100

Time(Second)

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

6) IEC Normally Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-25. IEC Normally Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

306

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

0.5

0.5

1

0.4

0.4

0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

0.3 0.2

Time(Second)

0.3 0.2

0.4 0.3

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.2

0.05

0.05 0.1

0.04

0.04

0.03

0.03 0.05

0.02

0.02

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

0.01 200

0.01 100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

7) IEC Very Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-26. IEC Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

307

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1,000 900 800 700 600 500 400

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

1,000 900 800 700 600 500 400

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

300

300

200

200

100 90 80 70 60 50

100 90 80 70 60 50

40

40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6 5

10 9 8 7 6 5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05

1 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

0.04

0.04

0.4

0.03

Time(Second)

0.03

0.3 0.02

0.02

0.2

0.1 0.05

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

0.01 200

0.01 100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

8) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-27. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

308

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1,000 900 800 700 600 500 400

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

1,000 900 800 700 600 500 400

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

300

300

200

200

100 90 80 70 60 50

100 90 80 70 60 50

40

40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6 5

10 9 8 7 6 5

1 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4

4 3 2

4 3 2

Time(Second)

0.3 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

0.2

0.1

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3 0.05

0.2

0.2

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

0.01 2k

0.01 800 900 1k

0.02

700

0.02

600

0.03

500

0.04

0.03

400

0.04

300

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05

200

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05

100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

9) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-28. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

309

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

1,000 900 800 700 600 500 400

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

1,000 900 800 700 600 500 400

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

300

300

200

200

100 90 80 70 60 50

100 90 80 70 60 50

40

40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6 5

10 9 8 7 6 5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

Time(Second)

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3 0.2

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05

1 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4

0.3

0.3

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.05

0.2

0.2

0.04

0.04 0.1

0.03

0.03

0.02

0.02 0.05

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

0.01 200

0.01 100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

10) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-29. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

310

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

11) ES Normally Inverse Curves

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ES NORMALLY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5 4

3

15.00 13.00

3

2

11.00

2

9.00 7.00 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

5.00 4.00 3.00

0.5

Time(Second)

0.5

0.4

0.4

2.00

0.3

0.3

0.2

1.00

0.2

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.5

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

0.01 800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.02

600

0.02

500

0.03

400

0.04

0.03

300

0.05

0.04

200

0.05

100

Time(Second)

4

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-30. ES Normally Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

311

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

12) ES Very Inverse Curves

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ES VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3 2 15.00 13.00 11.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

9.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

7.00 5.00

0.5

0.5

4.00

0.4

0.4

3.00

0.3

0.3

2.00

0.2

0.2

1.00

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.5

0.05

0.05

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.01 600

0.02

500

0.02

400

0.03

300

0.04

0.03

200

0.04

100

Time(Second)

Time(Second)

2

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-31. ES Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

312

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ES EXTREMELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

Time(Second)

0.3 15.00 13.00

0.2

0.2

11.00 9.00 7.00

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

5.00 4.00

0.05

0.05

3.00

0.04 0.03

0.04 0.03

2.00

0.02

0.02 1.00

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

0.01 3k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

2k

0.5

0.01 100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

13) ES Extremely Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-32. ES Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

313

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ES LONG TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

15.00 13.00

10 9 8 7 6

5

11.00

5

4

9.00

4

3

7.00

3

5.00

2

2

4.00 3.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

2.00

0.5

0.5

1.00

0.4

Time(Second)

0.4

0.3

0.3 0.5

0.2

0.2

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

0.01 3k

0.01 2k

0.02

800 900 1k

0.02

700

0.03

600

0.04

0.03

500

0.05

0.04

400

0.05

300

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

200

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

100

Time(Second)

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

14) ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-33. ES Long Time Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

314

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

15) IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEEE NORMALLY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

15.00 13.00

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

11.00 9.00 7.00

5

5 5.00

4

4

4.00

3

3

3.00 2 2.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1.00

0.5

Time(Second)

0.5 0.5

0.4

0.4

8k 9k 10k

0.01 7k

0.01 6k

0.02

5k

0.02

4k

0.03

3k

0.04

0.03

2k

0.05

0.04

800 900 1k

0.05

700

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

600

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

500

0.2

400

0.2

300

0.3

200

0.3

100

Time(Second)

2

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-34. IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

315

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

16) IEEE Very Inverse Curves

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEEE VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

15.00 13.00 11.00

5

5

9.00

4

4

7.00

3

3 5.00 4.00

2

3.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

2.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

0.5

1.00

0.5

0.4

Time(Second)

0.4

0.3

0.3 0.5

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

0.01 5k

0.01 4k

0.02

3k

0.02

2k

0.03

800 900 1k

0.04

0.03

700

0.05

0.04

600

0.05

500

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

400

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

300

0.2

200

0.2

100

Time(Second)

2

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-35. IEEE Very Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

316

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : US EXTREMELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3 15.00 13.00

2

2

11.00 9.00 7.00

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

5.00 4.00

0.5

0.5

3.00

0.4 0.3

Time(Second)

0.4 0.3

2.00

0.2

0.2 1.00

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.5

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

0.01 800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.02

600

0.02

500

0.03

400

0.04

0.03

300

0.05

0.04

200

0.05

100

Time(Second)

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

17) IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-36. IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

317

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : DEFINITE TIME 1 sec, 10 sec CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

DEF-10S

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

DEF-1S

0.01 8k 9k 10k

0.01 7k

0.02

6k

0.02

5k

0.03

4k

0.04

0.03

3k

0.05

0.04

2k

0.05

800 900 1k

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

700

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

600

0.2

500

0.2

400

0.3

300

0.4

0.3

200

0.5

0.4

100

0.5

Time(Second)

Time(Second)

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

18) Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-37. Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

318

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

7k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

N2

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

Time(Second)

0.2 N4

N3 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

N1

0.05

0.05

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.01 600

0.02

500

0.02

400

0.03

300

0.04

0.03

200

0.04

100

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

19) KEPRI Curves(N1, N2, N3, N4)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-38. KEPRI Curves (N1, N2, N3, N4)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

319

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

8k 9k 10k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : A, B, C, D, E CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

Time(Second)

C 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

D

0.05

A

0.04

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

B E

0.05 0.04

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

0.01 600

0.01 500

0.02

400

0.02

300

0.03

200

0.03

100

Time(Second)

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

20) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-39. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

320

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

8k 9k 10k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : KP, L, M, N CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

N

K

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

L

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

M

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

0.01 800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.02

600

0.02

500

0.03

400

0.04

0.03

300

0.05

0.04

200

0.05

100

Time(Second)

Time(Second)

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

21) Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-40. Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

321

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

8k 9k 10k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : P, R, T, V CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

V

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

T

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

P

0.05

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

R

0.05

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.01 600

0.02

500

0.02

400

0.03

300

0.04

0.03

200

0.04

100

Time(Second)

Time(Second)

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

22) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-41. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

322

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

8k 9k 10k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : P, R, T, V CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

V

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

T

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

P

0.05

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

R

0.05

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.01 600

0.02

500

0.02

400

0.03

300

0.04

0.03

200

0.04

100

Time(Second)

Time(Second)

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

23) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-42. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

323

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

8k 9k 10k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

3

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

2

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.05

5

4

1

0.05

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

0.01 700

0.01 600

0.02

500

0.02

400

0.03

300

0.04

0.03

200

0.04

100

Time(Second)

Time(Second)

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

24) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-43. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

324

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

7k

6k

5k

8k 9k 10k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

7

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

9

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

8

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

8*

0.05

0.05

6

0.04

0.04

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

0.01 600

0.01 500

0.02

400

0.02

300

0.03

200

0.03

100

Time(Second)

Time(Second)

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

25) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-44. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

325

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

7k

6k

5k

4k

8k 9k 10k

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

11

9 8 7 6

9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

18

14

0.4

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

Time(Second)

0.5 0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

13 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

15

16

0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.05

0.05

17

0.04

0.04

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

0.01 600

0.01 500

0.02

400

0.02

300

0.03

200

0.03

100

Time(Second)

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

26) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-45. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

326

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

100 90 80 70 60

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

27) Fuse Curves

100 90 80 70 60

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : FUSE (RI, HR, FR) CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

50 40

50 40

30

30

20

20

10 9 8 7 6

10 9 8 7 6

5

5

4

4

RI

3

3 2

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06

0.05

0.05

0.04

0.04

0.03

0.03

0.02

Time(Second)

0.02

HR

FR

8k 9k 10k

7k

6k

5k

4k

3k

2k

800 900 1k

700

600

500

400

300

0.01 200

0.01 100

Time(Second)

2

PERCENT OF PICKUP CURRENT

Figure 8-46. Fuse Curves (RI, HR, FR)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

327

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.1.24. Others 8.1.24.1. Sequence Coordination When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, EVRC2A-NT contains Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in both of Back-up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination feature is activated only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up Recloser detects a fault current. Following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature. The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip operations and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected in series. The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series. To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100 ms) should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to those of Down-line Reclosers. The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all Downline Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser during the reclose operation of Down-lines. The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled as follows; GROUP # / RECLOSER / OTHERS / Seq' Coordinate [OTHERS] >Seq’ Coordinate:OFF L.O Priority:GROUND

Range

OFF, ON

Default OFF

Step

~

Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary [OFF/ON]

operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are connected in series. If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = ON, the feature is operational.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

328

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

As shown in “Figure 8-47. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”, if Sequence Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in distribution systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements. During the count at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by TRIP with Down-line Recloser , the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is increased one step. Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence Coordination function can not be operated.

Increase Trip Counter without Trip

Starting Reset Time Counter Close Back Up

EVR 1

Down line

EVR 2

Open

Close Lockout Status Open Time

Faulted

Figure 8-47. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram

8.1.24.2. Other settings GROUP # / RECLOSER / OTHERS / L.O Priority [OTHERS] Seq’ Coordinate:OFF >L.O Priority:GROUND

Range

PHASE, GROUND

Default GROUND

Step

~

Set the Lockout priority [PHASE,GROUND]

PHASE : Phase prior GROUND: Ground prior

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

329

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2. Sectionalizer This menu sets the auto sectionalizer function via fault indication. If the control type of ETR-300R is set to 'SECTIONALIZER' mode, move the functions of this menu. Place the curser on “SECTIONALIZER” in GROUP# menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu is sub-divided as follow; [SECTIONALIZER] >1.PICKUP CURRENT >2.INRUSH TIME >3.AUTO SECTION

8.2.1. FI Pickup Current This menu sets fault pickup current for fault indication (FI). Fault pikcup current is individually set for Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth Fault and Negative sequence current. If the fault current disappears in the dead line after the current is maintained above the pickup current in the live line, it indicates a fault indication. GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase [PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 SEF: OFF NEG Seq’: OFF [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Range

0(OFF), 10~1600A

Default 500

Step

1

Set the minimum pickup current to detect phase fault. The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON for a phase fault indication (FI).

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground [PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 500 >Ground: 250 SEF: OFF NEG Seq’: OFF [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Range

0(OFF), 10~1600A

Default 250

Step

1

Set the minimum pickup current to detect ground fault. The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' and 'GROUND ENABLED' LEDs on the front panel must be ON for a ground fault indication (FI).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

330

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / SEF [PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 600 Ground: 250 >SEF: OFF >NEG Seq’: OFF [0(OFF),0.1~160.0A]

Range

0(OFF), 0.1~160.0A

Default 600

Step

1

Set the minimum pickup current to detect sensitive earth fault. The 'PROTECTION ENABLED', 'GROUND ENABLED' and 'SEF ENABLED' LEDs on the front panel must be ON for a sensitive earth fault indication (FI).

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq’ [PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 600 Ground: 250 SEF: OFF >NEG Seq’: OFF [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Range

0(OFF), 10~1600A

Default 250

Step

1

Set the minimum pickup current to detect negative sequency fault. The 'PROTECTION ENABLED' LED on the front panel must be ON for a negative sequential fault indication (FI).

8.2.2. Inrush Time EVRC2A-NT has inrush restraint function to prevent the malfunction by inrush current produced at the restoration of load supply. Inrush restraint function setting can be set separately in phase, ground, sensitive earth fault and negative sequence. During the inrush time after the restoration of load supply, FI(fault indicator) about phase, residual ground, ground and negative sequence is not detected. GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / INRUSH DURATION T / Phase [INRUSH DURATION T] >Phase: 2.00 Ground: 2.00 SEF: 2.00 Neg Seq’: 2.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

Range

0.00~600.00 sec

Default 2.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the block time for inrush current of phase.

*. NOTE ) Setting for Ground, SEF and Neg Seq’ are same as Phase setting above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

331

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.3. Auto Setction The purpose of using Auto Section function is to keep the normal operation by isolating Fault Area as to cooperate with Recloser or C/B when a fault has occurred. This function supports the following two types; 

Auto Sectionalizer(AS)  AS trips due to Fault current and Line Voltage.  When a fault has occurred in the load side of AS, C/B trips and High Voltage line becomes Dead line Voltage(DV). Due to the number of Count, AS trips(is opened).



Tie point Switch(TS)  TS is located at Open point and is used for bi-directional(reversed line direction) operation.  TS is operated due to Line Voltage.  Either Source side or Load side of TS, becomes Dead line Voltage(DV), TS operates(is closed) depending upon the number of count.  When the source side and Load side become Dead line Voltage(DV), TS is automatically opened.  TS must be cooperated with ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser.  To prevent further fault, TS shall be operated after ENTEC Sectionalizing Recloser trips and disconnects a fault area.  ETNEC Sectionalizing Recloser is automatically opened when Source side and Load side become Dead line Voltage(DV) and it has the automatic closing function called Looping control function When High Voltage line becomes Live line Voltage(LV).

Please refer to “8.2.3.2. Auto Section Application” for more detail information of Auto Sectionalizer function.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

332

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.3.1. Auto Sectionalizer Setup GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / Type Select [AUTO SECTION] >Type Select: OFF SEC Operate Cnt: 1 SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00 SEC Reset TD: 10.00 TIE Operate Cnt: 2 [OFF/SEC/TIE]

OFF, SEC, TIE

Range

Default OFF

Step

~

Select whether to use this function or not.  SEC : Select for Auto Sectionalizer.  TIE : Select for Tie point Switch.

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Operate Cnt [AUTO SECTION] Type Select: OFF >SEC Operate Cnt: 1 SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00 SEC Reset TD: 10.00 TIE Operate Cnt: 2 [1~5:1]

1 ~ 5 shot

Range

Default 1

Step

1 shot

Set the operation count of the Auto Sectionalizer.  After sensing a fault current, Live line becomes Dead line Voltage(DV), 1 is counted and sense another fault, the count accumulate as 2.  When the count reaches a set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is operated.  When the count is over the set value, “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer is reset and not operated.  Counter is reset by “SEC Oper’ TD” Timer or by manual closing.

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Oper’ TD [AUTO SECTION] Type Select: OFF SEC Operate Cnt: 1 >SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00 SEC Reset TD: 10.00 TIE Operate Cnt: 2 [0.00~600.00:0.01]

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Range

Default 0.00

Step

0.01

Set the open operation time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.  The timer is operated by “SEC Operate Cnt”, and after a set time, Auto Sectionalizer is opened.  The timer is reset if Live Line becomes LV during counting Time, and it is also reset when the counter is over “SEC Operate Cnt”set value.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

333

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / SEC Reset TD [AUTO SECTION] Type Select: OFF SEC Operate Cnt: 1 SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00 >SEC Reset TD: 10.00 TIE Operate Cnt: 2 [1.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range

1.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 10.00

Step

0.01

Set the reset time delay of the Auto Sectionalizer.  It is the Timer to reset a count value in “SEC Operate Cnt”.  When Auto Sectionalizer is closed, if Source side or Load side becomes Live Voltage (LV), Timer reset “Sec Oper’ Cnt”.

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Operate Cnt [AUTO SECTION] Type Select: OFF SEC Operate Cnt: 1 SEC Oper’ TD: 0.00 SEC Reset TD: 10.00 >TIE Operate Cnt: 2 [1~5:1]

Range

1~5

Default 2

Step

1

Set the close operation count of Tie Point Switch.  Source and Load side are Live Voltage status. When one of the sides becomes Dead line Voltage, it counts 1, and it repeats once again, it accumulates the count for 2.  The counter reaches a set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is operated.  The counter is over the set value, “TIE Close TD” Timer is reset and not operated.  The counter is reset by “TIE Reset TD” Timer or manual trip.  Dead line Voltage can be determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD” Timer is finished.

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Close TD [AUTO SECTION] >TIE Close TD: 30.00 TIE Open TD: 10.00 TIE Reset TD: 10.00 TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range

0.00~600.00

Default 30.00

Step

0.01

Set the close time delay of the Tie Point Switch.  The timer is operated due to “TIE Operate Cnt”, and after a set time, Tie Point Switch is closed.  During the counting, if Source and Load side become Live line Voltage or Dead line Voltage, the timer is reset. And when the counter is over a set value of “TIE Operate Cnt”, the timer is reset.  DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD” Timer is finished.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

334

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Open TD [AUTO SECTION] TIE Close TD: 30.00 >TIE Open TD: 10.00 TIE Reset TD: 10.00 TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range

0.00~600.00

Default 10.00

Step

0.01

Set the open time delay of Tie Point Switch.  The timer is operated when Source and Load sides become Dead line Voltage, and after a set time, Tie Point Switch is opened.  DV is determined after “TIE DL-VS TD” or “TIE DL-VL TD” Timer is finished.

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE Reset TD 100~600.00

[AUTO SECTION] TIE Close TD: 30.00 TIE Open TD: 10.00 >TIE Reset TD: 10.00 TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00

Range

[1.00~600.00:0.01 s]

 Timer is operated when Source side and Load side are all Live line

Default 10.00

Step

0.01

Set the reset time delay of Tie Point Switch.  It is the timer to reset a count value in “TIE Operate Cnt”. Voltage with Tie Point Switch opened, and it reset “TIE Operate Cnt”.

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE DL-VS TD [AUTO SECTION] TIE Close TD: 30.00 TIE Open TD: 10.00 TIE Reset TD: 10.00 >TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00

Range

0.00~600.00

Default 1.00

Step

0.01

Set deadline detection delay time of source side voltage. [0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

GROUP # / SECTIONALIZER / AUTO SECTION / TIE DL-VL TD [AUTO SECTION] TIE Close TD: 30.00 TIE Open TD: 10.00 TIE Reset TD: 10.00 TIE DL-VS TD: 1.00 >TIE DL-VL TD: 1.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01 s]

Range

0.00~600.00

Default 1.00

Step

0.01

Set deadline detection delay time of load side voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

335

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 8-48. Auto Sectionalizer Algorithm

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

336

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 8-49. Tie Algorithm

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

337

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.2.3.2. Auto Section Application 1) Auto Sectionalizer Loop Control Table 8-13. Auto Sectionalizer loop control SETTING

CB1

RC1

AS1

AS2

AS3

Type Select

-

-

SEC

SEC

SEC

Sec Oper’ Cnt

-

-

3

2

3

Sec RS Delay

-

-

10.00

10.00

10.00

-

0.00

0.00

0.00

-

-

-

-

-

-

SECTIONALIZER

Sec op Delay CB AND RECLOSER Operate count

2 Trip

4 Trip

Lockout

Lockout

*.NOTE ) CB(Circuit breaker), RC(Recloser), AS(Auto Sectionalizer)

Figure 8-50. Auto Sectionalizer loop control PRECAUTIN 1 for SETTING 1) AS is an automatic opening equipment when Dead Line Voltage. When “SEC Oper’ TD” time is provided, the opening time of AS shall be faster than RC1 or CB1 minimum 0.3 sec. 2) “SEC Oper’ TD” time of AS is better to set 0 second for Instantaneous Trip(Open). 3) Auto Sectionalizer Instantaneous Opening time : 1.PHASE DIFFERENCE 2.SYNCHRO’ CHECK 3.OPEN PHASE 4.LIVE LINE BLOCK 5.FAULT LOCATOR 6.LOAD CURR’ ALARM 7.POWER FACTOR

8.3.1. Phase Difference Place the curser on “PHASE DIFFERENCE” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. The EVRC2A-NT provides a phase difference element to check whether the source side and the load side are in the open state. If the difference in voltage magnitude, phase difference, and frequency difference between the source side and the load side deviate from the set value, it is determined that synchronization is inconsistent and a DIFFPT (Phase Different Timeout) event is registered. In the PLC configuration, manual close can be blocked by local or remote control in case of synchronization inconsistency (Manual close is blocked when default is not matched with synchronization) The phase difference element in following settings should be enabled. GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Function [PHASE DIFFERENCE] >Function: DISABLE Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Live Line Lv: 0.80 Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Max Angle Diff: 10

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

It decides whether to use Phase difference element.

[OFF/ON]

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Dead Line Lv [PHASE DIFFERENCE] Function: DISABLE >Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Live Line Lv: 0.80 Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Max Angle Diff: 10 [0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.50

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the dead line maximum voltage for phase difference Used to Prevent the phase difference element for voltage below this level.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

347

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Live Line Lv 0.10~1.40 xVT

[PHASE DIFFERENCE] Function: DISABLE Dead Line Lv: 0.50 >Live Line Lv: 0.80 Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Max Angle Diff: 10

Range

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Used to activate the phase difference element for voltage over this

Default 0.80

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the live line minimum voltage for phase difference element. level.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Volt Diff [PHASE DIFFERENCE] Function: DISABLE Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Live Line Lv: 0.80 >Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Max Angle Diff: 10 [0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

0.10~1.40 xVT

Range

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the maximum voltage difference. A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Angle Diff [PHASE DIFFERENCE] Function: DISABLE Dead Line Lv: 0.50 Live Line Lv: 0.80 Max Volt Diff: 0.10 >Max Angle Diff: 10 [1~100:1 deg]

1 ~ 100 degree

Range

Default 10

Step

1 degree

Enter the maximum angle difference of the phase difference element. An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Max Freq. Diff [PHASE DIFFERENCE] >Max Freq.Diff: 2.00 Check Phase: ALL Time Delay: 1.0

[0.01~5.00:0.01 Hz]

0.01 ~ 5.00 Hz

Range

Default 2.00

Step

0.01 Hz

Enter the maximum frequency difference of voltages. A frequency differential between the voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for phase difference element.

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Check Phase [PHASE DIFFERENCE] Max Freq.Diff: 2.0 >Check Phase: ALL Time Delay: 1.0

[ALL/A/B/C]

ALL, A, B, C

Range

Default ALL

Step

~

Select reference voltage for phase difference element on load side. ALL : Three phase voltages on load side are used for phase difference element. A/B/C : Single phase voltage on load side is used for phase difference element.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

348

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / PHASE DIFFERENCE / Time delay [PHASE DIFFERENCE] >Max Freq.Diff: 2.0 Check Phase: ALL >Time Delay: 1.00

Range

0.0 ~ 600.0sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01sec

Set delay time for phase difference element [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

8.3.2. Synchro’ Check (25) The EVRC2A-NT provides a synchronism check element. The synchronism check element is used when both the source and load side circuit are in a live state, when the phases of the two circuits are synchronized. If it remains in the asynchronous state for the set waiting time, it will not close even after synchronization. If all of the following conditions are satisfied, it is determined to be as synchornization.  The voltage of the source side and the load side must be within the synchronous detection range. If the voltage is out of the lower limit value (Min. Volt) and the upper limit value (Max. Volt), it is determined that the voltage of the system is not stable and it is determined as asynchronous.  The frequency on the source side and the load side must be within ± 5 Hz of the rated value.  The voltage difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the set voltage.  The frequency difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the set frequency difference.  The phase difference between the source side and the load side must be less than or equal to the set

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

349

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

The phase difference (ΔAngle) of the two circuits means the sum of the currently measured phase difference(∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒

) and the compensation value (∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒

) of the phase difference

to be generated during body turn-in time by the slip frequency. The formula for calculating the phase difference is as follows; ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = | ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒

+ ∆𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒

|

= | (∠𝑉 − ∠𝑉 ) + { (𝑓 − 𝑓 ) × 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒

× 360° } |

*. NOTE) The variables used in the above equation are as follows. − ∠𝑉 : Voltage phase at the source side − ∠𝑉 : Voltage phase at the load side − 𝑓 : Frequency at source, 𝑓 : Frequency at load, Sleep Frequency: 𝑓 - 𝑓 − 𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒

: Recloser closing time [s]

However, when the source side or load side circuit is diagonal, it is always closes regardless of synchronous detection. The synchronism check element in following settings should be enabled. GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Function [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] >Function: DISABLE Max.Volt: 1.10 Min.Volt: 0.30 Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Angle Diff1: 30.0

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

It decides whether to use synchronism check element.

[DISABLE,ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Function: DISABLE >Max.Volt: 1.10 Min.Volt: 0.30 Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Angle Diff1: 30.0

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 1.10

Step

0.01 xVT

It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

350

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Min.Volt [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Function: DISABLE Max.Volt: 1.10 >Min.Volt: 0.30 Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Angle Diff1: 30.0

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.30

Step

0.01 xVT

It sets minimum system voltage for synchronism check.

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Max.Volt Diff [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Function: DISABLE Max.Volt: 1.10 Min.Volt: 0.30 >Max Volt Diff: 0.10 Angle Diff1: 30.0 [0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.10

Step

0.01 xVT

Enter the maximum voltage difference. A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Angle Diff 1 [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Function: DISABLE Max.Volt: 1.10 Min.Volt: 0.30 Max Volt Diff: 0.10 >Angle Diff1: 30.0 0(OFF),20.0~80.0deg

Range

0(OFF), 20.0~80.0 degree

Default 30.0

Step

0.1 degree

Enter the maximum angle difference. An angular differential between the voltage angles below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.

*. NOTE) Angle Diff 2 is same as Angle Diff 1 above. GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Slip Freq. [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Angle Diff2: 30.0 >Slip Freq.: 1.0 Sync Phase: A Compens’ Angle: 0 Load-V Factor: 1.00 [0.5~5.0:0.1 Hz]

Range

0.5~5.0 Hz

Default 1.0

Step

0.1 Hz

Enter the maximum slip frequency(frequency difference). An angular differential between the frequency below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism check.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Sync Phase [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Angle Diff2: 30.0 Slip Freq.: 1.0 >Sync Phase: A Compens’ Angle: 0 Load-V Factor: 1.00

Range

A, B, C, AB, BC, CA

Default A

Step

~

Select reference voltage for synchronism check element on load side.

[A/B/C/AB/BC/CA]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

351

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Compens’ Angle [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Angle Diff2: 30.0 Slip Freq.: 1.0 Sync Phase: A >Compens’ Angle: 0 Load-V Factor: 1.00 [0~330:30 deg]

0~330 degree

Range

Default 0

Step

30 degree

When calculating the phase difference between the source side and the load side, set the load side compensate angle. The load side angle is the actual measured angle plus the set value.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Load-V Factor [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Angle Diff2: 30.0 Slip Freq.: 1.0 Sync Phase: A Compens’ Angle: 0 >Load-V Factor: 1.00 [0.50~2.00:0.01]

0.50~2.00

Range

Default 1.00

Step

0.01

It is the compensation factor of the load side voltage magnitude. When calculating the voltage difference between the source side and the load side, it will apply this value to the load side voltage multiplied by this set value.

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / Closing Time 0.0~600.0 ms

[SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Sync Phase: A Compens’ Angle: 0 Load-V Factor: 1.00 >Closing Time: 50.0 CL Wait Time: 10

Range

[0.0~600.0:0.1 ms]

value can be changed according to the recloser closing time.

Default 50.0

Step

0.1 ms

It sets the time to close the rcloser. The phase difference calculation

GROUP # / MONITORING / SYNCHRO’ CHECK / CL Wait Time [SYNCHRO’ CHECK] Sync Phase: A Compens’ Angle: 0 Load-V Factor: 1.00 Closing Time: 50.0 >CL Wait Time: 10 [1~600:1 s]

Range

1~600 sec

Default 10

Step

1 sec

It sets synchronous detection input wait time. If the synchronous condition is not satisfied during this set time after manual close command, it does not close. The front panel “25 PHASE DIFFERENCE” LED lights up when the manual close command is in the standby state.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

352

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.3.3. Open Phase This function determines phase as open pahse when one or two phase voltages are more than Off Level and determines as normal if that all three phase voltages are higher than On Level. Dead line normal condition it does not indicate open phase. When detecting the open phase, the corresponding LED of the open phase LED (VA / VR, VB / VS, VC / VT) on the front panel lights up. The setting items of OPEN PHASE element are same as below. GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE / Function [OPEN PHASE] >Function: DISABLE On Level: 0.80 >Off Level: 0.50 Time Delay: 4.00

Range

[DISABLE,ENABLE]

not.

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

Set whether it activates open phase function to detect open phase or

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ On Level [OPEN PHASE] Function: DISABLE >On Level: 0.80 >Off Level: 0.50 Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.80

Step

0.01 xVT

Set voltage level to detect open of phase. [0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Off Level [OPEN PHASE] Function: DISABLE On Level: 0.80 >Off Level: 0.50 Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.50

Step

0.01 xVT

Set voltage level to detect loss of phase. [0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / OPEN PHASE/ Time Delay [OPEN PHASE] Function: DISABLE On Level: 0.80 Off Level: 0.50 >Time Delay: 4.00

Range

0.00~600.00 sec

Default 4.00

Step

0.01 sec

Set delay time to detect open phase. [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

353

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.3.4. Live Line Block It is to block reloser closing if the load side is live line. GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE LINE BLOCK / Function [LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] >Funcktion: DISABLE >Live Block: BOTH >Live Level: 0.80 Source: BOTH Time Delay: 0.10

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default OFF

Step

~

It decides whether to use Live line block.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Live Block [LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Funcktion: OFF >Live Block: BOTH Live Level: 0.80 Source: BOTH Time Delay: 0.10 [RECLOSE/CLOSE/BOTH]

Range

RECLOSE, CLOSE, BOTH

Default BOTH

Step

~

Select whether to use Live load block function. RECLOSE: When recloser closing by auto reclosing function, this function works. CLOSE: When local or remote closing, the function works. BOTH: When recloser closing regardless of auto reclosing or remote/local closing, the function works.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Live Level [LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Funcktion: OFF Live Block: BOTH >Live Level: 0.80 Source: BOTH Time Delay: 0.10

Range

0.10~1.40 xVT

Default 0.80

Step

0.01 xVT

Step

~

Set pickup level of live line

[0.10~1.40:0.01 xVT]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LIVE LINE BLOCK / Source [LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Funcktion: OFF Live Block: BOTH >Live Level: 0.80 >Source: VS&VL Time Delay: 0.10 [VS/VL/VS&VL]

Range

VS, VL, VS&VL

Default VS&VL

Set which side of voltage to detect live line.  VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage  VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage  VS&VL : Recloser’s Source and Load Side Voltage

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

354

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING /LIVE/DEAD BLOCK / Time Delay 0.00~600.00 sec

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING] Funcktion: OFF Live Block: BOTH >Live Level: 0.80 Source: VS&VL >Time Delay: 0.10

Range

[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

load side voltage is more than pickup level for this set time.

Default 0.10

Step

0.01sec

Set a time to detect live line in load side. The live line is determined if

8.3.5. Fault Locator The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type (phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground), phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance. This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors could be introduced by several reasons (fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage. For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data is required at least 2 cycles. If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily achieved, but source impedance is not required. Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow. In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful. The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder. Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-58. Faulted distribution system circuit” for example.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

355

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

(1-m)Z

mZ

IA

IF

VA

L O A D

RF

Figure 8-58. Faulted distribution system circuit The calculated “Fault Location” information be checked on the “Fault Cycle” event menu. For more details, refer to “9.2. Fault Evnet” and “9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary”. This function is only applied when the controller type of EVRC2A-NT is “RECLOSER” mode. The fault locator settings are as follows; GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Function [FAULT LOCATOR] >Function: DISABLE Feeder Length: 5.0 Z1 (Real): 1.00 Z1 (Imag): 1.00 Z0 (Real): 1.00 Z0 (Imag): 1.00 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

Step

~

It decides whether to use Fault locator.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Feeder Length [FAULT LOCATOR] Function: DISABLE >Feeder Length: 5.0 Z1 (Real): 1.00 Z1 (Imag): 1.00 Z0 (Real): 1.00 Z0 (Imag): 1.00 [1.0~99.9:0.1km]

Range

1.0 ~ 99.9 km

Default 5.0

Step

0.1 km

Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

356

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Real) [FAULT LOCATOR] Function: DISABLE Feeder Length: 5.0 >Z1 (Real): 1.00 Z1 (Imag): 1.00 Z0 (Real): 1.00 Z0 (Imag): 1.00 [0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]

Range

0.01~99.9 9 ohm

Default 1.00

Step

0.01ohm

Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1 (Imag) [FAULT LOCATOR] Function: DISABLE Feeder Length: 0.0 Z1 (Real): 1.00 Z1 (Imag): 1.00 Z0 (Real): 1.00 Z0 (Imag): 1.00 [0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]

Range

0.01~99.9 9 ohm

Default 1.00

Step

0.01ohm

Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Real) [FAULT LOCATOR] Function: DISABLE Feeder Length: 0.0 Z1 (Real): 1.00 Z1 (Imag): 1.00 Z0 (Real): 1.00 Z0 (Imag): 1.00 [0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]

Range

0.01~99.9 9 ohm

Default 1.00

Step

0.01ohm

Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

GROUP # / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0 (Imag) [FAULT LOCATOR] Function: DISABLE Feeder Length: 0.0 Z1 (Real): 1.00 Z1 (Imag): 1.00 Z0 (Real): 1.00 Z0 (Imag): 1.00 [0.01~99.99:0.01ohm]

Range

0.01~99.9 9 ohm

Default 1.00

Step

0.01ohm

Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

357

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.3.6. Load Current Alarm EVRC2A-NT generates a Load Current Alarm event when the value over the detect level of RMS current is maintained for a constant time. Load Current Alarm event is generated individually for each A, B, C, N phase and Negative Sequence. Then, the peak current measurement value is updated by each phase current and negative sequence current at which the load current alarm event is generated. If the function is disabled, the peak current measurement value will not be updated even if a large current flows. For details of the Load Current Alarm event recorded by this function, refer to “9.9. Load Current Alarm Event” and the peak current updated by this function can be checked in the “METERING/ CURRENT” menu (Please refer to“13.1. Current” ). Load Current Alarm setting items are same as below. GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Function [LOAD CURR’ ALARM] >Function: DISABLE P-Pickup: 500 >P-Time Delay: 0.00 G-Pickup: 250 >G-Time Delay: 0.00

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

~

Step

Set whether to use load current alarm function.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Pickup [LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Function: DISABLE >P-Pickup: 500 >P-Time Delay: 0.00 G-Pickup: 250 >G-Time Delay: 0.00

Range

0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 500

Step

1A

Set the detect current of load current alarm about phase current.

[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / P-Time Delay [LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Function: DISABLE P-Pickup: 500 >P-Time Delay: 0.00 G-Pickup: 250 >G-Time Delay: 0.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the detect time of load current alarm about the phase current.

[0.00~600.0:0.01s]

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

358

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Pickup [LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Function: DISABLE P-Pickup: 500 P-Time Delay: 0.00 >G-Pickup: 250 G-Time Delay: 0.00

Range

0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 250

Step

1A

Set the detect current of load current alarm about ground current.

[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / G-Time Delay [LOAD CURR’ ALARM] Function: DISABLE P-Pickup: 500 P-Time Delay: 0.00 G-Pickup: 250 >G-Time Delay: 0.00

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the detect time of load current alarm about the ground current.

[0.00~600.0:0.01s]

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Pickup [LOAD CURR’ ALARM] P-Time Delay: 0.00 G-Pickup: 250 G-Time Delay: 0.00 >Q-Pickup: OFF Q-Time Delay: 0.00 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

Range

0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default OFF

Step

1A

Set the detect current of load current alarm about negative sequence current.

GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM / Q-Time Delay [LOAD CURR’ ALARM] P-Time Delay: 0.00 G-Pickup: 250 G-Time Delay: 0.00 Q-Pickup: OFF >Q-Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~600.0:0.01s]

Range

0.00 ~ 600.00 sec

Default 0.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the detect time of load current alarm about the negative sequence current.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

359

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

8.3.7. Power Factor (55) EVRC2A-NT has two power factor(55) elements. If measured power factor(lag, lead) is kept above the pickup level for a certain time, the element are detected. Through the PLC configuration, if an event of this function is detected, the recloser can be opened or closed. Power factor setting items are same as below. GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Function [POWER FACTOR] >Function: DISABLE Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Pickup-Lead1: 0.00 Time Delay1: 0.00 Pickup-Lag2: 0.00

Range

DISABLE, ENABLE

Default DISABLE

~

Step

It decides whether to use Power factor element.

[DISABLE/ENABLE]

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lag1 0(OFF), 0.05~0.99

[POWER FACTOR] Function: DISABLE >Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Pickup-Lead1: 0.00 Time Delay1: 0.00 Pickup-Lag2: 0.00

Range

[0(OFF) 0.05~0.99]

If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set value.

Default 0.00

0.01

Step

Set pickup level of lag power factor for element1.

*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lag2 is same as Pickup-Lag1 setting above. GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Pickup-Lead1 [POWER FACTOR] >Function: DISABLE Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 >Pickup-Lead1: 0.00 Time Delay1: 0.00 Pickup-Lag2: 0.00 [0(OFF) 0.05~0.99]

Range

0(OFF), 0.05~0.99

Default 0.00

Step

0.01

Set pickup level of lead power factor for element1. If the power factor is lag, detect this element if it exceeds this set value.

*. NOTE ) Setting for Pickup-Lead2 is same as Pickup-Lead1 setting above. GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / Time Delay1 [POWER FACTOR] >Function: DISABLE Pickup-Lag1: 0.00 Pickup-Lead1: 0.00 >Time Delay1: 0.00 Pickup-Lag2: 0.00

Range

1.00~600.00sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01sec

Set time delay for power factor element1.

[1.00~600.00:0.01s]

*. NOTE ) Setting for Time Delay2 is same as Time Delay1 setting above.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

360

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

GROUP # / MONITORING / POWER FACTOR / BLK After CL [POWER FACTOR] >Time Delay2: 0.00 BLK After CL: 0.00

Range

0.05~600.00sec

Default 1.00

Step

0.01sec

Set the Block Time After Close for power factor elements. [1.00~600.00:0.01s]

8.4. Save Setting From this menu, you can save the changed setting values of the GROUP menu. The procedure for storing the set value is described in “6.3.4. Setting Save”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

361

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9. EVENT RECORDER Place the curser on “3.EVENT”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. EVRC2A-NT records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded separately such as operation event, fault event, system event, set change event, load event and diagnostic event. All events are recorded in order(FIFO). In this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all events can be checked in interface program. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu. [EVENT] >1.OPERATION 2.FAULT 3.FAULT CYCLE 4.SYSTEM 5.SET CHANGE 6.AVER.LOAD/MIN 7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR 8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY 9.DIGNOSTIC 10.PQM 11.ALARM CURRENT 12.CLEAR SAVED DATA

9.1. Operation Event Operation event records max. 5,000 events. When Recloser operates(OPEN/CLOSE), operation status and control signal(LOCAL/REMOTE) is recorded in operation event. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION” to confirm operation events.

[▼][▲] are used to check event. [0001/5000] is the latest event record.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

362

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger Source 

STATUS - CLOSE(OK) or CLOSE(FAIL) - OPEN(OK) or CLOSE(FAIL)



CONTROL - PL-HMI : Operation through control button at the front panel - REMOTE : Operation through remote control - MANUAL : Recloser (or Load breaker) mechanical manual operation. - AUTO : Automatic operation through EVRC2A-NT - EXT’ : Operation through external command (External command condition is available through PLC configuration)

Trigger Time Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.

Trigger Capacity Stores last 5,000 events. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

363

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.2. Fault Event Fault event records max 1,500 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault phase, fault current size and each phase fault records can be checked. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT” to confirm fault events.

[▼][▲] buttons are used to check fault events. Press [ENT] button in fault event screen to check fault current value. And press [ENT] again to return to previous screen. [0001/1500] is the latest event record.

Fault Event Information Information before a fault occurring, is recorded.. 00001/10000 Shows the latest event in order and records 1,500 events. SEQ Fault sequence number TARGET Records the fault detect phase and event trigger source. -

A: A Phase Fault

-

B: B Phase Fault

-

C: C Phase Fault

-

N: Ground Fault

-

S: Sensitive Earth Fault

-

Q : Negative Sequence Fault

-

TOC : Time Overcurrent Fault(Applied when “RECLOSER” type)

-

IOC : Instantaneous and Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent Fault (Applied when “RECLOSER” type)

-

FI : Fault Indication Detection(Applied when “SECTIONALIZER” type)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

364

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

TYPE Records the fault type (Applied when “SECTIONALIZER” type) -

F-PICKUP : Fault Pickup (not trip)

-

51 : Time Overcurrent Fault Trip

-

50 : Instantaneous and Instantaneous Lockout Overcurrent Fault Trip

-

27 : Under Voltage Fault Trip

-

59 : Over Voltage Fault Trip

-

64 : Neutral Over Voltage Fault Trip

-

DEM : Demand Fault Trip

-

81O : Over Frequency Fault Trip

-

81U : Under Frequency Fault Trip

-

81D : Frequency Decay Fault Trip

-

32 : Forward Power and Direction Power Fault Trip

-

46 : Broken Conduct Fault Trip

-

21 : Z0 Adittance Fault Trip

LOC It registers Fault Location Information (location and reactance). *. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE. 2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “8.3.5. Fault Locator”. FAULT Max. current value is indicated when fault is occurred. CURRENT It registers current of the each phase, ground, sensitive earth and negative sequence.

Trigger Source Plesae refer to “TARGET” and “TYPE”of the above mentioned Fault Event Information.

Trigger Time Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger Capacity Stores last 1,500 events. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

365

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.3. Fault Cycle - Summary Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed on LCD. Captured waveform can be checked in ETIMS Interface Software. However, if the ‘Wave Record’ setting in the “MAIN MENU/ GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, fault cycles will not be recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT CYCLE” to confirm fault cycle summary.

[▼][▲] is used to check the fault event. [01/32] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source 

Fault wave captured time. -

PU : Pick up time.

-

TR : Trip time.

-

PU&TR : Picku up & Trip time



Fault current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, Ground



Fault Location Information -

Fault Location [km]

-

Fault Reactance [Ohm]

*. NOTE) 1. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ENABLE. 2. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “8.3.5. Fault Locator”.

Trigger Time Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger Capacity Maximum 32 events are recorded.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

366

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Recoder Cycle Length 60 cycles for 64 sampling, 120 cycles for 32 sampling and 240 cycles for 16 sampling.

9.4. System Event Maximum 5,000 Set change Event can be recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [0001/5000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source 

Protection element



52A Contact



Sequence status



Front panel control



AC supply



External control



Fail operation



External input status



System alarm



Sleep mode



Gas Status, etc.

Trigger Time Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger type Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

367

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Storage Capacity Stores last 5,000 events. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

9.5. Set Change Event Maximum 2,000 Set change Event can be recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the records. [0001/2000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source 



Changed set menu -

GLOBAL SETTING (GLSCHG)

-

GROUP 1~6 SETTING (GRSCH1 ~ GRSCH6)

Change method The first name of the target name identifies the change method.; -

(L) LOCAL: Set change at local

-

(R) REMOTE: Sec change in remote

-

(P) PROGRAM: Set change by Interface software.

Trigger Time Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5msec.

Storage Capacity Stores last 2,000 events. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

368

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.6. Load & Energy Event EVRC2A-NT has the function of periodically recording the load and energy measurement data. The user can configure the data field to record in the Load & Energy event. For the data field configuration method, please refer to “9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration” . Load & Energy events are recorded in three ways: minute average, maximum value per hour, and maximum value per day. However, if the ‘L&E Record’ setting in the "“MAIN MENU/ GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER” menu is OFF, Load & Energy events will not be recorded.

9.6.1. Load & Energy/Min. Event Average load and energy value is recorded every a period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL/ EVENT RECORDER / L&P Interval”. Maximum 8,640 values, it’s about 90 days events can be recorded based on 15 minutes(default) for the event register period. To check the average value per minute Load & Energy events, please move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/MIN” .

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for Load&Energy/min events may be revised on user’s request.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

369

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button. To return back to previous screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/8640] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source 

Demand Current – A, B, C, N



Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T



Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)

Trigger Time Monitors to change Trigger source status every period set on “GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / L&E Interval”.

Storage Capacity Stores last 8,640 events. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

370

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.6.2. Load & Energy/Hour Event Peak load & Energy event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every hour, is recorded up to 8,640 events, it’s about 360 days events are recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/HOUR” to confirm Peak Load & Energy/Hour events.

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request. [▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/8640] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source 

Demand Current – A, B, C, N



Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T



Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

371

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger Time Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1hour.

Storage Capacity Stores last 8,640 events. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

9.6.3. Load & Energy/Day Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is recorded up to 8,640 events, it’s 8,640 days events are recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD&ENERGY/DAY” to confirm Peak Load & Energy /day events.

*. NOTE ) Configuration display for peak. load/min events may be revised on user’s request. [▼][▲] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/8640] is the latest event record.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

372

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger Source 

Demand Current – A, B, C, N



Demand Voltage – A, B, C, R, S, T



Demand Active Power - A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Reactive Power – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Power Factor – A, B, C, 3ф



Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)

Trigger Time Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1 day.

Storage Capacity Stores last 8,640 events. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

373

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.6.4. Load & Energy Field Configuration Operator can easily configure fields recorded in Load & Energy Event through “Load & Energy Field Config Edit” window of ETIMS Interface Software. Load & Energy Field Configuration procedure is as follow: 1) Click “SETTING / LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” to open ‘Load & Energy Field Config Edit’.

Figure 9-1. Load & Energy Event Field Config Edit Window 2) In the ‘Load & Energy Field Config Edit’ window, configure fields recorded in Load & Energy Event. The number of selected field is between 4 and 14 fields. 3) After completing the configuration, click the [Apply] button. 4) While ‘ONLINE’ communication status between Interface Software and EVRC2A-NT, upload the changed load profile field configuration in EVRC2A-NT using “ONLINE / UPLOAD / LOAD & ENERGY FIELD CONFIG” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

374

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.7. Diagnostic Event Diagnostic event is recorded, maximum 2,000 events. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIAGNOSTIC” to confirm diagnosticevents.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the events. [0001/2000] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source 

DSP Fail



ADC Fail



RTC Fail



Memory Fail



Flash-Rom Fail



Circuit voltage Fail



Global Setting Fail



Group Setting Fail



Event Fail



Count Fail



DO Fail



Close Fail



Open Fail, etc.

Trigger Time Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.

Trigger type Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

Storage Capacity Stores last 2,000 events.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

375

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

*. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests. When Diagnostis Fail is occurred the treatment method is same as following. Table 9-1. Treatment Method when Diagnostis Fail is Occurred No.

Item

Period

Method

1

DSP

Within 200msec

Change to fault detect block

2

ADC

1/4 cycle

Change to fault detect block

3

RTC

1 hour, at booting

Change the date to January 1st, 2017

4

Memory

Restart

5

Flash-Rom

6

Circuit voltage

1 hour, at booting At Flash-Rom reading and writing, at booting 1/4 cycle

7

Global setting

At setting change, at booting

8

Group # setting

At setting change, at booting

9

Event

At event save and reading

Change to fault detect block Change the Global setting value to Default value Change the Group # setting value to Default value Event initialization

10

Count

At counter writing and reading

Counter initialization

11

DO signal

50msec

Output power block

12

Close/Open

At closing and opening

Necessary to check in local

Restart

9.8. PQM Event Power Quality Management (PQM) detect event is recorded up to 1,500 events. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PQM” to confirm PQM events. In this menu, PQM event item, phase occurence, measurement value and event maintaineance time can be checked (But, event maintenance time is recorded only when events are sag, swell, interruption). PQM events are generated by the “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ GENERAL/ MONITORING/ POWER QUALITY” setting.

[▼][▲] button is used to check the event. [0001/1500] is the latest event record.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

376

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Trigger Source 

PQM detect element.



Sag(SAG): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Long Time(LONG)



Swell(SWL): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Long Time(LONG)



Interruption(INT): Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Sustained(LONG)



Voltage Harmonic distortion(VTH)



Current Harmonic distortion(ITH)



Source side Unbalance Voltage(UBV)



Load side Unbalance Voltage(UBL)



Current Unbalance(UBI)



Source side Over Voltage(OVS)



Load side Over Voltage(OVL)



Source side Under Voltage(UVS)



Load side Under Voltage(UVL)



Under Frequency(UNF)



PQM detected phase : A phase, B phase, C phase



PQM element related measured value.



PQM detect time(cycle)

Trigger Time Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.

Storage Capacity Stores last 1,500 events. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

377

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.9. Load Current Alarm Event Load current alarm event is occurred by “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ GROUP # / MONITORING / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu. Max. 1,500 events of load current alarm event can be recorded and indicated. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / LOAD CURR’ ALARM” menu to check the load current alarm event. In this menu, you can check the alarm occurrence and the current value of each phase and the period of occurrence.

[▼][▲] is used to check the event. [0001/1500] is the latest recorded event.

Trigger Source 



Taget element -

A: Phase A Alarm current

-

B: Phase B Alarm current

-

C: Phase C Alarm current

-

N: Ground Alarm current

Current of correspondent phase in case of alarm current event is occurred

Trigger Time Check the status change of trigger source every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger Capacity Max. 1,500 events are saved. *. NOTE ) The maximum number of events to be stored can be increased according to user requests.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

378

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

9.10. Clear Saved Data Move to “EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved events. Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu. EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA [CLEAR SAVED DATA] >1.OPERATION 2.FAULT 3.FAULT CYCLE 4.SYSTEM 5.SET CHANGE 6.LOAD & ENERGY 7.DIGNOSTIC 8.PQM 9.PQM CYCLE 10.LOAD CURR’ ALARM 11.ABOVE ALL

Clear Saved Data Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button. If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS” message is displayed.

11. ABOVE ALL 1 ~ 10 items are all deleted.

[CLEAR EVENT] EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

379

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10. MAINTENANCE Place the curser on “MAINTENANCE” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu displays Maintenance information. This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into sub-menu.

[MAINTENANCE] >1.COUNT 2.INTERRUT TIME 3.CONTACT WEAR 4.DATA RESET 5.CONTROLLER INFO 6.MECHANISM SCALE

10.1. Count Counter information is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.

[COUNT] >1.EVRC2A-NT 2.FAULT 3.PQM 4.COMMUNICATION

10.1.1. EVRC2A-NT Count Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / EVRC2A-NT” to confirm EVRC2A-NT count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU [EVRC2A-NT] RESTART : DIAGNOSTIC : OPERATION :

30 0 0

Restart Count EVRC2A-NT restart number is displayed.

Diagnostic Count EVRC2A-NT diagnostic count is displayed.

Operation Count Recloser operation counter is displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

380

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.2. Fault Count Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count. Number of fault is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT

FAULT-TOTAL (1/6) Displays total count of faults.  TRIP : Displays trip operation count.  51 TOC : Displays time overcurrent trip count.  50 IOC : Dispalys instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent trip count.  27 UV : Displays under voltage trip count.  59 OV : Displays phase over voltage and neutral over voltage trip count.  81 FRE : Displays over frequency, under frequency and frequency decay trip count.

FAULT-TOC (2/6) Displays the time overcurrent trip count for each target.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

381

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT

FAULT-IOC (3/6) Displays the instantaneous and instantaneous lockout overcurrent trip count for each target.

FAULT-UV (4/6) Displays under voltage trip count for each phase.

FAULT-OV (5/6) Displays over voltage trip count for each phase. Target N means the neutral over voltage trip count.

FAULT-OTHER(6/6) Displays the trip count for other faults.  81 OVER : Displays over frequency trip count.  81 UNDER : Displays under frequency trip count.  81 DECAY : Displays frequency decay trip count.  DEMAND : Displays demand trip count.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

382

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3. PQM Count This menu displays power quality(PQM) related counter information, it has sub-menu as below. When a PQM event occurs, the corresponding counter is increased. [PQM COUNT] >1.INTERRUT 2.SAG 3.SWELL 4.HARMONICS 5.CURR UNBALANCE 6.VOLT UNBALANCE 7.UNDER VOLTAGE 8.OVER VOLTAGE 9.UNDER FREQUNCY

10.1.3.1. Interrupt Move to “MAINTENANCE / PQM / INTERRUPT” to confirm interrup count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / INTERRUPT [INTERRUPT] 1/2 TOTAL: 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

Number of Interruption is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

INTERRUPT(1/2) Total number of Interruption and total number of interruption per [INTERRUPT] 2/2 MOMENTARY : 0 TEMPORARY : 0 SUSTAINED : 0

phase are displayed.

INTERRUPT(2/2) Number of fault per type is displayed on Interruption.

10.1.3.2. Sag Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG” to confirm sag count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG

A : C :

[SAG] TOTAL: 0 B : 0

1/2 0 0

Number of Sag is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.

SAG(1/2) Total number of Sag occurred and total number of Sag per phase are displayed.

SAG(2/2) Number of Sag per type is displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

383

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3.3. Swell Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL” to confirm swell count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL Number of Swell occurred is displayed. This COUNT menu consists of 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

SWELL(1/2) Total number of Swell and number of Swell per phase are displayed.

SWELL(2/2) Number of Swell per type is displayed.

10.1.3.4. Harmonics Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC” to confirm sag count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC

A : C :

[VTHD] TOTAL: 0 B : 0

1/2 0 0

Number of Harmonic distortion is displayed. The COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] buttons to move into sub-menu.

VTHD(1/2) Total number of Voltage Harmonic distortion and number of voltage A : C :

[ITHD] TOTAL: 0 B : 0

2/2 0 0

harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.

ITHD(2/2) Total number of current harmonic distortion and number of current harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.

10.1.3.5. Current Unbalance Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE” to confirm current unbalance count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE [CURRENT UNBALANCE] COUNT :

Number of Current Unbalance occurred is displayed.

0

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

384

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3.6. Voltage Unbalance Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” to confirm voltage unbalance count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE [VOLTAGE UNBALANCE] SOURCE SIDE : 0 LOAD SIDE : 0

Number of voltage unbalance occurred is displayed.

SOURSE SIDE Number of voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.

LOAD SIDE Number of voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.

10.1.3.7. Under Voltage Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE” to confirm under voltage count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE [VS-UNDER VOLT] 1/2 dddddddTOTAL : 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

Number of under-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

VS-UNDER VOLT(1/2) [VL-UNDER VOLT] 2/2 dddddddTOTAL : 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

Total number of undervoltage at source side and number of undervoltage per phase are displayed.

VL-UNDER VOLT (2/2) Total number of undervoltage at load side and number of undervoltage at load side per phase are displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

385

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.3.8. Over Voltage Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE” to confirm over voltage count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE [VS-OVER VOLT] 1/2 dddddddTOTAL : 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

Number of over-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

VS-OVER VOLT(1/2) [VL-OVER VOLT] 2/2 dddddddTOTAL : 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

Total number of overvoltage at source side and number of undervoltage per phase are displayed.

VL-OVER VOLT (2/2) Total number of overvoltage at load side and number of overvoltage at load side per phase are displayed.

10.1.3.9. Under Frequency Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / Under Frequency” to confirm under frequency count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FRQUENCY [UNDER FREQUENCY] COUNT :

Number of underfrequency is displayed.

0

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

386

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.4. Communication Count Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count. MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION [COMM-S1] Rx Message: Tx Message: Unsol Tx :

1/8 0 0 0

[COMM-S2] DI Evt buf: AI Evt buf: CI Evt buf:

8/8 0 0 0

[COMM-S1] Rx CRC Err: Tx RETRY : SBO TO :

2/8 0 0 0

[COMM-S2] D Conf TO : A Conf TO :

7/8 0 0

[COMM-S1] D Conf TO : A Conf TO :

3/8 0 0

[COMM-S2] Rx CRC Err: Tx RETRY : SBO TO :

6/8 0 0 0

[COMM-S1] DI Evt buf: AI Evt buf: CI Evt buf:

4/8 0 0 0

[COMM-S2] Rx Message: Tx Message: Unsol Tx :

5/8 0 0 0

Indicates the counter information of DNP3.0 protocol. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

COMM-S1(1/8)  Rx Message: Indicates the total number of received message of DNP3.0 Slave1.  Tx Message: Indicates the total number of transferred message of DNP3.0 Slave1.  Unsol Tx: Indicates the total number of transferred Unsol message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

COMM-S1(2/8)  Rx CRC Err: Indicates the total number of CRC error message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.  Tx Message: Indicates the total number of resend messange of DNP3.0 Slave1.  SBO TO: Indicates the SBO Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

387

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION

COMM-S1(3/8)  D Conf TO: Indicates the Data Link confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.  A Conf TO: Indicates the Application Link Confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

COMM-S1(4/8)  DI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted DI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.  AI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmiteed AI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.  CI Evt buf: Indicates the untransmitted CI events number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

COMM-S2(5~8/8) Indicates the communication counter of DNP3.0 Slave2. The composition counter is same as DNP3.0 Slave 1.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

388

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.1.5. User Count Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT” to confirm user count. The EVRC2A-NT provides eight(8) user counts. The user count can define the counter to be managed by the user through the PLC configuration. When input condition set in CLSET # (User Counter Set Condition) of PLC is occured, the corresponding user count is increased by 1. When the input condition set in CLRST # (User Counter Reset Condition) occurs, the corresponding user count is cleared to 0. When you set CLST (close status) on CLSET01, user count 1 is increased by 1, whenever the recloser is closed. User count can be monitored by Pulse Count logic of PLC function. For details, refer to “7.1.5.3. PULSE COUNTER”.

Figure 10-1. PLC Edit Window of ETIMS Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

389

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / USER COUNT Displays the user count defined by the PLC configuration (CLSET01 ~ CLSET08). This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

10.2. Interrupt Time Move to “MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME” to confirm interrupt time. MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME [INTERRUP TIME] 1/2 TOTAL: 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 N : 0

Accumulated interrupt time is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 page and use [▼][▲] button to move into sub-menu.

INTERRUPT TIME(1/2) Total accumulated time and accumulated time per phase are displayed. [INTERRUP MOMENTARY TEMPORARY SUSTAINED

TIME] 2/2 : 0 : 0 : 0

Time unit is Cycle.

INTERRUPT TIME(2/2) Accumulated time per interrupt type is displayed, time unit is cycle.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

390

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.3. Contact Wear Move to “MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” to confirm contact wear. MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR [CONTACT WEAR-%] A : 100.00 B : 100.00 C : 100.00

Display recloser contact wear in percentage.

10.4. Data Reset Move to “MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET”. This menu resets COUNT and Maintenance data. Passcode 3 certification is required to enter “CLEAR SAED DATA” menu. MAINTENACE / DATA RESET [DATA RESET] >1.EVRC2A-NT COUNT 2.OPERATION COUNT 3.FAULT COUNT 4.PQM COUNT 5.COM’ COUNT 6.COUNT ALL 7.INTERRUPT TIME >8.BATT. CAPACITY 9.CONTACT WEAR 10.ENERGY 11.MAX DEMAND 12.PEAK CURRENT 13.COMM BUFF 14.USER COUNT 15.ABOVE ALL [CLEAR EVENT] EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

Saved Data Reset Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button. If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS” message is displayed. *. NOTE ) 1. ‘OPERATION COUNT’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/ GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ OPERATION COUNT”. 2. ‘CONTACT WEAR’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/ GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ CONTACT WEAR”. 3. ‘BATT. CATPACITY’ is reset by a set value in “MAIN MENU/ GLOBLA

SETTING/

MONITERING/

BATT

MANAGEMENT”. 4. Except ‘OPERATION COUNT’, ‘CONTACT WEAR’ and ‘BATT CATPACITY’, all data is reset for 0.

15. ABOVE ALL All count data of 1 ~ 14 menus are reset at once.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

391

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

10.5. Controller Information Move to “MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO” to confirm EVRC2A-NT controller information. In this menu, information such as option, version and serial number of current EVRC2A-NT is displayed.

10.6. Mechanism Scale Move to “MAINTENANCE / MECHANISM SCALE” to confirm CT and VT mechanism calibration scale. When replacing the EVRC2A-NT controller, the manufacturer shall notify the manufacturer of the mechanism calibration scale indicated on the EVRC2A-NT before replacement. MAINTENACE / MECHANISM SCALE [MECHANISM SCALE] VA:1.0000 IA:1.0000 VB:1.0000 IB:1.0000 VC:1.0000 IC:1.0000 VR:1.0000 IN:1.0000 VS:1.0000 IS:1.0000 VT:1.0000

VA, VB, VC, VR, VS, VT The mechanism calibration scale of each phase VT is displayed.

IA, IB, IC, IN, IS The mechanism calibration scale of CT and ZCT of each phase is displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

392

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

11. TIME Place the curser on “TIME” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. TIME [CURRENT TIME] 2006/11/05 21:02:38 PRESS TO SET

[SETTING TIME] 2006/11/05 21:02:38 USE [UP/DOWN/ENTER] PRESS : ABORT

In this menu, you can check and set the current data and time. This menu applies local time and UTC time is managed internally depending on the time zone setting. Here's how to change the present date and time; 1) Press [ENT] button to select and change a setting. 2) To change a number, use [▲][▼] button and to move next item, press [ENT] button.

[SAVE TIME] 2006/11/06 15;01:50 PRESS TO SAVE

3) To save all changed setting, press [ENT]. If “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Type” is “GMT” and “GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION / IRIG Use” is “ON”, do not set current time manually.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

393

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

12. STATUS Place the curser on “STATUS” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu. [STATUS] >1.RECLOSER 2.INPUT PORTS 3.OUTPUT PORTS 4.GOOSE S-IN 5.GOOSE D-IN 6.GOOSE OUT 7.LATCH LOGIC 8.FAULT 9.DIAGONOSTIC

12.1. Recloser Move to “MAINTENANCE / STATUS / RECLSER” to confirm tank and EVRC2A-NT status. STATUS/ RECLOSER [RECLOSER] >RECLOSER : CLOSE >PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK >CONTROL : LOCAL >RECLOSE : OFF >PHA-PROTECT: OFF >GND-PROTECT: OFF >LOCKOUT :LOCKOUT >AC POW FAIL: ON >BATTERY : NORMAL >BAT’CHRGER : NORMAL >DOOR OPEN : ON >HANDLE LOCK: OFF >GAS : NORMAL

Present recloser and EVRC2A-NT status are displayed. Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.

RECLOSER Displays Circuit Breaker status.(OPEN, CLOSE, TROUBLE)

PANEL LOCK Displays panel lock status.(LOCK, UNLOCK)

CONTROL Operation control select is displayed.(REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE)

RECLOSE Display whether to use reclosing function. (ON, OFF)

PHA-PROTECT Phase protection function status is displayed. (ON, OFF)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

394

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

STATUS/ RECLOSER [RECLOSER] >RECLOSER : CLOSE >PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK >CONTROL : LOCAL >RECLOSE : OFF >PHA-PROTECT: OFF >GND-PROTECT: OFF >LOCKOUT :LOCKOUT >AC POW FAIL: ON >BATTERY : NORMAL >BAT’CHRGER : NORMAL >DOOR OPEN : ON >HANDLE LOCK: OFF >GAS : NORMAL

GND-PROTECT Ground protection function status is displayed. (ON, OFF)

LOCKOUT Lockout of reclosing status is displayed(ON, OFF)

AC POW FAIL External power supply status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

BATTERY Battery status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

BAT’ CHARGER Battery charger status is displayed. (NORMAL, FAIL)

DOOR OPEN Door open status is displayed(ON, OFF)

GAS Circuit breaker gas pressure status is displayed. (NORMAL, LOW)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

395

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.2. Input Ports Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS” to confirm input ports’s status. STATUS/ INPUT PORTS [INPUT PORTS] 101 : OFF 102 : OFF 103 : OFF 104 : OFF 105 : OFF ： ： ： IN 208 : OFF IN IN IN IN IN

Displays input terminals’ status.  IN101 ~ IN112 : Displays the status of SCADA input ports (But, when ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked “OFF”)  IN201 ~ IN208 : Displays the status of input ports. Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed. [▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

12.3. Output Ports Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS” to confirm output ports’s status. STATUS/ OUTPUT PORTS [OUTPUT PORTS] OUT 101: OFF OUT 102: OFF OUT 103: OFF OUT 104: OFF OUT 105: OFF ： ： ： OUT 214: OFF

Displays output terminals’ status.  OUT101 ~ OUT108 : Displays the status of the SCADA output ports (But, when the ‘SCADA I/O Use’ setting is OFF, it always is marked “OFF”).  OUT201 ~ OUT214 : Displays the status of the output ports. Depending on output signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed. [▼] [▲] button is used to check all outpu terminal status.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

396

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.4. GOOSE Single Input Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE S-IN” to confirm goode single inputs’s status. STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN [GOOSE S-IN] >GSIN01 ST : >GSIN01 FAIL: >GSIN02 ST : >GSIN02 FAIL: >GSIN03 ST : >GSIN03 FAIL: ： ： >GSIN16 ST : >GSIN16 FAIL:

The EVRC2A-NT provides 16 goose single inputs of IEC 61850 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

communication protocol. This menu displays the goose single input's status provided by the EVRC2A-NT.  GSIN## ST : Displays goose single input’s current status

ON OFF

 GSIN## FAIL : Displays goose single input’s fail status. Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed. [▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

12.5. GOOSE Double Input Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE D-IN” to confirm goode double inputs’s status. STATUS/ GOOSE D-IN [GOOSE D-IN] >GDIN010 Bit0: >GDIN011 Bit1: >GDIN01F Fail: >GDIN020 Bit0: >GDIN021 Bit1: >GDIN02F Fail: ： ： >GDIN160 Bit0: >GDIN161 Bit1: >GDIN16F Fail:

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

The EVRC2A-NT provides 16 goose double inputs of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. This menu displays the goose double input's status provided by the EVRC2A-NT.  GSIN##0 Bit0 : goose double input – displays the current status of

ON OFF OFF

first bit(bit 0).  GSIN##1 Bit1 : goose double input – displays the current status of the second bit(bit 1).  GSIN##F Fail : Displays goose double input’s fail status. Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed. [▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

397

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

12.6. GOOSE Output Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / GOOSE OUT” to confirm goode outputs’s status. STATUS/ GOOSE S-IN [GOOSE OUT] >GOUT01: OFF >GOUT02: OFF GOUT03: OFF ： ： >GOUT16: OFF

The EVRC2A-NT provides 16 goose outputs of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. This menu displays the goose output's status provided by the EVRC2A-NT. Depending on input signal, “ON” or “OFF” is displayed. [▼] [▲] button is used to check all input terminal status.

12.7. Latch Logic The EVRC2A-NT provides eight(8) latch logics. The latch logic can be configurated by the user through the PLC Edit. When input condition set in LSET # (Latch Logic Set Condition) of PLC is occured, the LT#(Latch Logic) is set(‘1’). When the input condition set in LRST # (Latch Logic Reset Condition) occurs, the corresponding latch logic is cleared to 0. For details, refer to “7.1.5.5. Latch Logic”.

Figure 12-1. PLC Edit Window of ETIMS Interface Software

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

398

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / LATCH LOGIC”. STATUS/ LATCH LOGIC [LATCH LOGIC] >LT01 : OFF LT02 : OFF LT03 : OFF LT04 : OFF LT05 : OFF LT06 : OFF LT07 : OFF LT08 : OFF

Displays latch logic’s status.  LT01 ~ LT08 : Displays the status of the latch logic 01 ~ 08.

12.8. Fault You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / FAULT”. STATUS/ FAULT [FAULT] >FAULT TRIP: 27P1T : 27P1AL : 27P2T : 27P2AL : 27RSI : 27RSCL : 59P1T : 59P1AL : 59P2T : 59P2AL : 59RSI : 59RSCL : 81U1T : 81U2T : 81O1T : 81O2T : 81D1T : 81D2T : 81RSI : 81RSCL :

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

This menu displays the fault conditions that can not be indicated on the front panel LEDs. Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.

FTRIP : Fault Trip Operation status. 27P1T : Under Voltage 1 Trip status 27P1A : Under Voltage 1 Alarm status 27P2T : Under Voltage 2 Trip status 27P2A : Under Voltage 2 Alarm status 27RSI : Under Voltage Auto Restoration Running status 27RSCL : Under Voltage Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts 59P1T : Over Voltage 1 Trip status 59P1A : Over Voltage 1 Alarm status 59P2T : Over Voltage 2 Trip status 59P2A : Over Voltage 2 Alarm status 59RSI : Over Voltage Auto Restoration Running status 59RSCL : Over Voltage Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts 81U1T : Under Frequency 1 Trip status 81U2T : Under Frequency 2 Trip status

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

399

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

STATUS/ FAULT

81O1T : Over Frequency 1 Trip status 81O2T : Over Frequency 2 Trip status 81D1T : Frequency Decay 1 Trip status 81D2T : Frequency Decay 2 Trip status 81RSI : Frequency Auto Restoration Running status 81RSCL : Frequency Auto Restoration Close Operation stauts

12.9. Diagonosic You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / DIAGNOSTIC” STATUS/ DIAGNOSTIC [DIGNOSTIC] >DIGALM : >DIGERR : DIGIGBT: >DIGRTC : DIGCLC : DIGOPOW: >ACFAIL : >BATBAD : NOBATT : >CHGBAD : PWDOWN :

Diagnostic status of EVRC2A-NT and System are displayed. When a OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

diagnostic event occurs, the related status is displayed on “ON”. After the diagnostic event disappears, the status changes to “OFF” status. Use [▼] [▲] button to check all items.

DIGALM : EVRC2A-NT on the alarm status. DIGERR : EVRC2A-NT has one error or more. When this status is “ON, it means that there are critical errors on the system. Thus, it makes to block all protection functions.

DIGRTC : Unusual condtion on Real Time Clock(RTC) DIGCLC : Unusual condtion on Close Coil DIGSPOW : Unusual condtion on System Power ACFAIL: External AC Power Fail status BATBAD : Battery Voltage Bad status NOBATT : Battery Voltage Low status CHGBAD : Charger Voltage Fail status PWDOWN : Power Down status (AC Fail & No Battery)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

400

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

13. METERING Place the curser on “METERING” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu. The accuracy of the measurement value displayed in this menu is “2.3. Metering Accuracy”.

[METERING] >1.CURRENT 2.VOLTAGE 3.FREQUENCY 4.POWER 5.ENERGY 6.DEMAND 7.UNBALANCE 8.HARMONICS 9.TRUE R.M.S 10.CONTROLLER REF

13.1. Current Following values are contained in the current metering. 

IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)



IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)



IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)



IN : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)



SEF: Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg°)



I1 : Indicates the measured normal voltage and phasor.(A, deg°)



I2: Indicates the measured negative phase sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)



3I0: Indicates the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°)



Peak IA : Displays the measured phase A Peak current (A)



Peak IB : Displays the measured phase B Peak current (A)



Peak IC : Displays the measured phase C Peak current (A)



Peak IN : Displays the measured ground Peak current (A)



Peak IQ : Displays the measured negative sequence Peak current (A) NOTE

The peak current is updated by the recorded load current value when the load current alarm event occurs. If the load current alarm function is DISABLE, the peak current is not updated. The load current alarm function is described in “8.3.6. Load Current Alarm”.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

401

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT” MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT Current per phase and angle per phase are displayed. Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.

13.2. Voltage Following values are contained in the voltage metering. 

VS-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at source side, are displayed(㎸, deg°).



VS-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(㎸, deg°).



VS-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(㎸, deg°).



VL-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at load side, are displayed (㎸, deg°).



VL-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (㎸, deg°).



VL-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (㎸, deg°).

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE” MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE [VS-PN] : 0.00 kV ∠ : 0.00 kV ∠ : 0.00 kV ∠

0° 0° 0°

[VS-PP] AB : 0.00 kV ∠ BC : 0.00 kV ∠ CA : 0.00 kV ∠

0° 0° 0°

[VS-SEQ] V1 : 0.00 kV ∠ V2 : 0.00 kV ∠ 3V0: 0.00 kV ∠

0° 0° 0°

[VL-SEQ] V1 : 0.00 kV ∠ V2 : 0.00 kV ∠ 3V0: 0.00 kV ∠

0° 0° 0°

[VL-PP] AB : 0.00 kV ∠ BC : 0.00 kV ∠ CA : 0.00 kV ∠

0° 0° 0°

A B C

[VL-PN] : 0.00 kV ∠ : 0.00 kV ∠ : 0.00 kV ∠

0° 0° 0°

A B C

Voltage and angle per phase are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check it.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

402

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.3. Frequency Following values are contained in the frequency metering. 

Source: Metering value of present source side frequency is indicated.



Load : Metering value of present load side frequency is indicated.



Slip

: Frequency difference between the power source side and the load side is indicated.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY” MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY [FREQUENCY] Source: 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz/s Load : 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz/s Slip : 0.00 Hz 0.00 D

Frequency Display  Source - Frequency in source side (Hz) - Frequency decay rate in source side (Hz/sec)  Load - Frequency in load side (Hz) - Frequency decay rate in load side (Hz/sec)  Slip - Frequency difference between source and load sides: Slip frequency (Hz) - Phase difference between sour and load sides : Slip angle (deg°)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

403

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.4. Power Following values are contained in the power metering. 

ACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s active power displayed.



REACTIVE POWER: Each phase and three phase’s reactive power displayed.



APPARENT POWER: Each phase and three phase’s apparent power displayed.



POWER FACTOR: Each phase and three phase’s power factor per phase is displayed.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER” MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER Per phase, power and power factor are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check the power metering information.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

404

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.5. Energy Following values are contained in the energy metering. 

POS’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of forward direction are indicated.



POS’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of forward direction are indicated.



NEG’ W/H: Each phase and three phase active power amount of reverse direction are indicated.



NEG’ V/H: Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of reverse direction are indicated.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY” MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY Energy is displayed Use [▼][▲] button to check the energy metering information. The last line “S” of each page indicates the time that have started the present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in 0 the power by using the “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ ENERGY” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

405

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.6. Demand Current and Power EVRC2A-NT measures and indicates following Demand current and power items; 

DEMAND CURRENT: Indicates the measured value of each phase and negative phase sequence Demand current.



PHASE A CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase A, Demand current maximum value of phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value.



PHASE B CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase B, Demand current maximum value of phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value.



PHASE C CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase C, Demand current maximum value of phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value.



PHASE N CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase N, Demand current maximum value of phase N and the time that have measured the maximum value.



PHASE I2 CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present negative phase sequence, Demand current maximum valueof negative phase sequence and the time that have measured the maximum value.



POSITIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A, Demand active power maximum valueof phase A direction and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.



POSITIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B, Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.



POSITIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C, Demand active power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.



POSITIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present three-phase, Demand active power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.



NEGATIVE REAL POWER - A: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A, Demand active power maximum valueof phase A direction and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.



NEGATIVE REAL POWER – B: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B, Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

406

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT



http://www.entecene.co.kr

NEGATIVE REAL POWER - C: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C, Demand active power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.



NEGATIVE REAL POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand active value of present threephase, Demand active power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.



POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase A, Demand active power maximum valueof phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.



POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase B, Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.



POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase C, Demand reactive power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.



POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have measured the maximum value for forward direction.



NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - A: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase A, Demand active power maximum valueof phase A and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.



NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - B: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase B, Demand active power maximum valueof phase B and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.



NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER - C: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase C, Demand reactive power maximum valueof phase C and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.



NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER – 3P: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present three-phase, Demand reactive power maximum valueof three-phase and the time that have measured the maximum value for reverse direction.

*. NOTE ) The aboive Max. Demand current and power of each phase and three-phase can be reset by “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ MAX DEMAND” menu.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

407

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND” MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND

Demand current and power is indicated. Use [▼][▲] key to check the Demand metering information.

13.7. Unbalance Following values are contained in the unbalance metering. 

SOURCE-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.



LOAD-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.



CURRENT: Current unbalance is displayed.

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE” MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE [UNBALANCE- %] SOURCE-VOLT: 0.00 LOAD-VOLT: 0.00 CURRENT: 0.00

Unbalance metering information is displayed.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

408

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.8. Harmonics You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS” MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS [%V-Harm. THD : 0.0 02H : 0.0 03H : 0.0

A/B/C] 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

[%V-Harm. 04H : 0.0 05H : 0.0 06H : 0.0

[%I-Harm. 31H] A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0

A/B/C] 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

[%V-Harm. A/B/C] 31H : 0.0 0.0 0.0

[%I-Harm. 02H] A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0

[%I-Harm. THD] A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0

Voltage and current harmonic rate are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check harmonic rate information.

13.9. True R.M.S You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S” MAIN MENU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S [VOLTAGE-TURE R.M.S] A : 000 V B : 000 V C : 000 V

TRUE R.M.S voltage and current per phase are displayed. Use [▼][▲] button to check TURE R.M.S. information.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

409

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

13.10. Controller Reference You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLLER REF” MAIN MENU / METERING / CONTROLL REF In this menu, the reference measurement value for checking the condition of EVRC2A-NT is displayed. This menu consists of 2 pages and use [▼] [▲] button to move into sub-menu.  BATTERY VOLT : Display the battery voltage.  CHARGER VOLT : Display the voltage of charge circuit.  CHARGER I : Displays charge current. When the measurement value is positive, it’s charge current. On the other side, the measurement value is negavitve, it’s discharge current.  BATTERY CAP.: Displays battery capacity by ‘Battery Management’.  TEMPER.(IN) : Displays internal temperature of EVRC2A-NT.  TEMPER.(OUT) : Displays external temperature of EVRC2ANT (control box internal temperature)(But, ‘EXT. Temper’ Use’ is OFF, it doesn’t indicate that item).  +12V : Displays +12V system power measurement value.  -12V : Displays -12V system power measurement value.  REF. VOLT : Displays reference voltage 2.5V measurement value.  GAS PRE(bar) : Displays gas pressure(But, when ‘GAS Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t indicate that item).  GAS PRE(VOL) : Displays input voltage value configured on gas pressure input port. It calculates gas pressure using that voltage value. (But, when ‘GAS Sensor’ is NONE, it doesn’t indicate that item).

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

410

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14. INSTALLATION 14.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch

ETR300-R

1

2

3

4

5

6

51 TOC 50 IOC 50 IOCL A

ESC

FUN

B C G

ENT

S EF 27 UV 59 OV 25 SYNCHRONISM 81 UF/OF/RF VA / VR VB / VS VC / VT NPQ TRIP NPQ ALARM MANUAL CLOSING VOLTAGE ALARM GAS ALARM MACANIS M LOCK CLOSE BLOCK

TYPE : SERIAL No : DATE : 20

.

.

POWER SUPPLY : WEIGHT :

VAC

kg

Figure 14-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch User Interface Door User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull the handle. Control Power Switch After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power, right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control. AC Power Outlet For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 14-4. Inner Structure”. Air Vent To prevent from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are covered with left and right side.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

411

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan 443

?3

0

? 17

291.5 321.5

901.5

826.5

? 34

86

Figure 14-2. Dimensions and Mounting Plan

The top of the control box where the solar radiation is directly applied consists of a double structure. The inside of the door is insulated with 5t insulator on the front side of the door so that it can withstand rapid temperature changes. An air vent is installed at the top and bottom of the control box to remove moisture from inside and it is also satisfying IP54 that can withstand dust / moisture.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

412

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

The control box is able to withstand the external environment and temperature changes for a long time, and STS304 material is used to prevent rust. In addition, it is spray painted with Munsell No. N5Y 7/1 (gray line), for durability of painting. All metal parts of the control box are earthed to the enclosure and an earthing terminal for the ground cable is provided on the outside of the enclosure. The ground terminal can be connected up to 113mm of cable without separate auxiliary devices. At the bottom of the control box, there are an antenna hole for remote communication and three spare holes(Φ21) for user convenience in preparation for future improvement.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

413

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.3. Earth Wiring Diagram

Figure 14-3. Earth Wiring Diagram After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground. Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12㎜(0.470") diameter. Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from EVRC2A-NT Earth Terminal must be connected to the ground.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

414

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.4. Inner Structure GPS Door switch Control Module User Available space 350*200*H100mm (Modem space)

Capacitor Bank

FUSE

SMPS

3 Point locking

SPD (Surge Protection Device)

SERIAL No : DATE : 20

.

.

POWER SUPPLY : WEIGHT :

RAIL HOL DER

RAIL HOL DER

TYPE :

VAC

kg

Terminal Block

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

US L-5SR4

END C OVER

PW

T

T

Ampl ifier

S

S

Phase Angle

Power Transformer

R

R

C

C

B

B

A

A

POWE R

CN1 OUTP UT

CN3 I NP UT

CN2

N

Nameplate

L

Battery

A document pocket MCB(Battery, AC Power)

AC Power Outlet

Heater(option)

Figure 14-4. Inner Structure Controller Power MCB (Miniature Circuit Breaker) Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac. Heater Optional Heater is 40W Battery Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use (＋) screwdriver for replacement. Fuse Fuse is for circuit protection Terminal Block Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user. User Available Space Space for additional hardware connection. AC Power Outlet(Option) AC Power Outlet is helpful for local operator as such getting AC Power using laptop.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

415

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.5. Mount Accessories Dimensions

Figure 14-5. Mount Accessories Dimensions Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space. On Base plate, 10㎜/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate. Available space for height of base plate is 100㎜

14.6. User-Available DC Power Table 14-1. User-Available DC Power Voltage Rating

Voltage Range

Maximum Power output

24Vdc

20∼25Vdc

40W Continuous

12Vdc

11.0∼12.5Vdc

60W 60second

Positions

Standard Voltage : 24Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating 60W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 60W, additional power should be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer. Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315＂). With using (＋) PTR J connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to AWG12. When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there is a fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

416

IC IB IA IG

17

VC

18

VB VT

14

VS

3

15

VR

6

10

2 5

P1

11 12

1 4 69

VD

9 8 7

52b P2

52a

52b

C

B

A

SOURCE SIDE

+ CC + TC

b c

b c

d e

d e

J05

f g

f g

h j m p

h j m p

J01 02 03

r

r

k n s

k n s

P7 1 2

VB VA CN32

VT VS VR

P1 1 2 3 7 4 5 6 8

P2 1 2 3 7 4 5 6 8

CN31

IN201 IN202 IN203 IN204 IN205 IN206 IN207 IN208

CAP+ IGBT

SMPS-C Module LD1 POWER

2

ALARM OUTPUT

OUT205 OUT206

H01

401

02

301

310

401

410

Power input

120

G03 P

220

G04 N

24VAC

Controller Module EVRC2A-NT(610) (Option)

L

BATTERY BATT.

RS232TX RS232RX RS232GND IRIG-B(+) IRIG-B(-) N/C POW+ POW-

+ -

GPS Module (Option)

G02

230

N

1

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

G01

410

200

AC outlet

2

313

310

401

LEGEND

52a : Close status(52a closed if switch open) 52b : Open status(52b closed if switch close) 69 : Switch lock(69 closed if switch lock) VD : Resistive Voltage Divider Protection B/D : CT & VD protection MCB1 : C60N/04A 2P (Scheider Electric) MCB2 : C60H-DC/06A 2P (Scheider Electric) TF1 : Fuses, 10A(Heater/outlet etc.) TC : Trip Coil(120VDC) CC : Close Coil(120VDC) SMPS-C : Capacitor Charge Power Supply Module DP-1202AD(200W)-DONG RAC X901 : Terminal block(250V/20A), USL-5SR4(18) C1 : Capacitor 68000uF/160WV TF1 : 7A/220V (FUSE) HT1 : Heater(AC220V)

130

+ DC24V or DC12V - (40W / Continuous) + (60W / 1min) -

417

http://www.entecene.co.kr

313

04

Neutral

BAT1

8 digital output

OUT207

Power output

(MODEM POWER)

TB2

Tr1

SMA

Wifi (option)

CN3

BATT' IN (DC24V) + 2 1

AC240V

RS232-2

-

3 4

3

RS232-1

+

AC24V IN

2

CN1

2

1,2,3 + DC120V OUTPUT 4,5,6 -

LD3 DC120V OUTPUT

FG ZG

PW

2

SG

12 digital input

I01 02 03 04 05 06

CN2

4 1

SMPS ON INPUT

1

485-

RS485

SCADA (option)

03

SPD

CAP-

Capacitor Bank

230 130

AC power input Receptacle (SVG02B1:22-2/male)

Eth2 (TP/FX)

485+ (Open) (Close) (Lock) (Gas) (Door) (CBP_OK) Spare Spare

C1

TB1

C

Eth1 (TP/FX)

VR VS VT

J04

1

B

VA VB VC

K01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

DOOR S/W

R

100

SEF

E01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 MOV2

Shield Cable

A

USB-B

IG

IRIG-B

R

VC

IB IC

TRIP & CLOSE

52a

IG

IA

INPUT

12 11 10

IA

VOLTAGE 4V

VA

IB

4V

PROTECTION C.T

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Figure 14-6. EVRC2A-NT Typical Wiring Diagram

9 P3 13

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P S T U V W X Z a

0.16A

VD

16

MOV1

F01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

IC

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P S T U V W X Z a

PW

Protection B/D (CT & VD)

R

Receptacle(female) (SVG02B1:28-21)

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

S

Control Cabinet Receptacle(male) (SVG02B1:28-21)

CURRENT 1A

T

14.7. EVRC2A-NT Wiring Diagram

Recloser LOAD SIDE

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.8. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram Current IG is connected with Side Panel IN(F07, F08) in Earthing System. SEF(F09, F10) should be connected, so

IC 8

Non Earthing System. IN(F07,F08) should be connected to each

SEF

9

IN

7

SEF(F09, F10) of Side Panel in.

10

6

Current IN should be connected with

5

4

IB

3

2

IA

F01

called “JUMPER”

CT

10

SEF

9

8

IN

7

6

IC

5

4

IB

3

2

IA

F01

other.

CT

Figure 14-7. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to “Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation” CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

418

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.9. VD Wiring Diagram 

VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) measures Voltage with using Capacitor or Resistance installed in each Bushing of Recloser.



VD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.



Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged. Option CVD 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸ Class



Option RVD 15㎸, 27㎸ Class

8

VN

7

VT

6

VS

5

VR

4

VN

3

VC

2

VB

VA

E01



PT

Figure 14-8. VD Wiring Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

419

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.10. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation

Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same. “Figure 14-9. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and Recloser. If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and VD wiring in side panel to be matched. EVRC2A-NT Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

420

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.11. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions Table 14-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions Pin

Function

Pin

Function

A

C.T Phase C

a

52 common(Auxiliary)

B

C.T Phase B

b

52b(Auxiliary)

C

C.T Phase A

c

52a(Auxiliary)

D

C.T Common(G)

d

Close and Trip Coil Common

E

VD Source Phase C

e

Close and Trip Coil Common

F

VD Source Phase B

f

Close and Trip Coil Common

G

VD Source Phase A

g

Close Coil

H

VD Load side Phase T

h

Close Coil

J

VD Load side Phase S

j

Close Coil

K

VD Load side Phase R

k

not connected

L

Pressure Sensor Output(controller input)

m

Trip Coil

M

not connected

n

not connected

N

Pressure Sensor Power AGND

p

Trip Coil

P

Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc

r

Trip Coil

R

Cable shield and Ground

s

not connected

S

not connected

T

Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect)

U

Recloser Status Common

V

Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Open)

W

Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close)

X

not connected

Z

not connected



Control EVRC2A-NT Receptacle : VG95234 28-21S (Female)



Recloser Receptacle : VG95234 28-21P (Male)



Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5”)



Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R”

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

421

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Figure 14-10. Control Receptacle “Figure 14-10. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control EVRC2A-NT.

14.12. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling. For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position. Following notices are suggested. Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing. Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this to complete connection. Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control Cable assembling

Figure 14-11. Recloser Receptacle

Figure 14-12. Control Cable

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

422

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.13. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions Table 14-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions Pin Function A

AC Power Input

B

AC Power Input (Neutral)

C

EARTH

Standard Input Voltage of Control EVRC2ANT is 220Vac.

Figure 14-13. Power Receptacle

14.14. AC Power Cable Type : VG22-2S(Female) Cable Length : 2C-3.5㎟ 6meter(236") A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase) B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral) C PIN : Earth

14.15. Fuses Table 14-4. Fuses Positions

Terminal Block TF1 Inside Relay Module F1 (Power board)

Rating / External AC - Power Input 10A

5A

Dimensions 0.25"×1.25" (6.385×31.75)㎜ 0.197"×0.787" (5×20)㎜

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Purpose AC Power outlet and Heater User Available AC Power User-Available DC Power

423

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.16. Battery and Control run time Table 14-5. Battery Specs Maker

CSB

Battery Type

GP 12170

Nominal Voltage

12V

Nominal capacity

17 amp-hours

Dimension

181×76×167㎜

Self-discharge Versus Time

14 month at +25℃, 5 month at +40℃

Service life Time

5 years at +25℃, 1 .5years at +50℃

Battery Connector(CN11)

Molex Connector 3191-2R

Controller run time

24 hours at -5℃, 32 hours at 25℃

Recharge Time

15 hours at +25℃

Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series. Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to battery switch NFB1. In order to store Battery for a long time, turn NFB1 “OFF” without disconnecting Harness connector. The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of +20℃(+68℉). The self-discharge rate varies with ambient temperature. The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an battery can be empirically determined from “Figure 14-15. Open Circuit Voltage”. Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. Remove Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery voltage. If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual capacity is 0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance. 24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and SMPS-C Module through NFB1(Battery Switch). Relay Module supplies through PTR G Connector in Side Panel and SMPS-C Module supplies through PTR J Connector of SMPS-C Module.

2 1

Figure 14-14. Battery

Figure 14-15. Open Circuit Voltage

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

424

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.17. Charge Circuit Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to prevent over-recharge. Charge power supply is 24Vac, equal with Relay Module. Charging device charges up to 80 percent of battery with constant current, from 80 to 100 percent of battery with constant voltage, it makes that there’s any danger of overcharging. To measure temperature in charging circuit, it helps to compensate with charging voltage, 26.4V to 28.2V. When measured temperature is 5~35℃, charging voltage is 27.3V. Below 5℃ and higher than 35℃ are measured, charging voltages are 28.2V and 26.4V, respectively. Charge Voltage : 27.3Vdc(26.4V~28.2V) Charge Current : 1.2Adc

14.18. Battery Change Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and is connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver. For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake. For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire later. Refer to “14.16. Battery and Control run time”

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

425

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.19. Communication Cables 1) Cable USB-B to USB-A: Connect to Computer ETR300-R Controller

Computer

Figure 14-16. Cable USB-B to USB-A (connect to computer)

2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option

Figure 14-17. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)

3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option

Figure 14-18. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

426

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.20. Hardware Block Diagram RECLOSER

CONTROL

TRM

Human-Machine Interface Module

(TRANSFORMER MODULE)

PROTECTION CT

VOLTAGE DIVIDER

20 X 8 Line LCD METER CURRENT VOLTAGE FREQUENCY BATTERY

4 CT INPUTS 1 CT SENSITIVE

6 VD INPUTS

USB-B TYPE

Main Process Module (ETR300-R(600))

Ethernet 1 TP or FX (Option) Protocol

PSM ( Power Supply Module) 52 CONTACT 69 CONTACT

MONITORED

Ethernet 2 TP or FX (Option)

DNP 3.0 MODBUS IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-104

RS232-1

IEC 61850 (Option)

RS232-2

CLOSE/TRIP

RS485

MAGNETIC

CONTROL

ACTUATOR Capacitor SMPS-C (Capacitor Charger)

IRIG-B

120Vdc SCADA Option BATTERY 24Vdc

AC EXTERNAL POWER INPUT

Transformer

DIGITAL INPUTS 12

DIGITAL OUTPUT 8

24Vac DC Power Output (DC12V or DC24V)

Figure 14-19. Hardware Block Diagram

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

427

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.21. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

Controller

Recloser

INPUT COM

(12Vdc)

K09

IN201

(Trip Status)

IN202

(Close Status)

K01 K02

IN203

(Unlock Status)

IN206

(Cap, Charge OK)

K03 K06

1114

U

1115 1116 1117

CN1

I01

52a

T

69

ALARM OUTPUT

1 2

I02

Relay Module

W

SMPS-C Module

2 4

CN3

J04

+120VDC

52b

1120

CN2

OUT205

V

1,2,3 +

C1

4,5,6 -

J05 TB1

IGBT

2

ZG 1 FG

SMPS ON INPUT

3 4

TB1

AC24V IN

BATT' IN (DC24V)

2 1

TB2

DC120V OUTPUT

LD1

LD3

d e f

Common

J03

g

CC

h Close Control

Trip Control

J01

j

J02

m

TC

p r

0VDC

Side Panel

Control Cable

CC

Close Coil

TC

Trip Coil

C

Capacitor for Trip & Close

IGBT

IGBT Contact for Trip & Close Control Figure 14-20. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

SMPS-C is a module that receives AC 24V and BATT '(DC24V) input and charges the capacitor for trip & close in CC (continuous current) mode.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

428

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr



SMPS ON INPUT: ON/OFF input terminal of SMPS module and operates ON when short



DC120V OUTPUT: DC120V output terminal for charging capacitor



LD1: Lights up when SMPS module operates



LD3: Lights up when capacitor charging is complete



ALARM OUTPUT: Capacitor charge completion signal contact

When the IGBT is "ON", the charged capacitor's power turns on the trip/close coil, resulting in recloser operation.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

429

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.22. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 124 125 126 127

Figure 14-21. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram 

CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.



The capacity of VD is 20㎊, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

430

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.23. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram INTERUPTERS VACUUM

Protection Module 16

4 1 5 P1

2 6 3

17 18

13 P3

7 8 9

14 15 10

P2

10 11

9

11 12

Receptacle(MS28-21P)

1305 1303 1301 1302 1312 1311 1310 1318 1316 1314

12 69

52b 52a 52b 52a

+ +

TC

CC

1112 1111 1110 1109 1108 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB1

1112 1111 1109 1108 1107 1106 1105 1104 1102 1101

IC IB IA IG VC VB VA VT VS VR

A B C D E F G H J K L N P T U V W a b c d e f g h j m p r R RE1

Figure 14-22. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram

Recloser EPR standard wiring diagram 

CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.



The resistance of VD is 100MΩ, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

431

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.24. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) Table 14-6. Current Transformer (CT) Description

Pin

Function

A

C.T Phase C

CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard)

B

C.T Phase B

CT Resistance < 5

C

C.T Phase A

D

C.T Common(G)

14.25. CT Protection Circuit A circuit which prevent from increasing voltage of secondary CT when Open Circuit, is built. This circuit use TRIAC components and it is operated when the secondary voltage is 27 ~ 35V.

Figure 14-1. CT Protection Circuit 

D is Diac component and bi-directional and it works when 27~35V is applied.



Q is Triac component and bi-directional and it works when the Voltage is applied at GATE.



When CT secondary circuit is OPEN, the voltage is raised and D voltage is within 27~35V, D is activated and operates Q in order to prevent a voltage increasing at both side of CT. Therefore, the secondary voltage of CT is not increased over D voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

432

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.26. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) Table 14-7. Voltage Divider (VD) Description

Pin

Function

E

VD Source Phase C

Pin R is connected to Ground.

F

VD Source Phase B

VD Capacitance : 20㎊

G

VD Source Phase A

H

VD Load side Phase T

J

VD Load side Phase S

K

VD Load side Phase R

R

Cable shield and Ground

E

VD Source Phase C

F

VD Source Phase B

G

VD Source Phase A

K

VD Load side Phase R

R

Cable shield and Ground

EVR RECLOSER

For VD Protection, MOV is connected between Phase and Ground.

Figure 14-23. VD Wiring Diagram of EVR EPR RECLOSER Pin R is connected to Ground. VD Capacitance of Source Phase : 100MΩ VD Capacitance of Load side Phase : 100MΩ For VD Protection, MOV is connected between Phase and Ground. For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.

Figure 14-24. VD Wiring Diagram

Voltage Measuring Method 1

of EPR

measure MOV voltage. (measure a voltage between MOV arms) Voltage Measuring Method 2 Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and measure MOV voltage.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

433

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.27. Voltage Transducer

Figure 14-25. Voltage Transducer



Voltage sensing device measures a voltage by using capacity of capacitor built or capacity of resistance built in bushing of switch. Capacity of capacitor is 26㎊(±%), resistanc 100㏁.



Voltage sensing device divides a voltage by using Voltage Divider(VD) and secondary capacitor or resistance, and then divided voltage is supplied to RTU through Amplifer(AMP) circuit and Transformer.



MOV(TNR15G820K) is used to protect surge of control.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

434

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.28. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) Table 14-8. EVRC2A-NT Pressure Sensor Description

Pin

Function

L

Pressure Sensor Output

Sensor Power is delivered from

N

Pressure Sensor Power AGND

Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-)

P

Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc

Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)

5.0 4.5

Output voltage(Vdc)

4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 -0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

Pressure (bar)

Figure 14-26. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

435

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.29. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact Table 14-9. 52 contact and 69 contact Description

Pin

69 is b Contact when unlocked.

Function

T

69b(Monitored locked)

U

Common(52 and 69)

V

52b(Monitored Trip)

W

52a(Monitored Close)

a

52 common(Auxiliary)

b

52b(Auxiliary)

c

52a(Auxiliary)

14.30. Recloser Trip and Close Coil Table 14-10. Trip and Close Coil Description

Pin

Function

d

Close and Trip Coil Common

e

Close and Trip Coil Common

Pin d, e and f are combined as one line.

f

Close and Trip Coil Common

Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one line

g

Close Coil

Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one line.

h

Close Coil

Close Coil Resistance : < 5

j

Close Coil

Trip Coil Resistance : < 2

m

Trip Coil

p

Trip Coil

r

Trip Coil

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

436

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

14.31. Recloser Test Kit RTS 2010 Model tests EVRC2A-NT by Fault Simulation. RTS 2010 can display Full Sequence of Trip time, Trip current, Interval on LCD screen and also can variously test Calibration Mode, OCR Mode, External Mode, Manual Mode.

Figure 14-27. Recloser Test Kit Standard Ratings and Features Table 14-11. Standard Ratings and Features Classification Current output

Rating and Characteristic 1.5Arms ×3ch (Burden below 1Ω) 4.5Arms×1ch (3ch Parallel) Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.1mA)

Voltage output

7Vrms ×4ch (Burden over 1㏀) Accuracy ( 0.2% or 0.002V)

Binary input

BI01~02: DC12~150V or Dry contact(User select) BI03~04: DC12~150V(Pulse below 1sec)

Binary output

BO01~04 130mA/350V, ON Resistance (below 35 Ω)

Time Accuracy

±5ms

Weight

6kg(RTS2010), 1.2kg(cable), 6kg AL Case

Dimensions

325×150×270 (RTS2010) 521×258×348 (AL CASE)

Control Interface Cable

2M

Operating Temperature

-20℃ ~ +50℃

Power input

AC180~264 @ Select AC220V AC 90~132 @ Select AC110V Max. 150W

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

437

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

15. MAINTANANCE 15.1. Warning Events EVRC2A-NT possesses self-test and self-diagnostic function. If any abnormal behavior is detected in the system, it records the corresponding events in the Diagnostic Event or System Event and transmits it to SCADA system via remote.

“Table 15-1. Warning Events” is the list of self-diagnosis conditions managed by EVRC2A-NT system processing method and user’s recommended actions.. Users are requested to refer to “Table 15-1. Warning Events” in case of any abnormality in the system. Table 15-1. Warning Events(1/3) EVENT

EVENT TEXT (LCD) ACFAIL

External power FAIL

CHGBAD

Battery charge circuit FAIL ; CHGLOW or CHGHIGH

1) CHGLOW

Battery charge circuit volt LOW (Value 25V)

2) CHGHIGH

Battery charge circuit volt HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)

BATBAD

Battery BAD ; BATLOW, BATHIG, NOBAT or Batt Cap’ Alarm Level when BATT Manageement is ENABLED.

SYSTEM POWER

POWER MODE

DOWN

GAS STATUS *. applied only gas insulation type (EVR)

SYSTEM RESTART

EXPLANATION

EVRC2A-NT ACTION

USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION

‘AC SUPPLY’ LED OFF

1. Check AC Power NFB 2. Check AC Power fuse 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected

‘CHARGER’ LED OFF

1. Check AC supply 2. Check Battery charge Voltage (range DC 27 ~ DC 28V) 3. Replace Analog Module

‘BATTERY’ LED OFF

1. Check AC Power NFB 2. Check AC Power fuse 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected 4. Replace Battery charge T.R 5. Check battery NFB 6. Check battery connection

1) BATLOW

Battery volt LOW (15V < Value 21V)

2) BATHIGH

Battery charge circuit volt HIGH (Value ≥ 28V)

3) NOBATT

NO Battery (Value < 15V)

PWDOWN

Power down mode (Value < 21V and ACFAIL)

Controller power turn off

No problem 1. Check AC supply 2. Check battery

GASLOW

Gas pressure LOW (Value 0.1 bar)

GASHIGH

Gas pressure HIGH (Value ≥ 1.5V)

CLOSE block When ‘Opr’ Block GPF’ setting is ON

1.Ensure Control cable is securely connected 2. Check Control cable fault 3. Replace Main Processing Module 4. Replace Recloser.

SYSRST

System restarted

-

No problem

CLDRST

Cold Restarted

-

No problem

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

438

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 15-1. Warning Events(2/3) EVRC2A-NT ACTION

EVENT

EVENT TEXT (LCD)

SETTING (Refer to SET CHANGE Event)

GLSCHG (Global setting) and GRSCH1~ GRSCH6(Group setting)

Setting Changed

-

CF

Close fail

-

TRF

Trip fail

-

DIGOPOW

Capacitor charger power supply error

-

1.Ensure status input connector cable is securely connected 2. Check SMPS-C module 3. Check IN210 stauts

DIGIGBT

IGBT error

-

1.Ensure status input cable is securely connected 2. Check IN210 and IN211stauts

TRIP & CLOSE

EXPLANATION

USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION No problem * But somebody modified the setting data.

1. Check the close/trip module 2. Check the receptacle pin 3.Ensure Control cable is securely connected 4.Check SMPS-C module 5.Check close/open magnetic contactor (MC)

DIGCLC

Close coil error

-

1.Ensure status input cable is securely connected 2. Check IN210, IN212, IN213 and IN214 stauts

DIGTRC

Trip coil error

-

1.Ensure status input cable is securely connected 2. Check IN210 and IN213stauts

SELFTER

System error while booting

DIGGLSET

Detail message are recorded in diagnostic event

1.Check the diagnostic event 2.Refer to EVENT TEXT

Global setting error

Restored default setting by itself

1. Execute System Restart 2. Execute default setting 3. Replace Main Processing Module

DIGGRESET

Group setting error

Restored default setting by itself

1. Execute System Restart 2. Execute default setting 3. Replace Main Processing Module

DIGSPU

DSP moule error or ADC processer error

Correct measurement and protection does not work

1. Execute System Restart 2. Replace DSP Module 3. Replace Main Processing Module

DIGADC

A/D conversion error

Correct measurement and protection does not work

1. Execute System Restart 2. Replace DSP Module 3. Replace Main Processing Module

DIGEVT

Recorded events format error

Cleared events by itself

1. Execute All Clear Event 2. Execute System Restart 3. Replace Main Processing Module

DIGCNT

Registered error

Cleared count by itself

1. Execute All Clear Data 2. Execute System Restart 3. Replace Main Processing Module

Cleared data(energy, max. demand, contact wear and battery capacity) by itself

1. Execute All Clear Data 2. Execute System Restart 3. Replace Main Processing Module

detected

SELF TEST

DIGMEM

count

Registered data error

data

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

439

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

Table 15-1. Warning Events(3/3) EVENT

SELF TEST

EVENT TEXT (LCD)

EXPLANATION

EVRC2A-NT ACTION

DIGGPS

IRIG/GPS module error

-

DIGGPSLK

IRIG/GPS link fail

-

DIGEXIO

External I/O Unit ETIO10 error

Cleared external TD metering value, external input status and external output status

DIGWIFI

Wifi module error

-

DIGWIFILK

Wifi link eerror

-

DISTHM

External thermistor error

-

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION 1.Ensure IRIG connector connector cable is securely connected 2. Check IRIG module 3. Check ‘IRIG Use’ setting 1.Ensure ETIO10 connector connector cable is securely connected 2. Check ETIO10 module 3. Check ‘EXT. I/O Use’ setting 1.Ensure Wifi connector connector cable is securely connected 2. Check Wifi module 3. Check ‘Wifi Use’ setting 4. Check Wifi communication setting 1.Ensure external thermistor connector cable is securely connected 2. Check external thermistor module 3. Check ‘EXT. Temper’ Use’ setting

440

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

16. PLC FUNCTION EVRC2A-NT has PLC(Programmable Logic Control) for user. PLC has Timer, Counter and Event to control input and output. Circuit can be optimized to omit unnecessary timer and aux. relay. During EVRC2A-NT running, in case the circuit needs to be changed, PLC can be used to meet user’s need. PLC is programmed in “ETIMS Interface Software”.

Figure 16-1. PLC Edit Window (Example)

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

441

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

17. FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL Without connecting ETIMS interface software, EVRC2A-NT is possible to patch upgrade firmware and to download COMTRADE(COMmon Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files on operator PC. For this function is used, it is essential to use TLS(Transport Layer Security) that universial FTP utility is installed on PC. By recommendation of universial FTP utility, there are FileZilla, WinSCP.

17.1. Patching firmware to upgrade Process of firmware patch is as follows;

1) Connect between PC and EVRC2A-NT Connect between PC and EVRC2A-NT using Ethernet cable. The Ethernet cable should be wired at ethernet port(EN1 or EN2) for Ethernet on side panel of EVRC2A-NT.

2) Access EVRC2A-NT through FTP utility After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of EVRC2A-NT required to patch firmware and No. 21 for the number of port on TLS settings of FTP utility. IP address of EVRC2A-NT refers to setting values on “GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP / PORT4/ IP Addr Oct1~ 4”. Password refers to ‘Admin PW’ setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTPSSL / Admin PW”. Access “/home/entec_system/PACKAGE” on the FTP utility.

3) Firmware Upgrade through ETIMS Interface Software Upload a file named ‘UPDATE.fw’ on directory. DOES NOT REVISE the file name. If the file name does not correspond, patching firmware is not supported. After completed to upload the file on the directory, patching firmware starts automatically. Changed firmware version is checked on device or through interface ETIMS interface software after patch process is sucessfully finished. For reference this function supports on ETIMS interface software, too.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

442

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

17.2. COMTRADE ETR-300R supports COMTRADE(COMmon Format for Transient Data Exchange) format files of fault waveforms recorded on fault event log. After executing FTP utility, enter IP address of EVRC2A-NT required to patch firmware and No.21 for the number of ports on TLS settings of FTP utility. Password refers to 'User 1 PW' setting on “GLOBAL SETTING / COMMUNICATION / FTP-SSL / User1 PW”. Access “/home/ entec_user/COMTRADE” on the FTP utility.

17.2.1. File format and Name EVRC2A-NT generates binary type COMTRADE files, only. Example of generated COMTRADE file name are 'W2C_##.CFG' and

'W2C_##.DAT'’ Here, ## is the order in which they are

generated.

17.2.2. Releated Setting Items COMTRADE file relates following settings; Table 17-1. Setting Items Menu Location

Description

GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>

COMTRADE file is generated or not (ON/OFF)

EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Record GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>

Select COMTRADE standard's revision version which

EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rev.

be applied (1999/2013)

GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>

Select

EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE P/S

COMTRADE file (Primary :1st, Secondary: 2nd)

GLOBAL SETTING >> GENERAL >>

Enter the rate of COMTRADE waveform wanted to

EVENT RECORDER >> COMTRADE Rate

generate(1~10:1)

Analog

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

channel

wanted

to

generate

443

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

18. WIRELESS CONNECTION EVRC2A-NT and ETIMS Interface Software can be connected wirelessly. Wireless connectivity is as an option. Table 18-1. Wireless Network Protocol Option Wireless Network Protocol Supported

802.11 b/g/n

Wireless Network Frequency Range Supported

2.4Ghz

18.1. Connection using WIFI (PC) It is possible to connect EVRC2A-NT wirelessly using ETIMS interface software. The connection method is same as that of connecting to AP (Access Point). In order to establish a successful connection, check the following setting items in advance. Table 18-2. Setting Items Item

Menu Location

WIFI Use

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION/

SSID

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/

P/W

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/

Hidden SSID

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/

Please refer to the ETIMS interface software manual for details of connection.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

444

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

18.2. Connection using Smart ETIMS EVRC2A-NT can be connected using Smart ETIMS interface software on the mobile phone. Smart ETIMS interface software may not be installed depending on the type and version of Mobile OS. Therefore, it is recommended to check the available Mobile OS and version before installation. Table 18-3. Supported Mobile OS and Version Mobile OS

Support O : Jelly Bean (4.1) ~ Oreo (8.0)

Android

X

iOS

In order to establish a successful connection, check the following setting items in advance. Table 18-4. Setting Items Item

Menu Location

WIFI Use

GLOBAL SETTING / GENERAL / DEVICE / H/W OPTION/

SSID

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/

P/W

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ WIFI/

Hidden SSID

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/

Please refer to the ETIMS interface software manual for details of connection.

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

445

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-NT

http://www.entecene.co.kr

18.3. Security Wireless connection between EVRC2A-NT and ETIMS interface software may be insecure. Therefore, EVRC2A-NT uses SSL / TLS and AES to enhance the security.

18.3.1. SSL / TLS SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) / TLS Transport Layer Security (TLS) is a protocol that ensures the network security and integrity of the data transmitted and received. Using this protocol, EVRC2ANT and ETIMS interface software establish a secure channel for secure communication. To use SSL / TLS, EVRC2A-NT and PC ETIMS interface software must have the same certification and private key. The current version is TLS v1.2.

18.3.2. AES Mobile ETIMS encrypts the packets transmitted to EVRC2A-NT using Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption. Only the control commands that change the settings of the EVRC2A-NT are encrypted, other commands are not encrypted. Table 18-5. AES Commands Command Type

Encryption Support

Control Command

O

Inquire (Check) and Other Commands

X

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

446